Canon EOS 80D Instruction Manual IM EN

User Manual: canon EOS 80D - Instruction Manual Free User Guide for Canon EOS Series Camera, Manual - page2

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 526 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

EOS 80D
Introduction
Getting Started
Basic Shooting
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
Image Settings
Advanced Operations
Flash Photography
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
Shooting Movies
Image Playback
Post-Processing Images
Sensor Cleaning
Customizing the Camera
Reference
Software Start Guide / Downloading Images to a Computer

EOS 80D (W)

ENGLISH

Instruction Manual

Instruction manuals (PDF files) and software can be downloaded

from the Canon website (p.4, 513).

www.canon.com/icpd

The EOS 80D (W) is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a fine-

detail CMOS sensor with approx. 24.2 effective megapixels, DIGIC 6,

high-precision and high-speed 45-point AF (Cross-type AF point: Max.

45 points), max. approx. 7.0 fps continuous shooting, Live View

shooting, Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie shooting, and wireless

functions (Wi-Fi/NFC).

Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following

To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety

Precautions” (p.20-22) and “Handling Precautions” (p.23-25). Also, read

this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.

Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further

Familiarize Yourself with the Camera

While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they

come out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store

this manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.

Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability

After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been

properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the

images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon

cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.

Copyrights

images or copyrighted music and images with music on the memory

card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that

certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography

even for private enjoyment.

Introduction

Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your

camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.

* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a

power cord.)

The camera does not come with an interface cable or HDMI cable.

The Instruction Manuals provided are listed on the next page.

If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.

Depending on the Lens Kit type, lens instruction manuals may also be

included.

Be careful not to lose any of the above items.

* For items sold separately, see System Map (p.468).

Item Check List

Battery Pack

LP-E6N

(with protective

cover)

Battery Charger

LC-E6/LC-E6E*

Camera

(with body cap)

Wide Strap

When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon

website (p.4).

The lens instruction manuals (PDF) are for lenses sold individually. Note

that when purchasing the lens kit, some of the accessories included with the

lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.

Camera and Wireless Function Basic Instruction

Manual

The booklet is the Basic Instruction Manual.

More detailed Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be

downloaded from the Canon website.

Download the Instruction Manuals (PDF files).

Connect to the Internet and access the following Canon website.

www.canon.com/icpd

Select your country or region of residence and download the

Instruction Manuals.

Instruction Manuals Available for Download

• Camera Instruction Manual

• Wireless Function Instruction Manual

• Camera and Wireless Function Basic Instruction Manual

• Lens Instruction Manuals

• Software Instruction Manuals

View the Instruction Manuals (PDF files).

Double-click a downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open

it.

To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat

Reader DC or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version

recommended) is required.

Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded free from the

Internet.

To learn how to use a PDF viewer, refer to its Help section.

Instruction Manuals

Downloading and Viewing the Instruction Manuals (PDF Files)

Software can be downloaded from the Canon website (p.513).

The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of

capacity: If the card is new or was previously formatted by another

camera or computer, format the card with this camera (p.64).

SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards

* UHS-I cards supported.

When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a reading/writing

speed class at least as high as shown in the following table.

If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may

not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card

with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.

To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card

manufacturer’s website.

Compatible Cards

Cards that Can Record Movies

Movie Recording Size (p.306) Recording Formats

MOV MP4

ALL-I (For editing) UHS Speed Class 3

or faster -

IPB (Standard)

L: 8 7-SD Speed Class 10

or faster

Other than above

-SD Speed Class 6

or faster

IPB (Light) -SD Speed Class 4

or faster

In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory

cards, and SDXC memory cards.

*The camera does not come with a card for recording images/

movies. Please purchase it separately.

Quick Start Guide

Insert the battery

(p.36)

To charge the battery, see page 34.

Insert the card

(p.37)

With the card’s label facing

toward the back of the

camera, insert it into the card

slot.

Attach the lens

(p.47)

Align the lens’s white or red mount

index with the camera’s mount

index of the same color.

Set the lens’s focus mode

switch to <f>

(p.47)

Set the power switch to <1>,

then set the Mode Dial to <A>

(Scene Intelligent Auto)

(p.78)



Turn the Mode Dial while holding down

the lock release button at the center.



All the necessary camera settings will

be set automatically.

White index Red index

Quick Start Guide

Flip out the LCD monitor

(p.40)

When the LCD monitor displays the

date/time/zone setting screens, see

page 43.

Focus on the subject

(p.50)

Look through the viewfinder and

aim the viewfinder center over the

subject.

Press the shutter button halfway,

and the camera will focus on the

subject.

If necessary, the built-in flash will be

raised.

Take the picture

(p.50)

Press the shutter button completely

to take the picture.

Review the picture.

The captured image will be

displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the

LCD monitor.

To display the image again, press

the <x> button (p.346).

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View

Shooting” (p.255).

To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.346).

To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.378).

Icons in this Manual

<6> : Indicates the Main Dial.

<5> : Indicates the Quick Control Dial.

<9> <W> <X> <Y> <Z>: Indicates the Multi-controller and the push

direction.

<0> : Indicates the Setting button.

0, 9, 7, 8: Indicates that each function remains

active for approx. 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec.,

or 16 sec. after you let go of the button.

* In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons

and displayed on the LCD monitor are also used in this manual when discussing

relevant operations and functionality.

3: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the

<M> button to change its settings.

: When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates that

the function is available only in the Creative Zone modes

(p.31).

(p.**) : Reference page numbers for more information.

: Warning to prevent shooting problems.

: Supplemental information.

: Tips or advice for better shooting.

: Troubleshooting advice.

Basic Assumptions

All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch

is set to <1> and the <R> switch is set down (Multi function

lock released) (p.41, 54).

It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are

set to their defaults.

The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM lens as an example.

Conventions Used in this Manual

Chapters

Introduction

Getting Started

Basic Shooting

Setting the AF and Drive Modes

115

Image Settings

141

Advanced Operations

189

Flash Photography

227

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)

255

Shooting Movies

293

Image Playback

345

Post-Processing Images

389

Sensor Cleaning

403

Customizing the Camera

409

Reference

449

Software Start Guide /

Downloading Images to a Computer

511

Introduction 2

Item Check List................................................................................. 3

Instruction Manuals .......................................................................... 4

Compatible Cards............................................................................. 5

Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6

Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8

Chapters........................................................................................... 9

Index to Features ........................................................................... 17

Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 20

Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 23

Nomenclature ................................................................................. 26

Getting Started 33

Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 34

Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 36

Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 37

Using the LCD Monitor ................................................................... 40

Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 41

Setting the Date, Time, and Zone................................................... 43

Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 46

Attaching and Detaching a Lens..................................................... 47

Basic Operation.............................................................................. 49

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 56

3 Menu Operations.................................................................. 58

d Using the Touch Screen ............................................................. 61

Before You Start ............................................................................. 64

Formatting the Card..................................................................... 64

Disabling the Beeper ................................................................... 66

Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off................................. 66

Setting the Image Review Time................................................... 67

Contents

Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On ..................................................67

Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings..............................68

Displaying the Grid..........................................................................71

Q Displaying the Electronic Level ...............................................72

Displaying the Flicker Detection......................................................74

Feature Guide and Help..................................................................75

Basic Shooting 77

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................78

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)..........................81

7 Disabling Flash .........................................................................83

C Creative Auto Shooting.............................................................84

8: Special Scene Mode .............................................................88

P Shooting Food ............................................................................ 89

C Shooting Children ......................................................................90

x Shooting Candlelight Portraits ...................................................91

6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ....................................92

F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)............................................93

G Shooting Backlit Scenes............................................................94

2 Shooting Portraits ......................................................................95

3 Shooting Landscapes ...............................................................96

4 Shooting Close-ups....................................................................97

5 Shooting Moving Subjects ........................................................98

v Applying Creative Filters .........................................................101

Q Quick Control...........................................................................106

Shooting with Ambience Selection................................................108

Shooting by Lighting or Scene Type ............................................. 112

Contents

3Setting the AF and Drive Modes 115

f: Selecting the AF Operation....................................................116

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point ...................................... 120

AF Area Selection Modes............................................................. 124

AF Sensor .................................................................................... 127

Lenses and Usable AF Points ...................................................... 128

When Autofocus Fails .................................................................. 136

MF: Manual Focus..................................................................... 137

i Selecting the Drive Mode ....................................................... 138

j Using the Self-timer................................................................. 140

Image Settings 141

Setting the Image-Recording Quality ........................................... 142

Changing the Image’s Aspect Ratio ............................................. 146

i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos ................................. 148

A Selecting a Picture Style ...................................................... 154

A Customizing a Picture Style ................................................. 157

A Registering a Picture Style ................................................... 160

Setting the White Balance ............................................................ 162

White Balance............................................................................ 163

Q Setting the Auto White Balance.......................................... 163

O Custom White Balance........................................................ 164

P Setting the Color Temperature ............................................. 166

White Balance Correction............................................................. 167

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast................................. 169

Setting Noise Reduction............................................................... 170

Highlight Tone Priority .................................................................. 174

Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations ......... 175

Reducing Flicker........................................................................... 179

Setting the Color Space................................................................ 181

Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................... 182

Contents

File Numbering Methods...............................................................184

Setting Copyright Information .......................................................186

Advanced Operations 189

d: Program AE.............................................................................190

s: Shutter-Priority AE ................................................................192

f: Aperture-Priority AE..............................................................194

Depth-of-Field Preview...............................................................195

a: Manual Exposure....................................................................196

q Selecting the Metering Mode ..................................................198

O Setting Exposure Compensation .............................................200

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB).................................................. 201

A AE Lock ...................................................................................203

F: Bulb Exposures .......................................................................204

w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting...............................207

P Multiple Exposures..................................................................212

2 Mirror Lockup.........................................................................219

Using the Eyepiece Cover ............................................................220

F Using a Remote Switch.............................................................221

R Remote Control Shooting...........................................................221

p Interval Timer Shooting .....................................................223

Flash Photography 227

D Using the Built-in Flash .............................................................228

D Using an External Speedlite......................................................233

Setting the Flash ........................................................................... 235

Wireless Flash Photography .........................................................244

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 255

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor............................................... 256

Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................264

U Applying Creative Filters .........................................................266

Contents

Menu Function Settings................................................................ 270

Selecting the AF Operation .......................................................... 274

Focusing with AF (AF Method)..................................................... 276

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter............................................. 286

MF: Focusing Manually ................................................................ 288

Shooting Movies 293

k Shooting Movies..................................................................... 294

Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 304

Setting the Movie Recording Size ................................................ 306

Using Movie Digital Zoom..............................................................311

Setting the Sound Recording ....................................................... 312

Shooting HDR Movies .................................................................. 314

v Shooting Movies with Creative Filters..................................... 316

N Shooting Time-lapse Movies................................................ 319

Menu Function Settings................................................................ 326

Shooting Video Snapshots ........................................................... 333

Image Playback 345

x Image Playback ..................................................................... 346

B: Shooting Information Display ............................................ 348

x Searching for Images Quickly ................................................ 353

u/y Magnified View ................................................................... 355

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen ........................................ 356

b Rotating the Image.................................................................. 358

Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 359

Q Quick Control for Playback ..................................................... 361

k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 363

k Playing Back Movies .............................................................. 365

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 367

Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 369

Contents

Viewing Images on a TV Set.........................................................373

K Protecting Images ...................................................................376

L Erasing Images ........................................................................378

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)..........................................380

p Specifying Images for a Photobook..........................................384

Changing Image Playback Settings ..............................................386

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness .......................................386

Auto Rotation of Vertical Images................................................387

Post-Processing Images 389

R Processing RAW Images with the Camera ...........................390

S Resizing JPEG Images ...........................................................395

N Cropping JPEG Images...........................................................397

U Applying Creative Filters .........................................................399

Sensor Cleaning 403

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning...................................................404

Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................405

Manual Sensor Cleaning...............................................................407

Customizing the Camera 409

Setting Custom Functions.............................................................410

Custom Functions ......................................................................... 411

Custom Function Settings.............................................................413

C.Fn I: Exposure ........................................................................413

C.Fn II: Autofocus ......................................................................416

C.Fn III: Operation/Others.......................................................... 425

8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus .................................427

8: Custom Controls ....................................................................433

Registering My Menu....................................................................440

w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes.....................................445

Contents

Reference 449

B Button Functions ................................................................ 450

Checking the Battery Information ................................................. 452

Using a Household Power Outlet ................................................. 456

H Using Eye-Fi Cards................................................................. 457

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode .............................. 460

System Map ................................................................................. 468

Menu Settings .............................................................................. 470

Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................. 481

Error Codes .................................................................................. 496

Specifications ............................................................................... 497

Software Start Guide /

Downloading Images to a Computer 511

Software Start Guide .................................................................... 512

Downloading and Viewing the Software Instruction Manuals (PDF Files)

... 514

Downloading Images to a Computer ............................................ 515

Index............................................................................................. 517

Power

Charging the battery  p.34

Battery level  p.42

Checking battery

information  p.452

Household power outlet  p.456

Auto power off  p.66

Cards

Formatting  p.64

Release shutter without

card  p.38

Lens

Attaching/Detaching  p.47

Zoom  p.48

Basic Settings

Language  p.46

Date/Time/Zone  p.43

Beeper  p.66

Copyright information  p.186

Clear all camera settings  p.68

Viewfinder

Dioptric adjustment  p.49

Eyepiece cover  p.220

Electronic level  p.73

Grid  p.71

Aspect ratio line  p.146

LCD Monitor

Brightness adjustment  p.386

Touch screen  p.61

Electronic level  p.72

Feature guide  p.75

Help  p.76

AF operation  p.116

AF area selection mode  p.120

AF point selection  p.122

Lens group  p.128

AF points lighting up

in red  p.424

AF Microadjustment  p.427

Manual focusing  p.137

Metering

Metering mode  p.198

Drive

Drive mode  p.138

Self-timer  p.140

Maximum burst  p.145

Recording Images

Creating/Selecting

a folder  p.182

File numbering  p.184

Index to Features

Image Quality

Image-recording quality  p.142

ISO speed  p.148

Picture Style  p.154

White balance  p.162

Auto Lighting Optimizer  p.169

Noise reduction for

high ISO speeds  p.170

Noise reduction for long

exposures  p.172

Highlight tone priority  p.174

Lens aberration

correction  p.175

Reducing flicker  p.179

Color space  p.181

Shooting

Shooting mode  p.30

HDR Mode  p.207

Multiple exposures  p.212

Mirror lockup  p.219

Bulb timer  p.205

Interval timer  p.223

Depth-of-field preview  p.195

Remote control  p.221

Quick Control  p.56

Multi function lock  p.54

Exposure

Exposure compensation  p.200

Exposure compensation

with M+ISO Auto  p.197

AEB  p.201

AE lock  p.203

Safety shift  p.415

Flash

Built-in flash  p.228

External flash  p.233

Flash function settings  p.235

Wireless shooting  p.244

Live View Shooting

Live View shooting  p.255

AF operation  p.274

AF method  p.276

Aspect ratio  p.146

Creative filters  p.266

Touch shutter  p.286

Movie Shooting

Movie shooting  p.293

AF method  p.276

Movie Servo AF  p.326

Movie recording quality  p.306

Manual exposure  p.298

Movie digital zoom  p.311

Sound recording  p.312

HDR movie shooting  p.314

Index to Features

Creative filters for

movies  p.316

Video snapshot  p.333

Time-lapse movie  p.319

Movie Servo AF speed  p.329

Movie Servo AF tracking

sensitivity  p.330

Remote control shooting  p.332

Playback

Image review time  p.67

Single-image display  p.346

Shooting information

display  p.348

Index display  p.353

Image browsing

(Jump display)  p.354

Magnified view  p.355

Image rotate  p.358

Rating  p.359

Movie playback  p.365

Slide show  p.369

Viewing images on a

TV set  p.373

Protect  p.376

Erase  p.378

Touch playback  p.356

Print Order (DPOF)  p.380

Photobook Set-up  p.384

Image Editing

RAW image processing  p.390

Resizing JPEGs  p.395

Cropping JPEGs  p.397

Creative filters  p.399

Customization

Custom Functions (C.Fn)  p.410

Custom Controls  p.433

My Menu  p.440

Custom shooting mode  p.445

Sensor Cleaning and Dust

Reduction

Sensor cleaning  p.404

Append Dust Delete Data  p.405

Software

Software Start Guide  p.512

Software Instruction

Manuals  p.514

Wireless Functions

 Wireless Function Instruction

Manual

The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to

yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow

these precautions before using the product.

If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the

product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer

from whom you purchased the product.

Safety Precautions

Warnings:

Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or

serious injuries may result.

To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,

follow the safeguards below:

• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the

Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries, or the

product if it is damaged.

• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or

solder to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the

battery to strong physical shock.

• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.

• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable charging

(working) temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharging time indicated in

the Instruction Manual.

• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,

accessories, connecting cables, etc.



When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape. Contact with

other metallic objects or batteries may cause a fire or an explosion.



If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,

immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.

Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.



If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it

immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire,

electrical shock or burns if you keep using it.



Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can

cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage comes in contact with your

eyes, skin, or clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing

it. See a physician immediately.



Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the

insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.



Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the

camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause

skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is

recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when

using the camera in very hot places.



Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an accident.

Safety Precautions



When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery,

and disconnect the power plug and connecting cables from the equipment before

storing. This is to prevent electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, and corrosion.



Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an

explosion or a fire.



If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts,

do not touch the exposed parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.



Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts may cause

electrical shock.



Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or

lens. Doing so may damage your vision.



Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps

or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury

may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If

a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.



Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, keep the battery

away from metallic items and store it with its protective cover attached to prevent

short-circuit. This is to prevent fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, and burns.



Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.

Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s

instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.



To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:

• Always insert the power plug all the way in.

• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.

• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.

• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the

cord. Also, do not twist or tie the cords.

• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.

• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.



Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet

with a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power

outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.



Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter

outlet. The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing fire,

burns, or injuries.



A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the

product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.

Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.



Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap

attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.



Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and

cause the casing to deform or catch fire.



Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water

or metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent fire,

electrical shock, and burns.



Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.

Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.

Safety Precautions

Cautions:

Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury

or property damage may result.



Do not use or store the product in a high-temperature location such as inside a car

under the hot sun. The product may become hot and cause burns. Doing so may

also cause battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or

shorten the life of the product.



Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause

an injury or an accident. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the

camera and lens.



Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of

time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.



Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes.

Camera Care

This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical

shock.

The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you

accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon

Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry and clean cloth. If the

camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a clean, well-wrung wet

cloth.

Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such

as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the camera near

anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong

magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.

Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct

sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.

The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to

disassemble the camera yourself.

Do not block the built-in flash or mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing

so may cause a malfunction.

Use only a commercially-available blower to blow away dust when it adheres

to the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, focusing screen, etc. Do not use

cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For

stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.

Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to

prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts may cause camera

malfunction.

If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,

condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent

condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to

the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.

Handling Precautions

If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid

damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and

battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before

using the camera.

If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery

and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the

camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to

check that the camera is still working.

Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and

corrosion such as in a chemical lab.

If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions

before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is

an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera

checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the camera

yourself and make sure it is working properly.

If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a

prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a malfunction.

If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting

may occur.

LCD Panel and LCD Monitor

Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision

technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels

displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.

Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.

If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur

where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only

temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.

The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black

in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.

Handling Precautions

Cards

To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:

Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,

physical shock, or vibration.

Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything

metallic.

Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.

Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field,

such as a TV set, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone to having

static electricity.

Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.

Store the card in a case, etc.

Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

Lens

After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens

with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to avoid

scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.

Contacts

26
* Used for wireless connections via the NFC function.
Nomenclature
<
C
> Digital terminal (p.515)
<
D
> 
HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.373)
<
F
> Remote control terminal (p.221)
<
Y
>
 External microphone 
IN terminal
 (p.313)
Body cap (p.47)
Mirror (p.219, 407)
Contacts (p.25)
Lens mount
Lens lock pin
Depth-of-field preview 
button (p.195)
Grip (Battery 
compartment)
Lens release 
button (p.48)
p
 (N-Mark)*
Strap mount 
(p.33)
DC coupler cord hole (p.456)
Mode Dial 
(p.30)
Mode Dial lock-
release button (p.51)
Microphones 
(p.294)
<
D
> Flash button (p.228)
Hot shoe (p.233)
Flash sync contacts
EF-S lens mount index (p.47)
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam emitter 
(p.228/119)
EF lens mount index (p.47)
<
f
> AF operation selection button (p.116)
<
R
> Drive mode selection button (p.138)LCD panel (p.28)
<
g
> ISO speed 
setting button (p.148)
<
B
> AF area selection 
mode button (p.121)
Remote control 
sensor (p.221)
Red-eye 
reduction/Self-
timer lamp 
(p.230/140)
<
6
> Main Dial 
(p.51)
<
U
> LCD panel 
illumination button 
(p.55)
Shutter button 
(p.50)
<
D
> Metering mode 
selection button (p.198)
<
y
> Headphone terminal (p.313)

27
Nomenclature
Speaker (p.365)
<
V
> Focal plane mark (p.97)
<
A
/
k
> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch (p.256/294)
<
0
> Start/Stop button (p.256, 294)
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.49)
Viewfinder eyepiece
Eyecup (p.220)
Power switch (p.41)
<
M
> 
Menu 
button (p.58)
<
B
> 
Info button 
(p.55, 72, 76, 
258, 262, 300, 
346, 450)
LCD monitor/Touch screen 
(p.58, 66/61, 356, 367)
Serial number
<
Q
> Quick Control button (p.56)
<
x
> Playback button (p.346) <
L
> Erase button (p.378)
<
9
> <
W
> <
X
> <
Y
> <
Z
> 
Multi-controller (p.53)
Card slot (p.37)
<
0
> Setting button (p.58)
Multi function lock switch (p.54)
<
5
> 
Quick Control Dial (p.52)
Card slot 
cover 
(p.37)
Battery 
compartment 
cover release 
lever (p.36)
Battery compartment 
cover (p.36)
Strap mount 
(p.33)
Access lamp 
(p.39)
<
S
> AF point 
selection/<
u
> Magnify 
button (p.122/355)
<
p
> AF start button 
(p.50, 116, 257, 303)
<
A
> AE lock/FE lock 
button/
<
y
> Index/Reduce 
button
(p.203, 232/353, 355)
Tripod socket

Nomenclature

LCD Panel

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Shutter speed

FE lock (

FEL

)

Busy (

buSY

)

Built-in flash recycling (

buSY

)

Multi function lock warning (

)

No card warning (

Card

)

Card full warning (

FuLL

)

Error code (

Err

)

Cleaning image sensor (

CLn

)

AF point selection (

MAF

SEL N

SEL AF

)

Aperture

Exposure level indicator

Exposure compensation amount

(p.200)

AEB range (p.201)

Battery level

(p.42)

> Multiple-exposure

shooting (p.212)

Wi-Fi function

AF operation (p.116, 274)

One-Shot AF

AI Focus AF

AI Servo AF

Servo AF

Manual Focus

(p.137, 288)

Drive mode (p.138)

Single shooting

High-speed continuous

shooting

Low-speed continuous shooting

Silent single shooting

Silent continuous shooting

Self-timer: 10 sec./remote

control

Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control

> Highlight tone priority (p.174)

> ISO speed (p.148)

ISO speed (p.148)

Possible shots

Self-timer countdown

Bulb exposure time

Error number/Error code (

Err

)

Remaining images to record

Metering mode

(p.198)

Evaluative

metering

Partial metering

Spot metering

Center-weighted

average metering

Interval timer shooting (p.223)

Bulb timer shooting (p.205)

Time-lapse movie shooting

(p.319)

> Exposure compensation

(p.200)

29
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Zone AF (Manual selection of zone) 
(p.120)
45-point automatic 
selection AF (p.120)
Spot metering 
circle (p.198)
Single-point AF 
(Manual selection) (p.120)
Focusing screen
AF point (p.120)
Area AF frame 
(p.120)
Large Zone AF 
(Manual selection of zone) (p.120)
Aspect ratio line 
(p.146)
Grid (p.71)
Electronic level 
(p.73)
Flicker detection 
(p.74, 179)
Shutter speed (p.192)
FE lock (
FEL
)
Busy (
buSY
)
Built-in flash recycling (
buSY
)
Multi function lock warning (
L
)
No card/card error warning (
Card
)
Card full warning (
FuLL
)
Error code (
Err
)
Aperture (p.194)
AF point selection
(
MAF
, 
SEL N
, 
SEL AF
)
<
y
> Flash exposure 
compensation (p.230, 233)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount (p.200)
AEB range (p.201)
Red-eye reduction lamp ON
<
A
> 
Highlight tone priority
 (p.174)
ISO speed (p.148)
Maximum burst (p.145)
Number of remaining 
multiple exposures (p.213)
<
o
> Focus indicator 
(p.78)
<
g
> ISO 
speed (p.148)
<
d
> FE lock (p.232) / 
FEB in-progress (p.242)
<
e
> High-speed sync 
(p.241)
<
D
> Flash-ready 
(p.228, 233)
Improper FE lock warning
<
A
> AE lock (p.203) / 
AEB in-progress (p.201)
<
z
> 
Battery level 
(p.42)
Warning symbol 
(p.425)
<
O
> 
Exposure compensation
 (p.200)

Nomenclature

Mode Dial

Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial

lock-release button).

Basic Zone

All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to

suit the subject or scene for shooting.

A: Scene Intelligent Auto (p.78)

7: Flash Off (p.83)

C: Creative Auto (p.84)

8: Special scene (p.88)

v: Creative filters (p.101)

PFood (p.89) GHDR Backlight Control (p.94)

CKids (p.90) 2Portrait (p.95)

xCandlelight (p.91) 3Landscape (p.96)

6Night Portrait (p.92) 4Close-up (p.97)

FHandheld Night Scene (p.93) 5Sports (p.98)

GGrainy B/W (p.103) ZWater painting effect (p.104)

WSoft focus (p.103) AHDR art standard (p.104)

XFish-eye effect (p.104) BHDR art vivid (p.105)

HToy camera effect (p.104) CHDR art bold (p.105)

cMiniature effect (p.104) DHDR art embossed (p.105)

Nomenclature

Creative Zone

These modes give you more control for shooting

various subjects as desired.

d: Program AE (p.190)

s: Shutter-priority AE (p.192)

f: Aperture-priority AE (p.194)

a: Manual exposure (p.196)

F: Bulb (p.204)

Custom shooting mode

You can register the shooting mode (d/s/f/a/F), AF

operation, menu settings, etc., to w, x Mode Dial positions

(p.445).

Nomenclature

Battery Charger LC-E6

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.34).

Battery Charger LC-E6E

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.34).

Battery pack slot

Charge lamp

Power plug

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter

of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.

Power cord

Power cord socket

Battery pack slot

Charge lamp

Getting Started

This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start

shooting and basic camera operations.

Attaching the Strap

Pass the end of the strap through

the camera’s strap mount eyelet

from the bottom. Then pass it

through the strap’s buckle as shown

in the illustration. Pull the strap to

take up any slack and make sure

the strap will not loosen from the

buckle.

The eyepiece cover is attached to

the strap (p.220).

Eyepiece cover

Remove the protective cover.

Detach the protective cover provided

with the battery.

Attach the battery.

As shown in the illustration, attach the

battery securely to the charger.

To detach the battery, follow the

above procedure in reverse.

Recharge the battery.

For LC-E6

As shown by the arrow, flip out the

battery charger’s prongs and insert

the prongs into a power outlet.

For LC-E6E

Connect the power cord to the

charger and insert the plug into a

power outlet.

Recharging starts automatically and

the charge lamp blinks in orange.

It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely

exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time

required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the

ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.

For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /

41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).

Charging the Battery

LC-E6

LC-E6E

Charge Level Charge lamp

Color Display

0-49%

Orange

Blinks once per second

50-74% Blinks twice per second

75% or higher Blinks three times per second

Fully charged Green Lights up

Charging the Battery

Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.

Charge the battery before use.



Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.

Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity.

After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the

charger from the power outlet.

You can attach the cover in a different

orientation to indicate whether the battery

has been recharged or not.

If the battery has been recharged, attach the

cover so that the battery-shaped hole <V> is

aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is

exhausted, attach the cover in the opposite orientation.

When not using the camera, remove the battery.

If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount

of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter

battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing

the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery’s performance.

The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz

power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for

the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage

transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.

If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully

charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.

Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.452) and purchase a new battery.

Tips for Using the Battery and Charger

After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for

approx. 10 sec.

If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.452) is 94% or higher, the battery

will not be recharged.



The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.

Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera.

The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is

installed, and darkens when the battery is removed. If the battery

is not installed, the picture in the viewfinder becomes blurred and

focus cannot be achieved.

Open the cover.

Slide the lever as shown by the

arrows and open the cover.

Insert the battery.

Insert the end with the electrical

contacts.

Insert the battery until it locks in

place.

Close the cover.

Press the cover until it snaps shut.

Open the cover and remove the

battery.

Press the battery lock lever as shown

by the arrow and remove the battery.



To prevent short circuiting of the electrical

contacts, be sure to attach the provided

protective cover (p.34) to the battery.

Installing and Removing the Battery

Installing the Battery

Removing the Battery

Only Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 can be used.

You can use an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory card (sold separately)

with the camera. SDHC and SDXC memory cards with UHS-I can also

be used. The captured images are recorded onto the card.

Open the cover.

Slide the cover as shown by the

arrows to open it.

Insert the card.

As shown by the illustration, face

the card’s label side toward you

and insert it until it clicks in place.

Close the cover.

Close the cover and slide it in the

direction shown by the arrows until it

snaps shut.

When you set the power switch to

<1>, the number of possible shots

will be displayed on the LCD panel.

Installing and Removing the Card

Installing the Card

Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to enable

writing and erasing.

Write-protect switch

Possible shots

Installing and Removing the Card

Open the cover.

Set the power switch to <2>.

Make sure the access lamp is off,

then open the cover.

If [Recording...] is displayed, close

the cover.

Remove the card.

Gently push in the card, then let go to

eject it.

Pull the card straight out, then close

the cover.

Removing the Card

The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the

card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.

Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent

you from shooting without a card inserted (p.470).

Access lamp

Installing and Removing the Card

When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are

being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being

transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.

Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or

blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.

• Removing the card.

• Removing the battery.

• Shaking or banging the camera around.

• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power

outlet accessories (sold separately, p.456) are used).

If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not

start from 0001 (p.184).

If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove

and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.

If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all

the images and then format the card with the camera (p.64). The card

may then return to normal.

Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do

not expose the contacts to dust or water. If a smudge adheres to the

contacts, contact failure may result.

Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used (card error will be displayed).

After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live

View shooting, shoot movies, or play back images and movies. You can

change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.

Flip out the LCD monitor.

Rotate the LCD monitor.

When the LCD monitor is swung out,

you can rotate it up, down, or over

180° to face the subject.

The indicated angle is only

approximate.

Face it toward you.

Normally, use the camera with the

LCD monitor facing you.

Using the LCD Monitor

180°

175°

90°

Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor.

When not using the camera, close the LCD monitor with the screen

facing inward. This will protect the screen.

During Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor

toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen (right/left

reversed).

If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting

screen appears, see page 43 to set the date/time/zone.

<1> : The camera turns on.

<2> : The camera is turned off and

does not function. Set to this

position when not using the

camera.

Whenever you set the power switch

to <1> or <2>, sensor

cleaning will be performed

automatically. (A small sound may be

heard.) During the sensor cleaning,

the LCD monitor will display <f>.

You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter

button halfway (p.50) to stop cleaning and take a picture.

If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short

interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and

not a malfunction.

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after

approx. 1 minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just

press the shutter button halfway (p.50).

You can change the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]

(p.66).

Turning on the Power

Automatic Sensor Cleaning

3 Auto Power Off

If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to

the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the

recording finishes.

Turning on the Power

When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be

indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon (b) indicates

that the battery will be exhausted soon.

Number of Possible Shots (Approx. number of shots)

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, no Live

View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing

standards.

Possible shots with Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately)

• With LP-E6N x 2: approx. twice the shots without the battery grip.

• With AA/LR6 alkaline batteries at room temperature (23°C / 73°F): approx.

560 shots with no flash, approx. 400 shots with 50% flash use.

z Battery Level Indicator

Display zxcm

Level (%)

100 - 70

69 - 50 49 - 20 19 - 10 9 - 1 0

Temperature Room Temperature

(23

C / 73

Low Temperatures

C / 32

No Flash 1390 1250

50% Flash Use 960 860

Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery sooner:

• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.

• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.

• Using the LCD monitor frequently.

The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual

shooting conditions.

The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on

the lens used, the battery power may exhaust faster.

For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 257.

See [53: Battery info.] to check the battery condition in detail (p.452).

With Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately) loaded with AA/R6 batteries,

a four-level indicator will be displayed. ([x/m] will not be

displayed.)

When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone

have been reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow

the steps below to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time

zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply

change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination, and the

camera will automatically adjust the date/time.

Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based

on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.

Display the menu screen.



Press the <

> button to display

the menu screen.

Under the [52] tab, select [Date/

Time/Zone].



Press the <

> button and select the

[

] tab.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the [

] tab.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[

Date/Time/Zone

], then press <

Set the time zone.

[London] is set by default.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[

Time zone

], then press <

3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone

The menu setting procedure is explained on page 58.

In step 3, the time displayed in [Time zone] is the time difference

compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

Setting the Date, Time, and Zone



Select the [

Zone

] box, then press



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the time zone, then press <



If you do not see your time zone, you

can also set the time difference with

UTC directly. In such a case, press

the <

> <

> keys to select the

[

Time difference

] box, then press

> so <

> is displayed.



Press the <

> <

> keys to set, then

press <

>. (Returns to <

>.)



After setting, press the <

> <

keys to select [

], then press <

The previous screen will reappear.

Set the date and time.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the number.



Press <

> so <

> is displayed.



Press the <

> <

> keys to set, then

press <

>. (Returns to <

>.)

Set the daylight saving time.



Set it if necessary.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[



Press <

> so <

> is displayed.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[

], then press <



When the daylight saving time is set

to [

], the time set in step 4 will

advance by 1 hour. If [

] is set, the

daylight saving time will be canceled

and the time will go back by 1 hour.

Setting the Date, Time, and Zone

Exit the setting.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[

], then press <



The date/time/zone and daylight

saving time will be set and the menu

will reappear.

The date/time/zone settings may be reset in the following cases. If this

happens, set the date/time/zone again.

• When the camera is stored without the battery.

• When the camera’s battery becomes exhausted.

• When the camera is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a

prolonged period.

The date/time that were set will start when you select [OK] in step 6.

After changing the time zone or time difference setting, check that the

correct date and time are set.

Display the menu screen.



Press the <

> button to display

the menu screen.

Under the [52] tab, select

[LanguageK].



Press the <

> button and select the

[

] tab.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the [

] tab.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the [

Language

], then press

Set the desired language.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the language, then press <



The interface language will change.

3 Selecting the Interface Language

The camera is compatible with all Canon EF and EF-S lenses.

The

camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.

Remove the caps.



Remove the rear lens cap and the

body cap by turning them as shown

by the arrows.

Attach the lens.



Align the lens’s red or white index

with the camera’s index matching the

same color. Turn the lens as shown

by the arrow until it clicks in place.

Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <AF>.



> stands for autofocus.



If it is set to <

> (manual focus),

autofocus will not operate.

Remove the front lens cap.

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Attaching a Lens

White index

Red index

Minimizing Dust

When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.

When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the

body cap to the camera.

Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Turn the zoom ring on the lens

with your fingers.



If you want to zoom, do it before

focusing. Turning the zoom ring after

achieving focus may throw off the

focus.

While pressing the lens release

button, turn the lens as shown by

the arrow.



Turn the lens until it stops, then

detach it.



Attach the rear lens cap to the

detached lens.

Zooming

Detaching the Lens

Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause

loss of vision.

When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch

to <2>.

If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do

not touch the rotating part.

Angle of View

Since the image sensor size is smaller

than the 35mm film format, the effective

angle of view of an attached lens will be

equivalent to that of a lens with approx.

1.6x of the focal length indicated.

Image sensor size (Approx.)

(22.3 x 14.9 mm /

0.88 x 0.59 in.)

35mm film size

(36 x 24 mm /

1.42 x 0.94 in.)

Turn the dioptric adjustment

knob.



Turn the knob left or right so that the

AF points in the viewfinder look the

sharpest.



If the knob is difficult to turn, remove

the eyecup (p.220).

To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.

1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.

2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.

3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.

4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.

To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.

6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.

Basic Operation

Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity

Holding the Camera

If the camera dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder

image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (sold separately) is

recommended.

Vertical shooting

Horizontal shooting

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see pages 82 and 255.

Basic Operation

The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button

halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.

Pressing Halfway

This activates autofocusing and the

automatic exposure system that sets the

shutter speed and aperture.

The exposure setting (shutter speed and

aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder

and on the LCD panel (

Pressing Completely

This releases the shutter and takes the

picture.

Preventing Camera Shake

Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called

camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,

note the following:

• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.

• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the

shutter button completely.

Shutter Button

In Creative Zone modes, pressing the button is the same as

pressing the shutter button halfway.

If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway

first, or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it

completely immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes

the picture.

Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can

go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button halfway.

Basic Operation

Turn the dial while holding down

the lock release button at the

center of the dial.

Use it to set the shooting mode.

(1)

After pressing a button, turn the

<6> dial.

When you press a button such as <

> <

>, the respective

function remains selected for the

duration of the timer (

). During this

time, you can turn the <

> dial to set

the desired setting.

When the function selection ends or if

you press the shutter button halfway, the

camera will be ready to shoot.



Use this dial to select or set the AF

operation, drive mode, ISO speed,

metering mode, AF point selection,

etc.

(2)

Turn the <6> dial only.

While looking at the viewfinder or LCD

panel, turn the <

> dial to change the

setting.



Use this dial to set the shutter speed,

aperture, etc.

Mode Dial

Main Dial

The operations in (1) are possible even when the <R> switch is set

upward (Multi function lock, p.54).

Basic Operation

(1)

After pressing a button, turn the

<5> dial.

When you press a button such as <

> <

>, the respective

function remains selected for the

duration of the timer (

). During this

time, you can turn the <

> dial to set

the desired setting.

When the function selection ends or if

you press the shutter button halfway, the

camera will be ready to shoot.



Use this dial to select or set the AF

operation, drive mode, ISO speed,

metering mode, AF point selection,

etc.

(2)

Turn the <5> dial only.

While looking at the viewfinder or LCD

panel, turn the <

> dial to change the

setting.



Use this dial to set the exposure

compensation amount, the aperture

setting for manual exposures, etc.

Quick Control Dial

The operations in (1) are possible even when the <R> switch is set

upward (Multi function lock, p.54).

Basic Operation

The Multi-controller <

> has eight keys that tilt in the directions shown

by the arrows.



Use the eight keys to select the AF

point, correct the white balance,

move the AF point or magnifying

frame during Live View shooting or

movie shooting, or scroll around

magnified images during playback.



For menus and the Quick Control, the

Multi-controller works only in the

vertical and horizontal directions <

> <

>. It does not work in

diagonal directions.

Multi-controller

AF point selection, white balance correction, and scrolling around magnified

images during playback are possible even when the <R> switch is set

upward (Multi function lock, p.54).

Basic Operation

With [

54: Multi function lock

] set and the <

> switch set

upward, the camera prevents you from changing settings inadvertently

by moving the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial, and Multi-controller or by

touching the touch panel.

> switch set downward: Lock

released

> switch set upward: Lock

engaged

Select [Multi function lock].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Multi

function lock

], then press <

Add a checkmark [X] to the

camera control to be locked.



Select a camera control and press

> to add a checkmark [



Select [



The selected camera controls will be

locked when the multi function lock

switch is in the locked position.

R Multi Function Lock

If the <R> switch is set upward and you try to use one of the locked

camera controls (except when [hTouch control] is set), <L> will be

displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel. On the shooting

function settings display (p.55), [LOCK] will be displayed. During Live

View shooting, [LOCK] will be displayed on the LCD monitor.

By default, when locked, the <5> dial will be locked.

In Basic Zone modes, only [hTouch control] is settable.

Basic Operation

You can illuminate the LCD panel by

pressing the <

> button. Turn on (

)

or off the LCD panel illumination by

pressing the <

> button.

After you press the <

> button a number of times, the shooting

function settings will be displayed.

With the shooting function settings displayed, you can turn the Mode

Dial to see the settings for each shooting mode (p.451).

Pressing the <

> button enables Quick Control of the shooting

function settings (p.56).

Press the <

> button again to turn off the display.

U LCD Panel Illumination

Displaying Shooting Function Settings

During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off

the LCD panel illumination.

You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the

LCD monitor. This is called Quick Control.

Press the <Q> button

(7)



The Quick Control screen will appear.

Set the desired function.



Press the <

> <

> or <

> <

keys to select a function.



The settings of the selected function

and Feature guide (p.75) will appear.



Turn the <

> or <

> dial to

change the setting.

Take the picture.



Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.



The captured image will be displayed.

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Basic Zone modes Creative Zone modes

For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and their setting

procedures, see page 107.

In steps 1 and 2, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen

(p.61).

Quick Control for Shooting Functions



Select the desired function and press

>. The function’s setting screen

will appear.



Turn the <

> or <

> dial or press

the <

> <

> keys to change the

settings. There are also some

functions that are set by pressing the

>, <

>, or <

> button.



Press <

> to finalize the setting and

return to the Quick Control screen.



When you select <

> (p.433) or

> (p.120) and press the

> button, the previous screen

will reappear.

Sample Quick Control Screen

Quick Control

Shutter speed (p.192)

AF operation (p.116)

White balance correction (p.167)

Shooting mode

(p.30) Highlight tone priority

(p.174)

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.169)

Metering mode (p.198)

Picture Style (p.154)

Exposure

compensation/

AEB setting

(p.200/201)

Flash exposure compensation (p.230)

ISO speed (p.148)

Image-recording quality

(p.142)

Aperture (p.194)

Wi-Fi function

Drive mode (p.138)

Custom Controls (p.433)

White balance bracketing (p.168)

AE lock

(p.203)

AF area selection mode (p.121)

White balance (p.162)

Return

*1 : Settable only when the Mode Dial is set to <8> or <v>.

*2 : These functions cannot be set with Quick Control.

*3 : Refer to the Wireless Function Instruction Manual.



You can set various settings with the menus such as the image-

recording quality, date and time, etc.

* Some menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.

3 Menu Operations

Menus in Basic Zone Modes

Menus in Creative Zone Modes

keys

LCD monitor

> button

> button <

> button

Menu items Menu settings

: Shooting

: Set-up

: My Menu

: Playback

: Custom Functions

Main tabs

Secondary

tabs

Menu Operations

Display the menu screen.



Press the <

> button to display

the menu screen.

Select a tab.



Each time you press the <

> button,

the main tab (group of functions) will

switch.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select a

secondary tab.



For example, in this manual, the

[

] tab refers to the screen

displayed when the

(Shooting)

tab’s [

] is selected.

Select the desired item.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the item, then press <

Select the setting.



Press the <

> <

> or <

> <

keys to select the desired setting.

(Some settings require you to press

either the <

> <

> or <

> <

keys to select those settings.)



The current setting is indicated in

blue.

Set the desired setting.



Press <

> to set it.

Exit the setting.



Press the <

> button to return to

the shooting function settings display.

Menu Setting Procedure

Menu Operations

Example: When Multi Shot

Noise Reduction is set

Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The

menu item is dimmed if another function

setting is overriding it.

You can see the overriding function by

selecting the dimmed menu item and

pressing <

If you cancel the overriding function’s

setting, the dimmed menu item will

become settable.

Dimmed Menu Items

In step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab. In step

4, you can also turn the <5> dial to select certain settings.

In steps 2 to 5, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen (p.61).

The explanation of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have

pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.

To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.

For details about each menu item, see page 470.

Some dimmed menu items will not show the overriding function.

With [54: Clear all camera settings], you can reset the menu functions to

the default settings (p.68).

The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can operate with

your fingers.

Sample Display (Quick Control)



Use your finger to tap on (touch

briefly and then remove your finger

from) the LCD monitor.



By tapping, you can select menus,

icons, etc., displayed on the LCD

monitor.



When touch-screen operation is

possible, a frame will appear around

the icon (except on menu screens).

For example, when you tap on [

the Quick Control screen appears. By

tapping on [

], you can return to the

preceding screen.

Operations possible by tapping on the screen



Setting menu functions after pressing the <

> button



Quick Control



Setting functions after pressing the <

>, <

>, or <

> button



Touch shutter during Live View shooting



Setting functions during Live View shooting



Setting functions during movie shooting



Playback operations

d Using the Touch Screen

Tap

Using the Touch Screen

Sample Display (Menu screen)



Slide your finger while touching the

LCD monitor.

Sample Display (Scale display)

Operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen



Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <

> button



Setting a scale control



Quick Control



Selecting AF points



Setting functions during Live View shooting



Setting functions during movie shooting



Playback operations

If [

z1: Beep

] is set to [

Touch to n

], the

beep will not sound during touch

operations.

Drag

3 Silencing the Beep during Touch Operations

Using the Touch Screen

Select [Touch control].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Touch

control

], then press <

Set the touch control setting.



Select the desired setting, then press



[

Standard

] is the normal setting.



[

Sensitive

] provides a more reactive

touch response than [

Standard

]. Try

using both settings and select the one

you prefer.



To disable touch-screen operations,

select [

Disable

3 Touch Control Settings

Cautions for Touch Screen Operations

Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp

objects, such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations.

Do not use wet fingers for touch screen operations.

If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touch

screen may not respond or misoperation may occur. In such a case, turn

off the power and wipe the LCD monitor with a cloth.

Attaching a commercially-available protective sheet or sticker on the

LCD monitor may make the touch operation response slow.

If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch

response may be slower.

If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or

computer, format the card with this camera.

Select [Format card].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Format

card

], then press <

Format the card.



Select [

], then press <



The card will be formatted.



When the formatting is completed,

the menu will reappear.



For low-level formatting, press the

> button to add a checkmark [

]

to [

Low level format

], then select

[

Before You Start

3 Formatting the Card

When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be

erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is

nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to

a computer, etc., before formatting the card.

Before You Start

The card is new.

The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.

The card is full of images or data.

A card-related error is displayed

(p.496)

Format the card in the following cases:

Low-level Formatting

Perform low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems

slow or if you want to totally erase data on the card.

Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card, the

formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.

You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this

case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the card as

usual.

When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management

information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be

aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the

card, perform low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to

prevent the personal data from being leaked.

Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software on the card must be

installed on your computer. Then format the card with the camera.

The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller

than the capacity indicated on the card.

This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

Before You Start

You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved,

during self-timer shooting, and for touch screen operations.

Select [Beep].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Beep

then press <

Select [Disable].



Select [

Disable

], then press <



The beeper will not sound.



If [

Touch to n

] is selected, the

beeper will be silent for touch screen

operations only.

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set

time of idle operation elapses. The default setting is 1 min., but this

setting can be changed. If you do not want the camera to turn off

automatically, set this to [

Disable

]. After the power turns off, you can

turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other

buttons.

Select [Auto power off].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Auto

power off

], then press <

Set the desired time.



Select the desired setting, then press

3 Disabling the Beeper

3 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off

Even if [Disable] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30

min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)

Before You Start

You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor

immediately after shooting. To keep the image displayed, set [

Hold

]. To

not have the image displayed, set [

Off

Select [Image review].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Image

review

], then press <

Set the desired time.



Select the desired setting, then press

The shooting function settings screen (p.55) can be set to display or

turn off when you press the shutter button halfway.

Select [LCD off/on btn].



Under the [

] tab, select [

LCD off/

on btn

], then press <

Set the desired setting.



Select the desired setting, then press



[

Remains on

]: Display remains on even when you press the shutter

button halfway. To turn off the display, press the

> button.



[

Shutter btn.

]: When you press the shutter button halfway, the

display will turn off. When you let go of the shutter

button, the display will turn on.

3 Setting the Image Review Time

3 Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On

If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time

elapses.

Before You Start

The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be

reverted to their defaults.

Select [Clear all camera settings].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Clear all

camera settings

], then press <

Select [OK].



Select [

], then press <



Setting [

Clear all camera settings

]

will reset the camera to the following

default settings:

3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN

Shooting Function Settings

<8> mode F

(Handheld Night Scene)

HDR Mode Disable HDR

<v> mode c

(Miniature effect)

Interval timer Disable

AF operation One-Shot AF Bulb timer Disable

AF area selection mode

Auto selection:45 pt AF

Anti-flicker shooting

Disable

Metering mode q

(Evaluative metering)

Mirror lockup Disable

ISO speed settings Viewfinder display

ISO Speed Setting

Automatic setting (Auto)

Electronic level Hide

Range for stills Minimum: 100 Grid display Hide

Maximum: 16000 Flicker detection Show

Auto range Minimum: 100

Custom Functions

Unchanged

Maximum: 6400 Flash control

Minimum shutter

speed for auto

Auto Flash firing Enable

E-TTL II flash

metering

Evaluative flash

metering

Drive mode u

(Single shooting)

Exposure

compensation/AEB

Canceled Flash sync.

speed in Av

mode

Auto

Flash exposure

compensation Canceled

Multiple exposure Disable

Before You Start

Image Recording Settings Camera Settings

Image quality 73 Auto power off 1 min.

Aspect ratio 3:2 Beep Enable

Picture Style Auto

Release shutter without card

Enable

Auto Lighting

Optimizer Standard Image review 2 sec.

Highlight alert Disable

Lens aberration correction AF point display Disable

Peripheral

illumination correction

Enable / Correction

data retained

Playback grid Off

Histogram display Brightness

Chromatic aberration

correction

Enable / Correction

data retained

Control over HDMI Disable

Image jump w/6e (10 images)

Distortion

correction

Disable / Correction

data retained

Auto rotate OnzD

LCD brightness

White balance Q

Auto

(Ambience priority)

LCD off/on button Remains on

Touch control Standard

Custom White

Balance Canceled Date/Time/Zone Unchanged

White balance

correction Canceled Language Unchanged

White balance

bracketing Canceled Video system Unchanged

Color space sRGB Feature guide Enable

Long exposure

noise reduction Disable zbutton display

options

All items

selected

High ISO speed

noise reduction Standard

Highlight tone priority

Disable Multi function lock 5

(Quick

Control Dial) only

File numbering Continuous

Auto cleaning Enable

Custom shooting mode

Unchanged

Dust Delete Data Erased

Unchanged

Eye-Fi transmission Disable

Configure: MY MENU

Unchanged

Menu display Normal display

Wireless communication settings

Wi-Fi/NFC Disable

For how to clear all the Custom Function settings, see page 410.

Refer to the Wireless Function Instruction Manual for wireless function

settings.

Before You Start

Live View Shooting Settings Movie Shooting Settings

Live View shooting

Enable <v> mode l (Dream)

AF method u+Tracking ISO speed settings

AF operation XRange for

movies

Minimum: 100

Maximum: 12800

Touch shutter Disable

Grid display Hide Movie Servo AF Enable

Exposure

simulation Enable AF method u+Tracking

Movie recording quality

Silent LV

shooting Mode 1 MOV/MP4 MP4

Movie

recording size

NTSC:

L6 (Standard)

PAL:

L5 (Standard)

Metering timer 8 sec.

Creative filters Disable

Digital zoom Disable

Sound

recording Auto

Wind filter Auto

Attenuator Disable

Movie Servo AF speed

When active Always on

AF speed 0 (Standard)

Movie Servo AF

tracking

sensitivity

Metering timer 8 sec.

Grid display Hide

V button

function a/-

Video snapshot Disable

Time-lapse

movie Disable

Remote control

shooting Disable

Creative filters Disable

You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt

or compose the shot.

Select [Viewfinder display].



Under the [

] tab, select

[

Viewfinder display

], then press

Select [Grid display].

Select [Show].



When you exit the menu, the grid will

appear in the viewfinder.

Displaying the Grid

You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and

before you start shooting a movie (p.270, 331).

You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the

viewfinder to help you correct the camera tilt. Note that you can check

only the horizontal tilt and not the forward/backward tilt.

Press the button.



Each time you press the <

button, the screen display will

change.



Display the electronic level.



If the electronic level does not

appear, set [

53:

button

display options

] so that the

electronic level can be displayed

(p.450).

Check the camera’s tilt.



The horizontal tilt is displayed in 1°

increments. The tilt scale is marked in

5° increments.



When the red line turns green, it

indicates that the tilt is almost

corrected.

Q Displaying the Electronic Level

Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor

Horizontal level

Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx.

±1°.



If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be larger.

During Live View shooting and before movie shooting (except with

+Tracking),

you can also display the electronic level as described above (p.259, 301).

Displaying the Electronic Level

A simple electronic level using a camera icon can be displayed in the

viewfinder. Since this indicator is displayed during shooting, you can

take the picture while checking the camera tilt.

Select [Viewfinder display].



Under the [

] tab, select

[

Viewfinder display

], then press

Select [Electronic level].

Select [Show].

Press the shutter button halfway.



The electronic level will appear as

shown in the illustration.



This level also works with vertical

shooting.

3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder

Electronic level

Horizontal

Tilt 1°

Tilt 2° or higher

Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx. ±1°.

If you set this function, <

> will appear in the viewfinder when

the camera detects flicker caused by the blinking of the light source. By

default, flicker detection is set to [

Show

Select [Viewfinder display].



Under the [

] tab, select

[

Viewfinder display

], then press

Select [Flicker detection].

Select [Show].

Displaying the Flicker DetectionN

If you set [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable], you can shoot with

reduced unevenness of exposure caused by the flicker (p.179).

The Feature guide and Help display information about camera features.

The Feature guide appears when you change the shooting mode or set

a shooting function, Live View shooting, movie shooting, or Quick

Control for playback, and displays a brief description of that mode,

function or option. It also displays a description when you select a

function or option with Quick Control. The Feature guide turns off when

you tap on the description or proceed with the operation.

Shooting mode

(Sample)

Quick Control

(Sample)

Select [Feature guide].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Feature

guide

], then press <



Select [

Disable

], then press <

Feature Guide and Help

Feature Guide

3 Disabling the Feature Guide

Shooting settings Live View shooting Playback

Feature Guide and Help

When [

zHelp

] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen,

pressing the <

> button displays the function’s description (Help). If

the Help fills more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right

edge. You can turn the <

> dial or press the <

> <

> keys to scroll.

Example: [z3:

Long exp. noise reduction]

Example: [8C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments]

Example: [8C.Fn II-1: Tracking sensitivity]

v Help



Scroll bar



Basic Shooting

This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes

on the Mode Dial for best results.

With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot, and the

camera sets everything automatically (p.107, 460). Also, to

prevent botched pictures due to misoperations, advanced

shooting function settings cannot be changed.

Before Shooting in the <8> or <v> Mode

When the LCD monitor is turned off, press the <Q> button or

button (p.88, 101, 450) to check which shooting mode is

set before shooting.

*<8>: Special scene

*<v> : Creative filters

<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene

and sets the optimum settings automatically.

It also adjusts focus

automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.81).

Set the Mode Dial to <A>.



Turn the Mode Dial while holding

down the lock release button at the

center.

Aim the Area AF frame over the

subject.



All the AF points will be used to focus,

and the camera will focus on the

closest object.



Aiming the center of the Area AF

frame over the subject will make

focusing easier.

Focus on the subject.



Press the shutter button halfway. The

lens focusing ring will rotate to focus.



When achieving focus, the AF point

that has achieved focus will be

displayed. At the same time, the

beeper will sound and the focus

indicator <

> in the viewfinder will

light up.



In low light, the AF point(s) will light

up briefly in red.



If necessary, the built-in flash will be

raised automatically.

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Area AF frame

Focus indicator

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Take the picture.



Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.



The captured image will be displayed

for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD

monitor.



After you finish shooting, push down

the built-in flash with your fingers.

The focus indicator <o> blinks and focus is not achieved.

Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press

the shutter button halfway (p.50). If you are too close to the subject,

move away and try again.

When focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in red.

The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low-light

conditions.

Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.

Focus has been achieved at all those points. You can take the

picture as long as an AF point covering the target subject is lighting

up.

FAQ

The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,

and sunset scenes. If you do not obtain the desired color tones, change the

mode to a Creative Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than

<D>, then shoot again (p.154).

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator <o>

does not light up.)

It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving

subject. (The focus indicator <

> does not light up.) You can take

sharp pictures of a moving subject.

Note that the focus lock (p.81) will not work in this case.

Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the

subject.

If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <

> (manual focus),

set it to <

> (autofocus).

The flash fired even though it was daylight.

For a backlit subject, the flash may fire to help lighten the subject’s

dark areas. If you do not want the flash to fire, use the Quick Control

to set [

Built-in flash firing

] to [

] (p.106) or set the <

> (Flash

Off) mode and shoot (p.83).

The built-in flash fired and the picture came out extremely

bright.

Move further away from the subject and shoot. When shooting with

flash, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture may come

out extremely bright (overexposure).

In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.

Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to

fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called the AF-

assist beam. Its effective range is approx. 4 meters / 13.1 feet. The

built-in flash will make a sound when firing continuously. This is

normal and not a malfunction.

When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out

unnaturally dark.

The shadow of the lens barrel was captured in the picture because

the subject was too close to the camera. Move further away from the

subject and shoot. If a hood is attached to the lens, remove it before

taking the flash picture.

Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to

create a balanced background and good perspective.

In the <

> mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a

still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot

while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the

shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.

Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone modes (except <

>).

In the <

> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)

during or after focusing, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the

subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long

as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while

pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous.

When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely.

Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Recomposing the Shot

Shooting a Moving Subject

Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is

called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 255.

Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <A>.

Display the Live View image on

the LCD monitor.



Press the <

> button.



The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

Focus on the subject.



Press the shutter button halfway to

focus.



When focus is achieved, the AF point

will turn green and the beeper will

sound.

Take the picture.



Press the shutter button completely.



The picture is taken and the captured

image is displayed on the LCD monitor.



When the playback display ends, the

camera will return to Live View

shooting automatically.



Press the <

> button to exit the

Live View shooting.

You can also rotate the LCD monitor for different angles (p.40).

A Live View Shooting

Normal angle Low angle High angle

The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings

automatically. In places where flash photography is prohibited such as

in a museum or an aquarium, use the <

> (Flash Off) mode.

Prevent camera shake if the numeric display (shutter speed) in

the viewfinder blinks.

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the

viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady

or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use a wide angle to reduce

blur caused by camera shake even with handheld shooting.

Take portraits without flash.

In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is

taken. Any movement by the subject during shooting may result in

the subject being blurred in the picture.

7 Disabling Flash

Shooting Tips

In the <

> mode, you can set the following functions for shooting: (1)

Ambience-based shots, (2) Background blur, (3) Drive mode, and (4)

Built-in flash firing. The default settings are the same as the <

mode.

* CA stands for Creative Auto.

Set the Mode Dial to <C>.

Press the <Q> button

(



The Quick Control screen will appear.

Set the desired function.



Press the <

> <

> or <

> <

keys to select a function.



The settings of the selected function

and Feature guide (p.75) will appear.



For the setting procedure and details

on each function, see pages 85-87.

Take the picture.



Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

C Creative Auto Shooting

Creative Auto Shooting

If you set (1) or (2) when the camera is set for Live View shooting, you

can see the effect on the screen before you start shooting.

(1) Ambience-based shots

You can select and shoot with the ambience you want to convey in

your images. Turn the <

> or <

> dial to select the ambience.

You can also select it from a list by pressing <

>. For details, see

page 108.

Shutter speed (1)

(2)

Battery level Possible shots

ISO speed

Image-recording quality

Aperture

(4)(3)

Creative Auto Shooting

(2) Background blur

• If [

OFF

] is set, the degree of background blur will change

depending on the brightness.

• If it is set to any setting other than [

OFF

], you can adjust the

background blur regardless of the brightness.

• If you turn the <

> or <

> dial to move the cursor to the right,

the background will look sharper.

• Turning the <

> or <

> dial to move the cursor to the left will

blur the subject’s background. Note that depending on the lens’s

maximum aperture (smallest f/number), certain slider adjustments

may not be selectable (indicated by •).

• If you use Live View shooting, you can see how the image is

blurred in front of and behind the point of focus. When you turn the

> or <

> dial, [

Simulating blur

] will be displayed on the

LCD monitor.

• If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting Portraits” on

page 95.

• Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background

may not look so blurred.

• This function cannot be set if you use flash. If <

> has been set

and you set background blur, <

> will be set automatically.

If [Simulating blur] is enabled during Live View shooting, the image

displayed with <g> (p.258) blinking may have more noise than the actual

image being recorded, or it may look dark.

Creative Auto Shooting

(3) Drive mode

: Use the <

> or <

> dial to make the selection. You

can also select it from a list by pressing <

Single shooting

Shoot one image at a time.

High-speed continuous shooting

While you hold down the shutter button completely,

shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to

approx. 7.0 shots per second.

Low-speed continuous shooting

While you hold down the shutter button completely,

shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to

approx. 3.0 shots per second.

Silent single shooting

You can shoot one image at a time while suppressing

the camera noise during viewfinder shooting.

Silent continuous shooting

You can shoot up to approx. 3.0 shots per second

continuously while suppressing the camera noise

during viewfinder shooting.

Self-timer:

10 sec./remote control

Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control

The picture is taken 10 seconds or 2 seconds after

you press the shutter button. A remote controller can

also be used.

(4) Built-in flash firing

: Turn the <

> or <

> dial to select the

desired setting. You can also select it from a list by pressing <

Auto built-in flash

: The flash fires automatically when

necessary.

Built-in flash on

: The flash fires at all times.

Built-in flash off

: The flash is disabled.

When using the self-timer, see the notes on page 140.

When using , see “Disabling Flash” on page 83.

The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when

you select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.

Set the Mode Dial to <8>.

Press the <Q> button

(



The Quick Control screen will appear.

Select a shooting mode.



Press the <

> <

> or <

> <

keys to select the desired shooting

mode’s icon.



Turn the <

> or <

> dial to select

a shooting mode.



You can also select the shooting

mode icon and press <

> to display

a selection of shooting modes from

which you can select one.

Available Shooting Modes in the <8> Mode

8: Special Scene Mode

Shooting Mode Page Shooting Mode Page

PFood p.89 GHDR Backlight Control p.94

CKids p.90 2Portrait p.95

xCandlelight p.91 3Landscape p.96

6Night Portrait p.92 4Close-up p.97

FHandheld Night Scene p.93 5Sports p.98

When shooting food, use <

> (Food). The photo will look bright and

appetizing. Also, depending on the light source, the reddish tinge will be

suppressed in the pictures taken under tungsten lights, etc.

Change the color tone.

You can change [

Color tone

]. To increase the food’s reddish tinge,

set it toward [

Warm

]. Set it toward [

Cool

] if it looks too red.

Avoid using flash.

If you use flash, the light may reflect off the dish or food and results

in unnatural shadows. By default, <

> (Built-in flash off) is set. Try

to prevent camera shake when shooting in low-light conditions.

P Shooting Food

Shooting Tips

Since this mode lets you shoot the food in appetizing color tones, human

subjects may be shot in an unsuitable skin tone.

The warm color cast of subjects may fade.

When multiple light sources are included on the screen, the warm color

cast of the picture may not be lessened.

If you use flash, the [Color tone] setting will switch to the standard.

When you want to continuously focus on and shoot children running

around, use <

> (Kids). Skin tones will look healthy.

Track the subject with the Area AF frame.

Press the shutter button halfway to start autofocusing in Area AF

frame. During autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly.

If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <

> will blink.

Shoot continuously.

The default setting is <

> (High-speed continuous shooting*).

When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button

completely. If you hold down the shutter button, you can shoot

continuously while maintaining autofocusing to capture changes in

the subject’s facial expression and movement.

* Viewfinder shooting: max. approx. 7.0 shots/sec., Live View shooting: max.

approx. 5.0 shots/sec.

C Shooting Children

Shooting Tips

While the flash is recycling, “buSY” is displayed in the viewfinder and on

the LCD panel, and a picture cannot be taken. Take the picture after this

display turns off. During Live View shooting, “BUSY” is displayed on the

LCD monitor, and you cannot view the subject.

See the cautions on page 99.

When shooting a human subject in candlelight, use <

> (Candlelight).

The candlelight color tones will be retained in the photo.

Use the center AF point to focus.

Aim the center AF point in the viewfinder over the subject, then shoot.

Prevent camera shake if the numeric display (shutter speed) in

the viewfinder blinks.

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the

viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady

or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to

reduce blur caused by camera shake even while handholding the

camera.

Change the color tone.

You can change [

Color tone

]. To increase the candlelight’s reddish

tinge, set it toward [

Warm

]. Set it toward [

Cool

] if it looks too red.

x Shooting Candlelight Portraits

Shooting Tips

Live View shooting cannot be used.

The built-in flash will not fire. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be

emitted (p.119).

If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.

To shoot people at night and obtain a natural-looking night scene in the

background, use the <

> (Night Portrait) mode. Using a tripod is

recommended.

Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.

When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide

night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

Check the subject’s brightness.

Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a

good exposure of the subject.

It is recommended to play back the image after shooting to check

the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer and

shoot again.

Also shoot in other shooting modes.

Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also

with <

> and <

> is recommended.

6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)

Shooting Tips

Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.

If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light

up briefly after the picture is taken.

See the cautions on page 99.

Using a tripod when shooting a night scene gives the best results.

However, the <

> (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot

night scenes even while handholding the camera. In this shooting

mode, four shots are taken continuously for each picture, and the

resulting one image with reduced camera shake is recorded.

Hold the camera firmly.

While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,

four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if

there is significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to

camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.

For shots of people, turn on the flash.

If you want to include people in the night scene shot, press the <

button to set <

> (Built-in flash on). To take a nice portrait, the first

shot will use flash. Tell the subject not to move until all four

continuous shots are taken.

F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)

Shooting Tips

Compared to other shooting modes, the shooting range will be smaller.

See the cautions on page 99.

When shooting a scene having both bright and dark areas, use the

> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this

mode, three continuous shots are taken at different exposures. This

results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the

clipped shadows caused by backlighting.

Hold the camera firmly.

While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,

three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if

there is significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to

camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.

G Shooting Backlit Scenes

Shooting Tips

Compared to other shooting modes, the shooting range will be smaller.

Flash shooting is not possible. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be

emitted (p.119).

See the cautions on page 99.

HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.

The <

> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human

subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.

Select the location where the distance between the subject and

the background is the farthest.

The further the distance between the subject and background, the

more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand

out better against an uncluttered dark background.

Use a telephoto lens.

If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with

the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.

Focus on the face.

Check that the AF point covering the face lights up. For close-ups of

the face, focus on the eyes.

2 Shooting Portraits

Shooting Tips

The default setting is (Low-speed continuous shooting). If you hold

down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously (max. approx. 3.0

shots/sec.) to capture changes in the subject’s facial expression and pose.

Use the <

> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery or to have

everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and

very sharp and crisp images.

With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.

When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far

will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth

to landscapes.

Shooting night scenes.

The <

> mode is also good for night scenes because it disables

the built-in flash. When shooting night scenes, use a tripod to

prevent camera shake.

3 Shooting Landscapes

Shooting Tips

The built-in flash will not fire even in backlit or low-light conditions.

If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.

When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the <

(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a

macro lens (sold separately).

Use a simple background.

A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out

better.

Move in as close as possible to the subject.

Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses

have indications such as <

MACRO 0.39m/1.3ft

> on them. The lens

minimum focusing distance is measured from the <

> (focal

plane) mark on the top of the camera to the subject. If you are too

close to the subject, the focus indicator <

> will blink.

If you use the built-in flash and the bottom part of the picture comes

out unnaturally dark, move away from the subject and try again.

With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.

If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the

subject look larger.

4 Shooting Close-ups

Shooting Tips

Use the <

> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a

running person or a moving vehicle.

Use a telephoto lens.

The use of a telephoto lens is recommended for shooting from a

distance.

Track the subject with the Area AF frame.

Press the shutter button halfway to start autofocusing in Area AF

frame. During autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly.

If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <

> will blink.

The default setting is <

> (High-speed continuous shooting*).

When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button

completely. If you hold down the shutter button, you can shoot

continuously while maintaining autofocusing to capture changes in

the subject’s movement.

* Viewfinder shooting: max. approx. 7.0 shots/sec., Live View shooting: max.

approx. 5.0 shots/sec.

5 Shooting Moving Subjects

Shooting Tips

The built-in flash will not fire even in backlit or low-light conditions.



Under low light when camera shake tends to occur, the viewfinder’s shutter

speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera steady and shoot.

If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.

During Live View shooting, the image quality can be set to 1 or JPEG.

If 41 or 61 is set, the image will be recorded in 1 quality.

Cautions for <C> Kids

During Live View shooting, the image quality can be set to 1 or JPEG.

If 41 or 61 is set, the image will be recorded in 1 quality.

During Live View shooting, if flash is fired in continuous shooting, the

continuous shooting speed will decrease. Even if the flash is not fired for

subsequent shots, shooting will be performed with the decreased

continuous shooting speed.

Cautions for <6> Night Portrait and <F> Handheld Night Scene

During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus on dots of light

such as in a night scene. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode

switch to <MF> and focus manually.

The Live View image displayed will not look exactly the same as the

actual image shot.

Cautions for <F> Handheld Night Scene and <G> HDR Backlight

Control

You cannot select RAW or RAW+JPEG. If RAW is set, the image will be

recorded in the 73 quality. Also, if RAW+JPEG is set, the image will be

recorded in the set JPEG quality.

If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave

afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.

The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly

misaligned due to camera shake.

It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged

after shooting. During the processing of the images, “buSY” will be

displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot take

another picture until the processing is completed.

Cautions for <6> Night Portrait

During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus when the face of

the subject looks dark. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <MF> and focus manually.

100

Cautions for <F> Handheld Night Scene

When shooting with flash, if the subject is too close to the camera, the

picture may come out extremely bright (overexposure).

If you use flash to shoot a night scene with few lights, the shots may not

align correctly. This can result in a blurry picture.



If you use flash and the human subject is close to the background that is also

illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align correctly. This can result in a

blurry picture. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors may also appear.

External flash coverage:

• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the zoom

position will be fixed to the wide end, regardless of the lens’s zoom

position.

• When using a Speedlite requiring manual flash coverage setting, set

the flash head to the wide (normal) position.

Cautions for <G> HDR Backlight Control

Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and

may look irregular or have significant noise.

HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit

scenes or extremely high-contrast scenes.

When shooting subjects that are sufficiently bright, for example for

normally lit scenes, the image may look unnatural because of the applied

HDR effect.

101

In the <

> (Creative filter) mode, you can apply one of ten filter effects

(Grainy B/W*, Soft focus*, Fish-eye effect*, Toy camera effect*,

Miniature effect*, Water painting effect*, HDR art standard, HDR art

vivid, HDR art bold, and HDR art embossed) for shooting. When the

camera is set for Live View shooting, you can see the effect on the

screen before you start shooting. The camera saves only the image

with the Creative filter applied.

For the effects marked with an asterisk, you can also take a picture without a

Creative filter, then apply the effect afterward and save it as a new image (p.399).

Set the Mode Dial to <v>.

Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <A>.

Display the Live View image.



Press the <

> button to display the

Live View image.

Select [Creative filters] with Quick

Control.



Press the <

> button (



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[

] on the upper left of the screen,

then press the <

> button.

v Applying Creative Filters

Applying Creative Filters

102

Select a shooting mode.



Press the <

> <

> or <

> <

keys to select a shooting mode, then

press <

> and select [



The image will be displayed with the

effects of the filter applied.



For the Miniature effect, press the

> <

> keys to move the white

frame to where you want the image to

look sharp.

Available Shooting Modes in the v Mode

Adjust the effect.



Press the <

> button and select the

icon below [

Creative filters

] (except

for

, and



Press the <

> <

> keys to adjust

the filter effect, then press <

Take the picture.



Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.



To return to viewfinder shooting,

press the <

> button to exit Live

View shooting. Then press the shutter

button completely to take the picture.

Shooting Mode Page Shooting Mode Page

GGrainy B/W p.103 ZWater painting effect p.104

WSoft focus p.103 AHDR art standard p.104

XFish-eye effect p.104 BHDR art vivid p.105

HToy camera effect p.104 CHDR art bold p.105

cMiniature effect p.104 DHDR art embossed p.105

If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting

functions, press the <Q> button after step 1 and set [Creative filters].

103

Applying Creative Filters

G

Grainy B/W

Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the black-

and-white effect by adjusting the contrast.

W

Soft focus

Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness

by adjusting the blur.

Creative Filter Characteristics

You cannot select RAW or RAW+JPEG. If RAW is set, the image will be

recorded in the 73 quality. Also, if RAW+JPEG is set, the image will be

recorded in the set JPEG quality.

When <G>, <W>, <X>, <H>, <c>, or <Z> is set, continuous

shooting cannot be set.

Dust Delete Data (p.405) will not be appended to images shot with

Fish-eye effect applied.

<c> is set to (Flash Off) by default. Try to prevent camera shake

when shooting in low-light conditions.

During Live View Shooting

With Grainy B/W, the grainy effect displayed on the LCD monitor will look

different from the grainy effect recorded in the picture.

With the Soft focus and Miniature effects, the blurred effect displayed on

the LCD monitor may look different from the blurred effect recorded in

the picture.

The histogram is not displayed.

Magnified view is not possible.

In Creative Zone modes, you can set some Creative filters with Quick

Control (p.266).

Applying Creative Filters

104

X

Fish-eye effect

Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type

distortion.

Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along the

periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter expands the

center part of the image, the resolution at the center may decrease

depending on the number of recorded pixels. Check the image on the

screen when setting this filter. The AF point will be fixed at center.

H

Toy camera effect

Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a color tone that makes it

look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the color cast

by adjusting the color tone.

c Miniature effect

Creates a diorama effect.

During Live View shooting, you can change where the image looks

sharp. In step 5, if you press the <

> button (or tap [

] on the

bottom right of the screen), you can switch between the white

frame’s vertical and horizontal orientations. The camera focuses on

the center of the white frame.

During viewfinder shooting, aim the center AF point over the subject

and shoot.

Z

Water painting effect

Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You

can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that

night scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth

gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.

A

HDR art standard

Clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced. The contrast will be

lower, and the gradation flatter to have the picture look like a

painting. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.

For <

> <

>, clipped highlights and shadows will be

reduced for a high dynamic range of tones even with high-contrast scenes.

Three images of different exposures are captured continuously for

each shot and merged into a single image.

See the cautions on page 105.

105

Applying Creative Filters

B

HDR art vivid

The colors are more saturated than with [

HDR art standard

], and

the low contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.

C

HDR art bold

The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and

the picture look like an oil painting.

D

HDR art embossed

The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are

decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and

old. The subject outlines will have bolder bright (or dark) edges.

Cautions for <A> HDR Art Standard, HDR Art Vivid, <C>

HDR Art Bold, and <D> HDR Art Embossed

Compared to other shooting modes, the shooting range will be smaller.

The Live View image displayed with the filter applied will not look exactly

the same as the actual image.

If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave

afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.

The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly

misaligned due to camera shake.

If you are handholding the camera, try to prevent camera shake when

shooting.

The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced

correctly. Irregular exposure, irregular colors, or noise may appear.

Shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color

reproduction of the illuminated areas.

It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged

after shooting. During the processing of the images, “buSY” will be

displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot take

another picture until the processing is completed.

Flash shooting is not possible. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be

emitted (p.119).

106

In Basic Zone modes, when the shooting function settings are

displayed, you can press the <

> button to display the Quick Control

screen. The tables on the next page show the functions that can be set

with the Quick Control screen in each Basic Zone mode.

Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone

mode.

Press the <Q> button

(



The Quick Control screen will appear.

Set the desired function.



Press the <

> <

> or <

> <

keys to select a function.



The settings of the selected function

and Feature guide (p.75) will appear.



Turn the <

> or <

> dial to

change the setting.



You can also select from a list by

selecting a function and pressing

Q Quick Control

Example: Portrait mode

107

Quick Control

Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes

: Default setting

: User selectable : Not selectable

*1: If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, all the

functions will revert to the default settings (except the self-timer).

*2: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.

*3: GWXHZ *4: ABCD

Function A 7 C8

P C x 6 F

Drive

mode

(p.138)

u: Single shooting

ooookooo

High-speed continuous shooting

kkkkokkk

Low-speed continuous shooting

kkkkkkkk

B: Silent single shooting

kkkkkkkk

Silent continuous shooting

kkkkkkkk

Self-timer (p.140) Q

kkkkkkkk

Built-in

flash firing

a: Automatic firing

o o o o

Flash on (Fires at all times)

kkkk k

b: Flash off

kokoko o

Ambience-based shots (p.108)

kkkkkk

Light/scene-based shots (p.112)

Background blur (p.86)

Color tone (p.89, 91)

k k

Function 8v

G 2 3 4 5 c*3 *4

Drive

mode

(p.138)

u: Single shooting

okookooo

High-speed continuous shooting

kkkko k

Low-speed continuous shooting

kokkk k

B: Silent single shooting

kkkkkkkk

Silent continuous shooting

kkkkk k

Self-timer (p.140) Q

kkkkkkkk

Built-in

flash firing

a: Automatic firing

o o ko

Flash on (Fires at all times)

kkkk

b: Flash off

okokooko

Ambience-based shots (p.108)

kkkk

Light/scene-based shots (p.112)

kkkk

Adjustment of effects (p.101)

108

In Basic Zone modes, when a mode other than <

>, <

>, and <

> is set, you can select the ambience for shooting.

Set the Mode Dial to <

> or <



For <

>, set a shooting mode

other than <

Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <A>.

Display the Live View image.



Press the <

> button to display the

Live View image (except <

>).

With Quick Control, select the

desired ambience.



Press the <

> button (



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[

Standard setting

]. [

Ambience-

based shots

] will appear on the

screen.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the desired ambience.



The LCD monitor will display how the

image will look with the selected

ambience.

Shooting with Ambience Selection

Ambience C

Ambience Effect

P/xC/6/F/2/3/

4/5

1 Standard setting kk k No setting

2 Vivid kkLow / Standard / Strong

3 Soft kkLow / Standard / Strong

4 Warm kkLow / Standard / Strong

5 Intense kkLow / Standard / Strong

6 Cool kkLow / Standard / Strong

7 Brighter kk k Low / Medium / High

8 Darker kk k Low / Medium / High

9 Monochrome kk k Blue / B/W / Sepia

109

Shooting with Ambience Selection

Set the ambience effect.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the effect so that [

Effect

] appears at

the bottom of the screen.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the desired effect.

Take the picture.



Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.



To return to viewfinder shooting,

press the <

> button to exit Live

View shooting. Then press the shutter

button completely to take the picture.



If you change the shooting mode or

set the power switch to <

>, the

setting will revert back to [

Standard setting

The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not

look exactly the same as the actual image.

Using flash may reduce the ambience effect.

In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the LCD monitor may

not have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual image.

Set [52: LCD brightness] to 4, and look at the Live View image so that

the LCD monitor is unaffected by outside light.

If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting

functions, press the <Q> button after step 1 and set [Ambience-based

shots] and [Effect].

Shooting with Ambience Selection

110

Ambience Settings

1Standard setting

Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode.

Note that <

> has image characteristics geared for portraits and

> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of

the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.

2Vivid

The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more

impressive than with [

Standard setting

3Soft

The subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits, pets,

flowers, etc.

4Warm

The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits,

pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.

5Intense

While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is

emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living

subject stand out more.

6Cool

The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A

subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.

111

Shooting with Ambience Selection

7Brighter

The picture will look brighter.

8Darker

The picture will look darker.

9Monochrome

The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome

color to be blue, black and white, or sepia. When [

Monochrome

] is

selected, <

> will appear in the viewfinder.

112

In the <

C2345

> Basic Zone modes, you can shoot with

the settings matching the lighting or scene type. Normally, [

Default

setting

] is adequate, but if the settings match the lighting condition or

scene, the picture will look more accurate to your eyes.

For Live View shooting, if you set both [

Light/scene-based shots

] and

[

Ambience-based shots

] (p.108), you should first set [

Light/scene-

based shots

]. This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the

LCD monitor.

Set the Mode Dial to <8>.



Set one of the following: <

>, <

>, or <

Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <A>.

Display the Live View image.



Press the <

> button to display the

Live View image.

Shooting by Lighting or Scene Type

Lighting or Scene 8

C 2 3 4 5

e Default setting kkkkk

f Daylight kkkkk

g Shade kkkkk

S Cloudy kkkkk

i Tungsten light k k k k

j Fluorescent light k k k k

s Sunset kkkkk

113

Shooting by Lighting or Scene Type

With Quick Control, select the

lighting or scene type.



Press the <

> button (



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[

Default setting

]. [

Light/scene-

based shots

] will appear on the

screen.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the lighting or scene type.



The resulting image with the selected

lighting or scene type will be

displayed.

Take the picture.



Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.



To return to viewfinder shooting,

press the <

> button to exit Live

View shooting. Then press the shutter

button completely to take the picture.



If you change the shooting mode or

set the power switch to <

>, the

setting will revert back to [

Default

setting

If you use flash, the setting will switch to [e Default setting]. (However,

the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that is set.)

If you want to set this together with [Ambience-based shots], set the

lighting or scene type that best matches the ambience you have set. In

the case of [Sunset], for example, warm colors will become prominent so

the ambience you set may not work well.

If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting

functions, press the <Q> button after step 1 and set [Light/scene-based

shots].

Shooting by Lighting or Scene Type

114

Lighting or Scene Type Settings

eDefault setting

Default setting suited for most subjects.

fDaylight

For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies

and greenery and reproduces light-colored flowers better.

gShade

For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones, which may look

too bluish, and for light-colored flowers.

SCloudy

For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and

landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look

warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.

iTungsten light

For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange

color cast caused by tungsten lighting.

jFluorescent light

For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of

fluorescent lighting.

sSunset

Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.

115

Setting the AF and

Drive Modes

The AF points in the viewfinder are

arranged to make AF shooting

suitable for a wide variety of

subjects and scenes.

You can also select the AF operation and drive mode

that best match the shooting conditions and subject.



The

icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that

the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (



In Basic Zone modes, the AF operation and AF point (AF

area selection mode) are set automatically.

<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.

116

You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting

conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation

is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.

Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <AF>.

Turn the Mode Dial to a Creative

Zone mode.

Press the <f> button

(

Select the AF operation.



While looking at the LCD panel, turn

the <

> or <

> dial.

: One-Shot AF

: AI Focus AF

: AI Servo AF

f: Selecting the AF OperationN

In Creative Zone modes, you can also press the button to

autofocus.

117

: Selecting the AF Operation

Suited for still subjects. When you

press the shutter button halfway, the

camera will focus only once.



When focus is achieved, the AF point

that achieved focus will be displayed,

and the focus indicator <

> in the

viewfinder will also light up.



With evaluative metering, the

exposure setting will be set at the

same time focus is achieved.



While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be

locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

Focus indicator

AF point

If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder

will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter

button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot or see “When

Autofocus Fails” (p.136) and try to focus again.

If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus

is achieved.

After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a

subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is useful

when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered by the Area

AF frame.

When a lens equipped with electronic manual focusing function is used,

after achieving focus, you can focus manually by turning the lens

focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway.

: Selecting the AF Operation

118

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing

distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button

halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.



The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.



When the AF area selection mode (p.120) is set to 45-point

automatic selection AF, focus tracking will continue as long as the

Area AF frame covers the subject.

AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI

Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.



After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts

moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF

operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and start tracking the moving

subject.

AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects

AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically

With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.

Also, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.

When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,

the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus indicator <o> in

the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be locked in this case.

119

: Selecting the AF Operation

By default, the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in low-

light conditions. In Creative Zone modes, you can set whether to have

the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved (p.424).

Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,

the built-in flash may fire a brief burst of flashes. This illuminates the

subject to help autofocusing.

AF Points Lighting Up in Red

AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash

AF-assist beam will not be emitted from the built-in flash in <7> or

<8: 35> modes, or when [Built-in flash firing] is set to in

<A>, <C>, <8: PCF24>, or <v: GWXHcZ> modes.

The AF-assist beam will not be emitted with AI Servo AF operation.

The built-in flash makes a sound when firing continuously. This is normal

and not a malfunction.

The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is

approx. 4 meters / 13.1 feet.

In Creative Zone modes, when you raise the built-in flash with the

button, the AF-assist beam will fire when necessary. Note that depending

on the setting for [8C.Fn II-6: AF-assist beam firing], the AF-assist

beam may not be emitted (p.419).

120

The camera has 45 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF

area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.

You can select one of four AF area selection modes. See the next page

for the selection procedure.

E:Single-point AF

(Manual selection)

Select one AF point to focus.

F:Zone AF

(Manual selection of zone)

The AF area is divided into nine focusing

zones for focusing.

G: Large Zone AF

(Manual selection of zone)

The AF area is divided into three

focusing zones (left, center, and right) for

focusing.

H: 45-point automatic selection

The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is

used to focus.

S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN

AF Area Selection Mode

Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable

AF points, AF point patterns, the shape of Area AF frame, etc. will

differ. For details, see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 128.

121

Selecting the AF Area and AF Point

Press the <S> or button

(



Look through the viewfinder and

press the <

> or <

> button.

Press the button.



Each time you press the <

button, the AF area selection mode

changes.



The AF area selection mode currently

set is indicated on the top of the

viewfinder.

Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode

AF area selection mode

With [8C.Fn II-8: Select AF area selec. mode], you can limit the

selectable AF area selection modes (p.420).

If you set [8C.Fn II-9: AF area selection method] to [1: S9Main

Dial], you can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the <S>

or button, then turning the <6> dial (p.420).

Selecting the AF Area and AF Point

122

You can manually select the AF point or zone.

Press the <S> or button

(



The AF points will be displayed in the

viewfinder.



In the Zone AF mode or Large Zone

AF mode, the selected zone will be

displayed.

Select an AF point.



The AF point selection will change in

the direction you tilt <

>. If you

press <

>, the center AF point (or

center zone) will be selected.



You can also select an AF point by

shifting horizontally with the <

dial or vertically with the <

> dial.



In the Zone AF mode, turning the

> or <

> dial will change the

zone in a looping sequence.

Selecting the AF Point Manually

When you hold down the <Q> button and turn the <6> dial, you can

select an AF point by shifting vertically.

When [8C.Fn II-11: Initial AFpt, o AI Servo AF] is set to [1: Initial

o AF pt selected] (p.422), you can use this method to manually select

the AI Servo’s AF initial position.

When you press the <S> or button, the LCD panel displays the

following:

• Zone AF, Large Zone AF, and 45-point automatic selection AF:

• 1 pt AF: SEL N (Center)/SEL AF (Off-center)

123

Selecting the AF Area and AF Point

Pressing the <

> or <

> button lights up the AF points that are

cross-type AF points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF

points are horizontal-line or vertical-line sensitive. For details, see

pages 127-131.

AF Point Display Indications

124

Select one AF point <

> to be used for focusing.

The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing. All the AF

points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point

selection. It is superior to single-point AF in tracking the subject, and it

is effective for moving subjects.

However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on

a specific target may be more difficult.

The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <

The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right)

for focusing. Since the focusing area is larger than with Zone AF and all

the AF points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point

selection, it is superior to single-point AF in tracking the subject, and it is

effective for moving subjects.

However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on

a specific target may be more difficult.

The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <

AF Area Selection Modes

S Single-point AF (Manual Selection)

m Zone AF (Manual Selection of Zone)

n Large Zone AF (Manual Selection of Zone)

125

AF Area Selection Modes

The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus.

This mode is set

automatically in Basic Zone modes

(except <

> and <

>).

The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <

With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button

halfway will display the AF point(s) <

> that

achieved focus. If multiple AF points are

displayed, it means they all have achieved focus.

This mode tends to focus on the nearest subject.

With AI Servo AF, you can set the AI Servo AF’s

starting position with [

C.Fn II-11:

Initial AFpt,

AI Servo AF

] (p.422). As long as the Area AF

frame can track the subject during shooting,

focusing will continue.

o 45-point Automatic Selection AF

When AI Servo AF mode is set with 45-point automatic selection AF,

Large Zone AF, or Zone AF, the active AF point <S> will keep switching

to track the subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as

when the subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject.

If a peripheral AF point or a wide-angle lens is used, achieving focus may

be difficult with an EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.

In such a case, use an AF point closer to the center.

When the AF point(s) light up, part or all of the viewfinder may light up in

red. This is a characteristic of AF point display.

In low temperatures, the AF point’s display may be difficult to see. This is

a characteristic of AF point display. Also, the tracking response may

become slower.

With [8C.Fn II -10: Orientation linked AF point], you can set the AF area

selection mode + AF point, or only the AF point separately for the horizontal

and vertical orientations (p.421).

AF Area Selection Modes

126

AF Using Color Tracking

By default, AF will be performed based on color tracking.

When the AF area selection mode is set to Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or

45-point automatic selection AF, focus is achieved as follows:

In One-Shot AF Mode

Focusing on a still human subject in the AF area is made easier.

In AI Servo AF Mode

Focusing on a human subject in the AF area is made easier. If no skin

tones can be detected, the nearest subject will be focused on. Once focus

is achieved, AF points are automatically selected so that the camera

continues to focus on the color of the area it focused on first.

*In [

8C.FnII-12 Auto AF pt sel.:Color Tracking

], you can set whether to perform

AF by tracking colors. If [

1: Disable

] is set, focus is achieved based only on AF

information (p.422).

127

The camera’s AF sensor has 45 AF points. The illustration below shows

the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. When using

lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster, high-precision AF is

possible with the center AF point in the viewfinder.

AF Sensor

The focusing sensor is geared to obtain higher precision

focusing for lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or

faster. A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus on

subjects difficult for AF. It is provided at the center AF point.

The focusing sensor is geared for lenses with a maximum

aperture of f/5.6 or faster (and some f/8 lenses). Since it

has a horizontal pattern, it can detect vertical lines. It

covers all 45 AF points.

The focusing sensor is geared for lenses with a maximum

aperture of f/5.6 or faster (and some f/8 lenses). Since it

has a vertical pattern, it can detect horizontal lines. It

covers all 45 AF points.

Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable

AF points, AF point patterns, the shape of Area AF frame, etc. vary. For

details, see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 128.

Diagram

Cross-type focusing: f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal

(also compatible with some f/8 lenses)

Dual cross-type focusing:

f/2.8 right diagonal + f/2.8 left diagonal

f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal

(also compatible with f/8 lenses)

128

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes

are selectable.

: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking is superior and the focusing

precision is higher than with other AF

points.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking is superior and high-

precision focusing is achieved.

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Group A

Although the camera has 45 AF points, the number of usable AF

points and focusing patterns vary depending on the lens. The

lenses are thereby classified into eight groups from A to H.

When using a lens in Groups E to H, fewer AF points will be usable.

See which group each lens belongs to on pages 132-135. Check

which group the lens in use belongs to.

The number of available AF points varies depending on aspect ratio

settings (p. 146).

When you press the <S> or button, the AF points indicated by

the mark will blink. (The / AF points will stay lit.) Regarding

lighting up or blinking of the AF points, see page 123.

For the latest “Lens Group Designations” information, check the Canon

website.

Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.

129

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes

are selectable.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking is superior and high-

precision focusing is achieved.

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes

are selectable.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking is superior and high-

precision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal

lines.

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes

are selectable.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking is superior and high-

precision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal

lines.

Group B

Group C

Group D

Lenses and Usable AF Points

130

Autofocusing with only 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45

AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During

automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area

(Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point automatic selection AF.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking is superior and high-

precision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal

lines.

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Autofocusing with only 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45

AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During

automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area

(Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point automatic selection AF.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking is superior and high-

precision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to vertical lines

(AF points in the horizontal array at

the top and bottom) or horizontal

lines (AF points in a vertical array on

the left and right).

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Group E

Group F

131

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Autofocusing with only 27 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45

AF points.) Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone) cannot be

selected for AF area selection mode. During automatic AF point

selection, the outer frame marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be

different from 45-point automatic selection AF.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking is superior and high-

precision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal

lines.

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Autofocusing is possible only with the center AF point.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking is superior and high-

precision focusing is achieved.

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Group G

Group H

If the maximum aperture is slower than f/5.6 (greater than f/5.6 but not

exceeding f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting low-

contrast or low-light subjects.

If the maximum aperture is slower than f/8 (greater than f/8), AF is not

possible during viewfinder shooting.

Lenses and Usable AF Points

132

EF-S24mm f/2.8 STM A

EF-S60mm f/2.8 Macro USM B

EF-S10-18mm f/4.5-5.6 IS STM D

EF-S10-22mm f/3.5-4.5 USM B

EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM B

EF-S17-55mm f/2.8 IS USM A

EF-S17-85mm f/4-5.6 IS USM B

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 C

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 USM C

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II C

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM C

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 III B

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS C

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II B

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM B

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS B

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM B

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM B

EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS B

EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS B

EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II B

EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM B

EF14mm f/2.8L USM A

EF14mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye A

EF20mm f/2.8 USM A

EF24mm f/1.4L USM A

EF24mm f/1.4L II USM A

EF24mm f/2.8 A

EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM A

EF28mm f/1.8 USM A

EF28mm f/2.8 A

EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM A

EF35mm f/1.4L USM A

EF35mm f/1.4L II USM A

EF35mm f/2 A

EF35mm f/2 IS USM A

EF40mm f/2.8 STM A

EF50mm f/1.0L USM A

EF50mm f/1.2L USM A

EF50mm f/1.4 USM A

EF50mm f/1.8 A

EF50mm f/1.8 II A

EF50mm f/1.8 STM A

EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro B

EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro

+ LIFE SIZE Converter B

EF85mm f/1.2L USM A

EF85mm f/1.2L II USM A

EF85mm f/1.8 USM A

EF100mm f/2 USM A

EF100mm f/2.8 Macro B

EF100mm f/2.8 Macro USM E

EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM B

EF135mm f/2L USM A

EF135mm f/2L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A

EF135mm f/2L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus) A

EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM B

EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F

EF200mm f/1.8L USM A

EF200mm f/1.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A

EF200mm f/1.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2L IS USM A

EF200mm f/2L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A

EF200mm f/2L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L USM A

EF200mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L II USM A

Lens Group Designations

(as of the release of EOS 80D (W))

133

Lenses and Usable AF Points

EF200mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L USM A

EF300mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM A

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM A

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/4L USM B

EF300mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF300mm f/4L IS USM B

EF300mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF400mm f/2.8L USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF400mm f/5.6L USM B

EF400mm f/5.6L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF500mm f/4L IS USM B

EF500mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF500mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM B

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF500mm f/4.5L USM B

EF500mm f/4.5L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF600mm f/4L USM B

EF600mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF600mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF600mm f/4L IS USM B

EF600mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF600mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF600mm f/4L IS II USM B

EF600mm f/4L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF600mm f/4L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM E

Lenses and Usable AF Points

134

EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF1200mm f/5.6L USM E

EF1200mm f/5.6L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)*

EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM B

EF11-24mm f/4L USM C

EF16-35mm f/2.8L USM A

EF16-35mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM B

EF17-35mm f/2.8L USM A

EF17-40mm f/4L USM B

EF20-35mm f/2.8L A

EF20-35mm f/3.5-4.5 USM C

EF22-55mm f/4-5.6 USM F

EF24-70mm f/2.8L USM A

EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM B

EF24-85mm f/3.5-4.5 USM D

EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM B

EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM B

EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM A

EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 E

EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II E

EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM B

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 III USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 IV USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 V USM E

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 USM B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II USM B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 III B

EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 USM B

EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 II USM B

EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 F

EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 USM F

EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM B

EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 B

EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 USM B

EF28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS USM B

EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5 E

EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5A E

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 F

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 PZ E

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM F

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II E

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III F

EF35-105mm f/3.5-4.5 B

EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 H

EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM H

EF35-135mm f/3.5-4.5 B

EF35-135mm f/4-5.6 USM C

EF35-350mm f/3.5-5.6L USM D

EF38-76mm f/4.5-5.6 E

EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5 B

EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5L B

EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM D

EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM D

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM A

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM A

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM A

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/4L USM B

EF70-200mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

135

Lenses and Usable AF Points

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM B

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF70-210mm f/3.5-4.5 USM B

EF70-210mm f/4 B

EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM B

EF70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM B

EF70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 USM C

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II USM B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM B

EF80-200mm f/2.8L A

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 D

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM E

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II E

EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 D

EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM D

EF100-200mm f/4.5A B

EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM C

EF100-300mm f/5.6 B

EF100-300mm f/5.6L B

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM B

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM B

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II H (f/8)

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x III G (f/8)

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM

Extender 1.4x B

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM

Extender 1.4x:

With built-in Ext.1.4x B

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender

1.4x + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender

1.4x: With built-in Ext.1.4x

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender

1.4x + Extender EF2x I/II H (f/8)

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender

1.4x + Extender EF2x III G (f/8)

TS-E17mm f/4L B

TS-E24mm f/3.5L B

TS-E24mm f/3.5L II B

TS-E45mm f/2.8 A

TS-E90mm f/2.8 A

If you use a TS-E lens, manual focusing will be required. The lens group

designation of TS-E lenses applies only when you do not use tilt or shift

function.

If Extender EF2x (I/II/III) is attached to the EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM

lens, AF is not possible.

When using a lens and Extender EF1.4x III/EF2x III in a combination

marked with an asterisk (*) or when using a lens and extender in a

combination marked with two asterisks (**), precise focus may not be

achieved with AF. In such a case, refer to the Instruction Manual of the

lens or extender used.

136

Autofocus may fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus indicator <

blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:

Subjects Difficult to Focus



Subjects with very low contrast

(Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.)



Subjects in very low light



Strongly backlit or reflective subjects

(Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)



Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point

(Example: Animals in cages, etc.)



Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point

(Example: Night scenes, etc.)



Subjects with repetitive patterns

(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)

In such a case, focus by doing either of the following:

(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as the

subject and lock the focus, then recompose the shot (p.81).

(2) Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <

> and focus manually

(p.137).

When Autofocus Fails

Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly

recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.

Conditions that make focusing difficult with AF during Live View shooting

or movie shooting are listed on page 284.

137

When Autofocus Fails

Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <MF>.



4 L

> will be displayed on the

LCD panel.

Focus on the subject.



Focus by turning the lens’s focusing

ring until the subject looks sharp in

the viewfinder.

MF: Manual Focus

Focusing ring

If you press the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF

point that achieved focus and the focus indicator <o> will light up in the

viewfinder.

With 45-point automatic selection AF, when the center AF point achieves

focus, the focus indicator <o> will light up.

138

Single and continuous drive modes are provided.

Press the <R> button

(

)

Select the drive mode.



While looking at the LCD panel, turn

the <

> or <

> dial.

Single shooting

When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will

be taken.

High-speed continuous shooting

(Max. approx. 7.0 shots/sec.*)

While you hold down the shutter button completely, the camera

will shoot continuously.

* During Live View shooting or when [Servo AF] is set, the maximum

speed will be max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec.

Low-speed continuous shooting

(Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.)

While you hold down the shutter button completely, the camera

will shoot continuously.

Silent single shooting

You can shoot one image at a time while suppressing the camera

noise during viewfinder shooting.

Silent continuous shooting

(Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.)

You can shoot continuously while suppressing the camera noise

during viewfinder shooting.

10-sec. self-timer/remote control

2-sec. self-timer/remote control

For self-timer shooting, see page 140. For remote control

shooting, see page 221.

i Selecting the Drive Mode

139

Selecting the Drive Mode

o: The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 7.0 shots/sec.

is attained under the following conditions*: 1/500 sec. or faster shutter

speed, maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens), Anti-flicker

shooting set to Disable, with a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, and at

room temperature (23°C/73°F). The continuous shooting speed may

become slower depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject

conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, temperature, battery type,

remaining battery level, etc.

* With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off

when using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.5-

5.6 IS USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS

USM.

If or <M> is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter

button completely until the picture is taken will be slightly longer than

normal.

With Live View shooting, and <M> cannot be set.

The continuous shooting speed may become slower if the remaining

battery level is low or if you shoot under low-light conditions.

In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become

slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.

If you use Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately) with AA/R6 batteries,

the high-speed continuous shooting speed may be slower.

If you set [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable] (p.179) and shoot under

a flickering light source, the continuous shooting speed may decrease

slightly, the shooting interval may become irregular, or the release time

lag may become longer.

When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the

continuous shooting speed may drop since shooting will be temporarily

disabled (p.145).

140

Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture.

Press the <R> button

(

)

Select the self-timer.



While looking at the LCD panel, turn

the <

> or <

> dial to select the

self-timer delay.

Shoot in approx. 10 sec.

Shoot in approx. 2 sec.

Take the picture.



Look through the viewfinder, focus on

the subject, then press the shutter

button completely.



You can check the self-timer

operation with the self-timer lamp,

beeper, and countdown display (in

seconds) on the LCD panel.



2 sec. before the picture is taken, the

self-timer lamp will light up and the

beeper will sound faster.

j Using the Self-timer

If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button,

attach the eyepiece cover (p.220). If stray light enters the viewfinder when

the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.

The <k> enables you to shoot while not touching the camera

mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera vibration blur when you shoot

still lifes or long exposures.

After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.346) to check

focus and exposure is recommended.

When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.81) on an

object at the same distance as where you will stand.

To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either touch the LCD monitor or

press the <R> button.

141

Image Settings

This chapter explains image-related function settings:

Image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, white

balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, noise reduction, lens

aberration correction, anti-flicker shooting, and other

functions.



In Basic Zone modes, only the following can be set as

described in this chapter: Image-recording quality, folder

creation and selection, and image file numbering.



The

icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that

the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (

142

You can select the pixel count and the image quality. There are eight JPEG

image-recording quality settings:

There are three RAW image quality settings:

(p.144).

Select [Image quality].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Image

quality

], then press <

Set the image-recording quality.



To select a RAW setting, turn the

> dial. To select a JPEG setting,

press the <

> <

> keys.



On the upper right of the screen,

“

***M

(megapixels)

****x****

”

indicates the recorded pixel count,

and [

***

] is the number of possible

shots (displayed up to 999).



Press <

> to set it.

Image-recording Quality Setting Examples

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

only

741

only

The image size [****x****] and number of possible shots [***] for the [3:2]

aspect ratio will always be displayed on the image-recording quality setting

screen regardless of the [z4: Aspect ratio] setting (p.146).

If [–] is set for both RAW and JPEG, 73 will be set.

143

Setting the Image-Recording Quality

Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.)

*1 :b is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame.

*2 :c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a website.

b and c will be in 7 (Fine) quality.

The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous shooting

are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100 and

Standard Picture Style) using an 8 GB card. These figures will vary

depending on the subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture

Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.

The maximum burst applies to <o> high-speed continuous shooting.

Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I class 16 GB card based on Canon’s

testing standards.

Image

Quality

Pixels

Recorded

Printing

Size

File Size

(MB)

Possible

Shots Maximum Burst

JPEG

73 24M A2 7.6 940 77 (110)

83 3.9 1800 120 (120)

74 11M A3 4.1 1730 140 (140)

84 2.0 3430 140 (140)

7a5.9M A4 2.6 2700 140 (140)

8a1.3 5260 150 (150)

2.5M

9x13 cm

1.3 5260 150 (150)

0.3M - 0.3 20180 150 (150)

RAW

124M A2 28.9 240 20 (25)

41 14M A3 22.8 300 21 (26)

61 6.0M A4 15.9 440 27 (28)

RAW

JPEG

24M

A2 28.9+7.6 190 20 (22)

14M

24M

A2 22.8+7.6 220 20 (22)

6.0M

24M

A2 15.9+7.6 300 22 (22)

Even if you use a UHS-I class card, the maximum burst indicator will not

change. The maximum burst in parentheses in the table will apply instead.

Setting the Image-Recording Quality

144

A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to

digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the

quality as follows:

, or

image can be processed with [

1: RAW image processing

]

(p.390) and saved as a JPEG image. (

and

images cannot

be processed with the camera.) As the RAW image itself does not

change, you can process the RAW image to create any number of

JPEG images with various processing conditions.

You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.512) to

process RAW images. You can make various adjustments to images

depending upon how they will be used and generate JPEG, TIFF, or

other types of images reflecting the effects of those adjustments.

RAW Images

If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded

simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the image-

recording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with

the same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for

RAW).

The image-recording quality icons are as follows: 1 (RAW), 41

(Middle RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG, 7 (Fine), 8 (Normal), 3

(Large), 4 (Middle), 6 (Small).

RAW Image Processing Software

To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional

(DPP, EOS software) is recommended.

Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken

with this camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your

computer, obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon

website to update it (p.512). (The previous version will be overwritten.)

Note that DPP Ver.3.x or earlier cannot process RAW images taken with

this camera.

Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW

images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the

software manufacturer.

145

Setting the Image-Recording Quality

The approximate maximum burst is

displayed on the bottom right in the

viewfinder and on the shooting function

settings screen.

If the maximum burst for continuous

shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be

displayed.

Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting

The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the

camera. Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture.

If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99

or more shots continuously. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower

and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be displayed in the

viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Shooting will then be disabled temporarily.

If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After all

the captured images are written to the card, you can resume continuous

shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the table on page 143.

146

You can change the image’s aspect ratio. [

3:2

] is set by default. When

[

4:3

], [

16:9

], or [

1:1

] is set, frame lines indicating the shooting area will

be displayed in the viewfinder. During Live View shooting, the image

appears with the surrounding area masked in black on the LCD monitor.

Select the aspect ratio.



Under the [

] tab, select [

Aspect

ratio

], then press <

Set the aspect ratio.



Select an aspect ratio, then press



JPEG images

The images will be saved with the set aspect ratio.



RAW images

The images will always be saved with the [

3:2

] aspect ratio. The

selected aspect ratio information is added to the RAW image file.

When you process the RAW image with Digital Photo Professional

(EOS software), this allows you to generate an image with the same

aspect ratio set for shooting. In the case of the [

4:3

], [

16:9

], and [

1:1

]

aspect ratios, the lines to indicate the aspect ratio will appear during

image playback, but they are not actually drawn on the captured

image.

Changing the Image’s Aspect Ratio

The [z4: Aspect ratio] setting does not work with multiple exposures.

147

Changing the Image’s Aspect Ratio

The table below shows the aspect ratio and the number of recorded

pixels for each image-recording quality.

Image

Quality

Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)

3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1

36000x4000

(24.0 megapixels)

5328x4000*

(21.3 megapixels)

6000x3368*

(20.2 megapixels)

4000x4000

(16.0 megapixels)

43984x2656

(10.6 megapixels)

3552x2664

(9.5 megapixels)

3984x2240*

(8.9 megapixels)

2656x2656

(7.1 megapixels)

a2976x1984

(5.9 megapixels)

2656x1992

(5.3 megapixels)

2976x1680*

(5.0 megapixels)

1984x1984

(3.9 megapixels)

b1920x1280

(2.5 megapixels)

1696x1280*

(2.2 megapixels)

1920x1080

(2.1 megapixels)

1280x1280

(1.6 megapixels)

c720x480

(0.35 megapixels)

640x480

(0.31 megapixels)

720x408*

(0.29 megapixels)

480x480

(0.23 megapixels)

The items marked with an asterisk do not exactly match the indicated

aspect ratio.

The shooting area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio may be

slightly different from the actual shooting area. Check the captured

images on the LCD monitor during shooting.

If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this

camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images may not be correctly printed.

148

Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the

ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set

automatically (p.150).

Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 296 and

299.

Press the button

(

)

Set the ISO speed.



While looking at the LCD panel or in

the viewfinder, turn the <

> or

> dial.



ISO speed can be set within ISO 100

- ISO 16000 in 1/3-stop increments.



“

” indicates ISO Auto. The ISO

speed will be set automatically

(p.150).



When the screen shown on the left is

displayed, you can press the <

button to set it to “

AUTO

”.

ISO Speed Guide

* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.

Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

ISO Speed Shooting Situation

(No flash) Flash Range

ISO 100 - ISO 400 Sunny outdoors

The higher the ISO speed,

the farther the effective flash

range will extend.

ISO 400 - ISO 1600 Overcast skies or

evening time

ISO 1600 - ISO 16000, H Dark indoors or night

149

: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

As “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) is an expanded ISO speed setting,

noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and irregular colors will be more

noticeable, and the resolution will be lower compared with the standard

setting.

If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], ISO 100/125/160 and

“H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot be selected (p.174).

Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.

Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.

When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and

banding) may become noticeable.

When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,

such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long

exposure, images may not be recorded properly.

If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,

overexposure may result.

You can expand the settable ISO speed range up to ISO 25600 (H)-

equivalent with [Range for stills] under [z2: ISO speed settings]

(p.151).

: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

150

If the ISO speed is set to “

” (Auto), the

actual ISO speed setting will be

displayed when you press the shutter

button halfway. As indicated below, the

ISO speed will be set automatically to

suit the shooting mode.

*1: The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum]

settings set in [Auto range] (p.152).

*2: (1) If fill-in flash will cause overexposure, ISO speed may be reduced, down to

a possible minimum of ISO 100.

(2) In <8: Px2345> and <d> modes, if you use bounce flash with

an external Speedlite, the ISO speed will be automatically set within ISO

400 - ISO 1600.

ISO Auto

Shooting Mode ISO Speed Setting

No Flash With Flash

A7CvISO 100 - ISO 6400 ISO 400

*1*2

(Except in the A, C,

<8: C6F>,

<v: GWXHcZ>

modes.)

PCx6G245

FISO 100 - ISO 12800

3ISO 100 - ISO 1600

d, s, f, aISO 100 - ISO 16000

With bulb exposures ISO 400

151

: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and

maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 to ISO

16000, and the maximum limit within ISO 200 to H (equivalent to ISO

25600).

Select [ISO speed settings].



Under the [

] tab, select [

ISO

speed settings

], then press <

Select [Range for stills].

Set the minimum limit.



Select the minimum limit box, then

press <



Select the ISO speed, then press

Set the maximum limit.



Select the maximum limit box, then

press <



Select the ISO speed, then press

Select [OK].

3 Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range

: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

152

You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO 100

- ISO 16000. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - ISO 12800,

and the maximum limit within ISO 200 - ISO 16000 in 1-stop

increments.

Select [Auto range].

Set the minimum limit.



Select the minimum limit box, then

press <



Select the ISO speed, then press

Set the maximum limit.



Select the maximum limit box, then

press <



Select the ISO speed, then press

Select [OK].

3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for ISO Auto

The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also be applied to the ISO

speed safety shift’s minimum and maximum ISO speeds (p.415).

153

: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set

automatically will not be too slow when ISO Auto is set.

This is useful in the <

> and <

> modes when you use a wide-angle

lens to shoot a moving subject or when you use a telephoto lens. It

helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.

Select [Min. shutter spd.].

Set the desired minimum shutter

speed.



Select [

Auto

] or [

Manual



If you select [

Auto

], turn the <

dial to set the desired speed, slower

or faster, compared to the standard

speed, then press <



If you select [

Manual

], turn the <

dial to select the shutter speed, then

press <

3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto

Automatically set

Manually set

If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed

limit set with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter

spd.] will be set to obtain a standard exposure.

This function will not be applied to flash and movie shooting.

When [Auto: 0] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of

the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is equivalent to

a single shutter speed stop.

154

By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics

matching your photographic expression or the subject.

In Basic Zone modes, [

] (Auto) is set automatically. (In <

modes, [

] (Standard) is set.)

Select [Picture Style].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Picture

Style

], then press <

Select a Picture Style.



Select a Picture Style, then press



The Picture Style will be set.

Auto

The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The

colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets,

particularly in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.

Standard

The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose

Picture Style suitable for most scenes.

Portrait

For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up

portraits.

By changing the [

Color tone

] (p.157), you can adjust the skin tone.

A Selecting a Picture StyleN

Picture Style Characteristics

If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture

Style.

155

Selecting a Picture Style

Landscape

For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.

Effective for impressive landscapes.

Fine Detail

Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the subject.

The colors will be slightly vivid.

Neutral

This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with

their computer. For natural colors and subdued images with modest

brightness and color saturation.

Faithful

Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a

subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K

will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For

subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.

Monochrome

Creates black-and-white images.

User Def. 1-3

You can register a basic style such as [

Portrait

], [

Landscape

], a

Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.160). Any User

Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same

default settings as the [

Auto

] Picture Style.

Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be turned into color. Be

careful not to leave the [Monochrome] setting on when you want to shoot

photos in color again.

You can display <z> in the viewfinder when [Monochrome] is set (p.425).

Selecting a Picture Style

156

The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [

Strength

], [

Fineness

or [

Threshold

] of [

Sharpness

], [

Contrast

], and other parameters. The

numerals indicate the set values for these parameters set for the

respective Picture Style.

Symbols

Sharpness

JStrength

KFineness

LThreshold

hContrast

iSaturation

jColor tone

kFilter effect (Monochrome)

lToning effect (Monochrome)

During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and

[Threshold] of [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be

applied to movies.

157

You can customize the Picture Styles. You can change or adjust the

parameter settings of Picture Styles such as [

Strength

], [

Fineness

], or

[

Threshold

] of [

Sharpness

], and [

Contrast

], and other parameters

from the default settings. To see the resulting effects, take test shots. To

customize [

Monochrome

], see page 159.

Select [Picture Style].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Picture

Style

], then press <

Select a Picture Style.



Select a Picture Style, then press the

> button.

Select a parameter.



Select the parameter (such as

[

Sharpness

] - [

Strength

]) to be set,

then press <



The settings and effects are

explained on page 158.

Set the parameter.



Adjust the parameter as desired, then

press <

A Customizing a Picture StyleN

Customizing a Picture Style

158



Press the <

> button to save the

adjusted parameters. The Picture

Style selection screen will reappear.



Any parameter settings different from

the default will be displayed in blue.

*1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the

number, the finer the outlines that can be emphasized.

*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast

between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the

more the outline with low contrast difference can be emphasized. However,

noise tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.

Parameter Settings and Effects

Sharpness

JStrength 0: Less sharp outline 7: Sharp outline

KFineness

1: Fine 5: Grainy

LThreshold

1: Low 5: High

h Contrast -4: Low contrast +4: High contrast

i Saturation -4: Low saturation +4: High saturation

j Color tone -4: Reddish skin tone +4: Yellowish skin tone

During movie playback, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness]

cannot be set (these menu items are not displayed).

By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter

settings of the respective Picture Style to their defaults.

To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted

Picture Style, then shoot.

159

Customizing a Picture Style

Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as

[

Contrast

], or [

Strength

], [

Fineness

] and [

Threshold

] of [

Sharpness

you can also set [

Filter effect

] and [

Toning effect

k Filter effect

With a filter effect applied to a

monochrome image, you can make

white clouds or green trees stand out

more.

l Toning effect

By applying a toning effect, you can

create a monochrome image in the

selected color. Effective when you want

to create more impressive images.

The following can be selected: [

N:None

[

S:Sepia

], [

B:Blue

], [

P:Purple

], or

[

G:Green

V Monochrome Adjustment

Filter Sample Effects

N: None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.

Ye: Yel low The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look

crisper.

Or: Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more

brilliant.

R: Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and

brighter.

G: Green Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look

crisper and brighter.

Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.

160

You can select a base Picture Style such as [

Portrait

] or [

Landscape

adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [

User Def. 1

[

User Def. 2

], or [

User Def. 3

You can create multiple Picture Styles with different settings.

You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered

to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.512).

Select [Picture Style].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Picture

Style

], then press <

Select [User Def. *].



Select [

User Def. *

], then press the

> button.

Press <0>.



With [

Picture Style

] selected, press

Select the base Picture Style.



Select the base Picture Style, then

press <



To adjust the parameters of a Picture

Style that is registered to the camera

with EOS Utility (EOS software),

select the Picture Style here.

A Registering a Picture StyleN

161

Registering a Picture Style

Select a parameter.



Select the parameter (such as

[

Sharpness

] - [

Strength

]) to be set,

then press <

Set the parameter.



Adjust the parameter as desired, then

press <

For details, see “Customizing a

Picture Style” (p.157).



Press the <

> button to register

the modified Picture Style. The

Picture Style selection screen will

then reappear.



The base Picture Style will be

indicated on the right of [

User Def. *



If the settings in a Picture Style

registered under [

User Def.

] have

been modified from the base Picture

Style settings, the Picture Style’s

name will be displayed in blue.

If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the

base Picture Style in step 4 will clear the parameter settings of the

previously registered User Defined Picture Style.

If you perform [Clear all camera settings] (p.68), all the [User Def. *]

settings will revert to their defaults. Any Picture Style registered via EOS

Utility (EOS software) will have only its modified parameters reverted to

the default setting.

To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, select the registered [User

Def. *], then shoot.

Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,

refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.

162

White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,

the Auto [

] (Ambience priority) or [

] (White priority) setting will

obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be

obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light

source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

In Basic Zone modes, [

] (Ambience priority) is set automatically. (In

the <

> mode, [

] (White priority) is set.)

Select [White balance].



Under the [

] tab, select [

White

balance

], then press <

Select a white balance setting.



Select the desired setting, then press

(Approx.)

* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.

Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.

3 Setting the White BalanceN

Display Mode Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)

QAuto (Ambience priority, p.163) 3000-7000

QwAuto (White priority, p.163)

WDaylight 5200

EShade 7000

RCloudy, twilight, sunset 6000

YTungsten light 3200

UWhite fluorescent light 4000

DFlash use Automatically set*

OCustom (p.164) 2000-10000

PColor temperature (p.166) 2500-10000

163

3 Setting the White BalanceN

To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of

lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is

decided depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and

then the color is adjusted with software to make the white areas look

white. With this function, pictures with natural color tones can be taken.

With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can increase the intensity of the

image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you

select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the

image’s warm color cast.

If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS camera

models, select [Q] (Ambience priority).

Select [White balance].

Under the [z2] tab, select [White

balance], then press <0>.

Select [Q].

Select [Q], then press the

button.

Select the desired item.

Select [Auto: Ambience priority] or

[Auto: White priority], then press

<0>.

Q: Auto: Ambience priority

Qw: Auto: White priority

White Balance

Q Setting the Auto White Balance

Setting the White Balance

164

Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance

for a specific light source. Make sure to perform this procedure under

the light source at the actual location of the shoot.

Shoot a white object.



Look through the viewfinder and aim

the entire dotted line box (shown in the

illustration) over a plain, white object.



Focus manually and shoot with the

standard exposure set for the white

object.



You can use any white balance setting.

Select [Custom White Balance].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Custom

White Balance

], then press <



The custom white balance selection

screen will appear.

Import the white balance data.



Turn the <

> dial to select the

image captured in step 1, then press



On the dialog screen that appears,

select [

] and the data will be

imported.

O Custom White Balance

Cautions for Setting [Qw] (White priority)

The warm color cast of subjects may fade.

When multiple light sources are included on the screen, the warm color

cast of the picture may not be lessened.

When using flash, the color tone will be the same as [Q] (Ambience

priority).

165

Setting the White Balance

Select [White balance].



Under the [

] tab, select [

White

balance

], then press <

Select the custom white balance.



Select [

], then press <

If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard

exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.

In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured with

the Picture Style set to [Monochrome], images shot with a Creative filter,

images processed with a Creative filter after shooting, multiple-exposure

images, cropped images, and images shot with another camera.

Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector

(commercially-available) can produce a more accurate white balance.

The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility (EOS software)

will be registered under [O]. If you perform step 3, the data for the

registered personal white balance will be erased.

Setting the White Balance

166

You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This

function is for advanced users.

Select [White balance].



Under the [

] tab, select [

White

balance

], then press <

Set the color temperature.



Select [



Turn the <

> dial to set the color

temperature, then press <



The color temperature can be set

from approx. 2500 K to 10000 K in

100 K increments.

P Setting the Color Temperature

When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white

balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.

If you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially-available color

temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate

for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the

camera’s color temperature reading.

167

You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have

the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature

conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be

corrected to one of nine levels.

This function is for advanced users, particularly for those users who

understand the use of color temperature conversion and color

compensating filters and their effects.

Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Shift/Bkt.

], then press <

Set the white balance correction.



Use <

> to move the “ ” mark to the

appropriate position.



B is for blue, A for amber, M for

magenta, and G for green. The

image’s color balance will be adjusted

toward the color in the direction of the

move.



On the right of the screen, “

Shift

”

indicates the direction and correction

amount, respectively.



Pressing the <

> button will cancel

all the [

WB Shift/Bkt.

] settings.



Press <

> to exit the setting and

return to the menu.

3 White Balance CorrectionN

White Balance Correction

Sample setting: A2, G1

You can display <z> in the viewfinder when white balance correction is

set (p.425).

One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds

of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating

the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)

White Balance Correction

168

With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be

recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current

white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber

bias and magenta/green bias. This function is called white balance

bracketing (WB Bkt.). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3

levels in single-level increments.

Set the white balance bracketing amount.



In step 2 for “White Balance

Correction”, when you turn the <

dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will

change to “ ” (3 points).

Turning the dial to the right sets the B/

A bracketing, and turning it to the left

sets the M/G bracketing.



On the right, “

Bracket

” indicates the

bracketing direction and correction

amount.



Pressing the <

> button will cancel

all the [

WB Shift/Bkt.

] settings.



Press <

> to exit the setting and

return to the menu.

Bracketing Sequence

The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard

white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard

white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.

White Balance Auto Bracketing

B/A bias ±3 levels

During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will

be lower.

Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record

the image on the card.



You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white

balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance

bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.



You can change the number of shots for white balance bracketing (p.414).



“

Bkt.

” stands for bracketing.

169

If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and

contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto

Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [

Standard

]. With JPEG

images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.

In Basic Zone modes, [

Standard

] is set automatically.

Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Auto

Lighting Optimizer

], then press

Select the setting.



Select the desired setting, then press

Take the picture.



The image will be recorded with the

brightness and contrast corrected if

necessary.

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast

Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.

If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure

compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,

the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set

this function to [Disable].

If HDR mode (p.207), highlight tone priority (p.174), or multiple-exposure

shooting (p.212) is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set

automatically to [Disable].

In step 2, if you press the button and uncheck [X] the [Disabled in

M or B modes] setting, the [Auto Lighting Optimizer] can also be set in

the <a> and <F> modes.

170

This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise

reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high

ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker

parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced.

Select [High ISO speed NR].



Under the [

] tab, select [

High ISO

speed NR

], then press <

Set the level.



Select the desired noise reduction

level, then press <

M

: Multi Shot Noise Reduction

This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [

High

For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned

and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.

If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you

cannot set [

Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Take the picture.



The image will be recorded with noise

reduction applied.

3 Setting Noise ReductionN

High ISO Speed Noise Reduction

When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, you can display <z> in the

viewfinder (p.425).

171

Setting Noise Reduction

Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction

If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the

noise reduction effect may become smaller.

If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera

shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave

afterimages.

The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.

If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are

taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.

After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card for

noise reduction and merging the images. During the processing of the

images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel,

and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.

You cannot use AEB and WB bracketing.

If [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], [z3: Multiple exposure], [z3:

HDR Mode], AEB, or WB bracketing is set, [Multi Shot Noise

Reduction] cannot be set.

You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures or

movie shooting.

Flash shooting is not possible. The AF-assist beam will be emitted

according to the [8 C.Fn II -6: AF-assist beam firing] setting.

If you turn off the power, change the shooting mode to a Basic Zone

mode or <F>, or switch to movie shooting, the setting will automatically

switch to [Standard].

Setting Noise Reduction

172

Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.

Select [Long exp. noise

reduction].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Long

exp. noise reduction

], then press

Set the desired setting.



Select the desired setting, then press



Auto

For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed

automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This

[

Auto

] setting is effective in most cases.



Enable

Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.

The [

Enable

] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with

the [

Auto

] setting.

Take the picture.



The image will be recorded with noise

reduction applied.

Long Exposure Noise Reduction

173

Setting Noise Reduction

With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is

taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. You

cannot take another picture until the noise reduction process is

completed.

Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]

setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.

With [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image

displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process.

The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is

completed. (You cannot take another picture.)

174

You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.

Select [Highlight tone priority].



Under the [

] tab, select

[

Highlight tone priority

], then press

Select [Enable].



Highlight details are improved. The

dynamic range is expanded from the

standard 18% gray to bright

highlights. The gradation between the

grays and highlights becomes

smoother.

Take the picture.



The image will be recorded with

highlight tone priority applied.

3 Highlight Tone PriorityN

When [Enable] is set, noise may increase slightly.

With [Enable], the settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 or higher.

Expanded ISO speed cannot be set.

If highlight tone priority is set, <A> is displayed in the viewfinder and on

the LCD panel.

175

Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners

look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject

outlines is called chromatic aberration. And image distortion due to lens

characteristics is called distortion. These lens aberrations and light

falloff can be corrected. By default, Peripheral illumination and

Chromatic aberration correction are set to [

Enable

], and Distortion

correction is set to [

Disable

If [

Correction data not available

] is displayed, see “Lens Correction

Data” on page 177.

Select [Lens aberration

correction].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Lens

aberration correction

], then press

Select the setting.



Check that [

Correction data

available

] is displayed for the

attached lens.



Select [

Peripheral illumin.

], then

press <



Select [

Enable

], then press <

Take the picture.



The image will be recorded with the

peripheral illumination corrected.

Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

Peripheral Illumination Correction

Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.



The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction amount

that can be applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.512).

The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.

In Basic Zone modes, the peripheral illumination correction and

chromatic aberration correction will be applied automatically. Distortion

correction will not be applied.

Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

176

Select the setting.



Check that [

Correction data

available

] is displayed for the

attached lens.



Select [

Chromatic aberration

], then

press <



Select [

Enable

], then press <

Take the picture.



The image will be recorded with the

chromatic aberration corrected.

Select the setting.



Check that [

Correction data

available

] is displayed for the

attached lens.



Select [

Distortion correction

], then

press <



Select [

Enable

], then press <

Take the picture.



The image will be recorded with the

distortion corrected.

Chromatic Aberration Correction

Distortion Correction

177

Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

The camera already contains data for lens peripheral illumination

correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction for

approx. 30 lenses. If you select [

Enable

], the peripheral illumination

correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction will

be applied automatically for any lens whose correction data is

registered in the camera.

With EOS Utility (EOS software), you can check which lenses have their

correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the

correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS

Utility Instruction Manual.

For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to

Lens Correction Data

When distortion correction is enabled, the camera records an image

range narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (Image

periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution slightly lowered.)

Distortion correction will be reflected in the captured image, but not in the

viewfinder or Live View image during shooting.

If you set [Distortion correction] to [Enable], the maximum burst

(p.145) during continuous shooting will decrease.

Distortion will not be corrected if you shoot a movie or set the HDR

mode, multiple exposures, or Multi Shot Noise Reduction.

Using distortion correction during Live View shooting will slightly affect

the angle of view.

AF point display information (p.352) and Dust Delete Data (p.405) will

not be appended to images recorded with distortion correction applied.

Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

178

Cautions for Lens Correction

Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and

distortion correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.

When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is

recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.

If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral

illumination correction will not be reflected in the image displayed on the

screen.

The correction amount will be less if the lens used does not have

distance information.

Notes for Lens Correction

If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image after

shooting and check it again.

Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size

Converter is attached.

If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the

camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to

[Disable].

179

If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source

such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker

and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous

shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors

across the images may result. When you use this feature during

viewfinder shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light

source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker causes less

effect on exposure or color tone.

Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Anti-

flicker shoot.

], then press <

Select [Enable].

Take the picture.



The image will be taken with reduced

unevenness of exposure or color tone

caused by the flicker.

3 Reducing FlickerN

When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the

shutter-release time lag may become longer. Also, the continuous

shooting speed may become slower, and the shooting interval may

become irregular.

This function does not work with Live View shooting or movie shooting.



In the <

> or <

> mode, if the shutter speed changes during continuous

shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at different shutter

speeds, the color tone may be inconsistent. To avoid inconsistent color

tones, use the <

> or <

> mode at a fixed shutter speed.

The color tone of images shot when [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to

[Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set.

Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.

Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during

continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.

Reducing Flicker

180

If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in

the image, flicker may not be properly detected.

Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to

reduce the effects of the flicker even when <G> is displayed in the

viewfinder.

Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.

If you recompose a shot, <G> may appear and disappear

intermittently.

Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, expected result

may not be obtained even if you use this function.

Taking test shots in advance is recommended.

If <G> is not displayed in the viewfinder, under [52: Viewfinder

display], set [Flicker detection] to [Show] (p.74). When the camera

reduces the effects of the flicker when you shoot, <G> will light

up. Under a light source which does not flicker, or if no flicker is detected,

<G> will not be displayed.

If [Flicker detection] is set to [Show] and [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to

[Disable], metering under a flickering light source will cause <G>

to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting [Enable] before shooting

is recommended.

In Basic Zone modes, <G> will not be displayed, but the effects of

flicker will be reduced when you shoot.

Anti-flicker shooting also works with flash. However, the expected result

may not be obtained during wireless flash shooting.

181

The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this

camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or

Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.

In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.

Select [Color space].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Color

space

], then press <

Set the desired color space.



Select [

sRGB

] or [

Adobe

RGB

], then

press <

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other

industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar

with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File

System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a

sRGB computer environment and with printers not compliant to Design

rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Post-processing

of the image with computer software will therefore be required.

3 Setting the Color SpaceN

Adobe RGB

If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the

first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.

The ICC profile is not appended. For explanations about the ICC profile,

refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.

182

You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images

are to be saved.

This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for

saving captured images.

Select [Select folder].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Select

folder

], then press <

Select [Create folder].

Select [OK].



A new folder with the folder number

increased by one is created.

3 Creating and Selecting a Folder

Creating a Folder

183

Creating and Selecting a Folder



Select a folder on the folder selection

screen, then press <



The folder where the captured

images will be saved is selected.



Subsequent captured images will be

recorded into the selected folder.

Selecting a Folder

Number of images in folder

Folder name

Lowest file number

Highest file number

Folders

As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits

(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can

contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder

becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is

created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.185) is executed, a new

folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can

be created.

Creating Folders with a Computer

With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open

the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and

organize your images. The folder name must follow the format

“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.

The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case

letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be

used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit

folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the last

five characters in each name are different.

184

The image files will be numbered from

0001 to 9999 in the order the images are

taken, then saved in a folder. You can

change how the file number is assigned.

Select [File numbering].



Under the [

] tab, select [

File

numbering

], then press <

Select the file numbering method.



Select the desired setting, then press

Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is

replaced or a new folder is created.

Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file

numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you

want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on

multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on a computer.

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images

recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue

from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the

folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended

that you use a newly formatted card each time.

3 File Numbering Methods

(Example)

IMG_0001.JPG

File number

Continuous

File numbering after

replacing the card

Next sequential file number

File numbering after

creating a folder

Card-1 Card-2

0051 0052

Card-1

100 101

0051 0052

185

File Numbering Methods

Restarts the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is

replaced or a new folder is created.

When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering restarts

from 0001 for the new images saved. This is useful if you want to

organize images by cards or folders.

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images

recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue

from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the

folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from

0001, use a newly formatted card each time.

Resets the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number 0001

in a new folder.

When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created

automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder

starts from 0001.

This is useful, for example, when you want to use different folders for

the images taken yesterday and the ones taken today.

Auto Reset

Manual Reset

File numbering after

replacing the card

File numbering is reset

File numbering after

creating a folder

Card-1

0051

Card-2

0001 0051

100

0001

101

Card-1

If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible

even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a

message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.

For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie

file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG

images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “.MOV” or “.MP4” for movies.

186

When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image

as Exif information.

Select [Copyright information].



Under the [

] tab, select [

information

], then press <

Select the option to be set.



Select [

Enter author’s name

] or

[

Enter copyright details

], then press

Enter text.



Press the <

> button to toggle

between the top and bottom entry

areas.



Press the <

> <

> or <

> <

keys to move the

frame and select

the desired character. Then press

> to enter it.



By selecting [

] and pressing

>, you can change the input

mode.



You can enter up to 63 characters.



To delete a character, press the <

button.



To cancel the text entry, press the

> button, then select [

3 Setting Copyright InformationN

Tex t pa le tt e

187

Setting Copyright Information

Exit the setting.



After entering the text, press the

> button, then select [



The information will be saved and the

screen will return to step 2.

When you select [

Display copyright

info.

] in step 2, you can check the

[

Author

] and [

] information

that you entered.

When you select [

Delete copyright information

] in step 2, you can

delete the [

Author

] and [

] information.

Checking the Copyright Information

Deleting the Copyright Information

If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed

entirely when you select [Display copyright info.].

You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS

software, p.512).

188

189

Advanced Operations

In Creative Zone modes, you

can change various settings of

the camera as you desire to

obtain a wide variety of

shooting results, by selecting

the shutter speed and/or

aperture, adjusting the

exposure as you prefer, etc.



The

icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that

the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (



After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the

exposure settings will remain displayed in the viewfinder

and on the LCD panel for approx. 4 sec. (

) by the

metering timer function.



For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page

460.

Set the <R> switch downward.

190

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit

the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.

*<d> stands for Program.

* AE stands for Auto Exposure.

Set the Mode Dial to <d>.

Focus on the subject.



Look through the viewfinder and aim

the AF point over the subject. Then

press the shutter button halfway.



When focus is achieved, the focus

indicator <

> on the viewfinder’s

bottom right will light up (when in

One-Shot AF mode).



The shutter speed and aperture will

be set automatically and displayed in

the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

Check the display.



The standard exposure will be

obtained as long as the shutter speed

and aperture display do not blink.

Take the picture.



Compose the shot and press the

shutter button completely.

d: Program AE

191

: Program AE

If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number

blink, it indicates underexposure.

Increase the ISO speed or use flash.

If the “8000” shutter speed and the highest f/number

blink, it indicates overexposure.

Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold

separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the

lens.

Differences Between <

> and <

> Modes

In the <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering

mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can

set are limited. With <d> mode, only the shutter speed and aperture are set

automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering mode, and

other functions (p.460).

Program Shift

In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and

aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while

maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.

To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the

<6> dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.

Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer

(0) ends (exposure setting display turns off).

Program shift cannot be used with flash.

192

In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically

sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the

brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster

shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower

shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of

motion.

* <s> stands for Time value.

Set the Mode Dial to <s>.

Set the desired shutter speed.



While looking at the LCD panel, turn

the <

> dial.

Focus on the subject.



Press the shutter button halfway.



The aperture is set automatically.

Check the viewfinder display and

shoot.



As long as the aperture is not

blinking, the standard exposure will

be obtained.

s: Shutter-Priority AE

Blurred motion

(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)

Frozen motion

(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)

193

: Shutter-Priority AE

If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until

the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.

If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until

the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.

Shutter Speed Display

The shutter speeds from “8000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the

fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec., “0"5”

indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.

194

In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the

shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching

the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher

f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and

background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower

f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and

background fall within acceptable focus.

* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).

Set the Mode Dial to <f>.

Set the desired aperture.



While looking at the LCD panel, turn

the <

> dial.

Focus on the subject.



Press the shutter button halfway.



The shutter speed is set automatically.

Check the viewfinder display and

shoot.



As long as the shutter speed is not

blinking, the standard exposure will

be obtained.

f: Aperture-Priority AE

Sharp foreground and background

(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

Blurred background

(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)

195

: Aperture-Priority AE

The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when

the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.

Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the

LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.

Press the depth-of-field preview button

to stop down the lens to the current

aperture setting, and check the depth of

field (range of acceptable focus).

Depth-of-Field PreviewN

If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates

underexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a faster aperture

(lower f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or

set a higher ISO speed.

If the “8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates

overexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a slower aperture (higher

f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a

lower ISO speed.

Aperture Value Display

The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The

f/number displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to

the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.

A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall

within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.

The depth-of-field effect can be clearly seen on the Live View image as

you change the aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button

(p.256).

The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview

button is being pressed.

196

In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To

determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the

viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This

method is called manual exposure.

* <a> stands for Manual.

Set the Mode Dial to <a>.

Set the ISO speed

(p.148)

Set the shutter speed and aperture.



To set the shutter speed, turn the

> dial.



To set the aperture, turn the <

> dial.



If it cannot be set, set the <

switch downward, then turn the

> or <

> dial.

Focus on the subject.



Press the shutter button halfway.



The exposure setting will be displayed

in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.



Check the exposure level mark <

to see how far the current exposure

level is from the standard exposure

level.

Set the exposure and take the

picture.



Check the exposure level indicator

and set the desired shutter speed and

aperture.



If the exposure level exceeds ±3

stops from the standard exposure,

the end of the exposure level

indicator will display <

> or <

a: Manual Exposure

Exposure level mark

Standard exposure index

197

: Manual Exposure

If the ISO speed is set to

(AUTO) for manual exposure shooting, you

can set exposure compensation (p.200) as follows:

•[

2: Expo.comp./AEB

]

• Under [

C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls

] with [

: Expo comp

(hold btn, turn

)

] (p.438).

• Quick Control (p.56)

Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto

If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter

speed and aperture in order to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore,

you may not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the

exposure compensation.

If flash is used when ISO Auto is set, exposure compensation will not be

applied even if an exposure compensation amount is set.

Under [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark [X] for

[Disabled in M or B modes] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be

set even in the <a> mode (p.169).

When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO

speed.

If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the

exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared with

when the <A> button was pressed.

If exposure compensation (p.200) was applied in <d>, <s>, or <f>

mode, and then the shooting mode is switched to <a> with ISO Auto

set, the exposure compensation amount already set will still be

maintained.

With ISO Auto set and [8C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments] set to

[1: 1/2-stop], 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be applied with the

ISO speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter speed

displayed will not change.

198

You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.

In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically. (In the

> and <

> modes, center-weighted average metering is

set.)

Press the <D> button

(

)

Select the metering mode.



While looking at the LCD panel, turn

the <

> or <

> dial.

:Evaluative metering

:Partial metering

:Spot metering

:Center-weighted average

metering

q Evaluative metering

General-purpose metering mode suited even

for backlit subjects. The camera adjusts the

exposure automatically to suit the scene.

w Partial metering

Effective where there are much brighter lights

around the subject due to backlight, etc. Partial

metering covers approx. 6.0% of the viewfinder

area at the center.

r Spot metering

Effective when metering a specific part of the

subject or scene. Spot metering covers approx.

3.8% of the viewfinder area at the center.

q Selecting the Metering ModeN

199

Selecting the Metering Mode

e Center-weighted average metering

The metering is averaged for the entire scene

with the viewfinder center weighted more

heavily.

With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when you

press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. In the w (Partial

metering), r (Spot metering), and e (Center-weighted average metering)

modes, the exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the

shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure.)

200

Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken

(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.

Exposure compensation can be set in the <

>, <

>, and <

> shooting

modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops* in

1/3-stop increments, the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and

on the LCD panel can only display the setting up to ±3 stops. If you want to set

the exposure compensation setting beyond ±3 stops, use the Quick Control

(p.56) or follow the instructions for [

2: Expo.comp./AEB

] on the next page.

If the <

> mode and the ISO Auto are both set, see page 197 to set the

exposure compensation.

* During Live View shooting, exposure compensation can be set up to ±3 stops.

Check the exposure.



Press the shutter button halfway

(

) and check the exposure level

indicator.

Set the exposure compensation amount.



While looking in the viewfinder or at

the LCD panel, turn the <

> dial.



If it cannot be set, set the <

switch downward, then turn the <

dial.



If you set exposure compensation,

> will be displayed in the

viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

Take the picture.



To cancel the exposure compensation, set

the exposure compensation amount back

to <

O Setting Exposure CompensationN

Increased exposure

for a brighter image

Decreased exposure

for a darker image

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.169) is set to any setting other than

[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure

compensation for a darker image is set.

The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you

set the power switch to <2>.

After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can prevent the

exposure compensation amount from changing accidentally by setting

the <R> switch upward.

If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the

exposure level indicator will display or <J>.

201

By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera

brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three

successive shots. This is called AEB.

* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.

Select [Expo.comp./AEB].



Under the [

] tab, select

[

Expo.comp./AEB

], then press

Set the AEB range.



Turn the <

> dial to set the AEB

range. Press the <

> <

> keys to

set the exposure compensation

amount.



Press <

> to set it.



When you exit the menu, the AEB

range will be displayed on the LCD

panel.

Take the picture.



Three bracketed shots will be taken

according to the drive mode set in this

sequence: Standard exposure,

decreased exposure, and increased

exposure.



AEB will not be automatically

canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step

2 to turn off the AEB range display.

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N

AEB range

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

202

During AEB, <A> in the viewfinder and AEB range will blink.

If the drive mode is set to or , press the shutter button three

times for each shot. When <o>, , or <M> is set and you hold

down the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be

taken continuously and the camera will automatically stop shooting.

When <Q> or <k> is set, the three bracketed shots will be taken

continuously after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.

You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.

If the AEB range exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level

indicator will display or <J>.

AEB cannot be used with flash, bulb exposures, or when [Multi Shot

Noise Reduction], [HDR Mode], or a Creative filter is set.

AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to

<2> or when the flash is ready to fire.

203

You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from

the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at

the same exposure setting. Press the <

> button to lock the exposure,

then recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is

effective for shooting backlit subjects, etc.

Focus on the subject.



Press the shutter button halfway.



The exposure setting will be displayed.

Press the <A> button

(

)



The <

> icon lights up in the

viewfinder to indicate that the

exposure setting is locked (AE lock).



Each time you press the <

> button,

the current exposure setting is locked.

Recompose and take the picture.



If you want to take more pictures

while maintaining the AE lock, keep

holding down the <

> button and

press the shutter button to take

another picture.

* When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied to the

center AF point.

A AE LockN

AE Lock Effects

Metering Mode

(p.198)

AF Point Selection (p.120-122)

Automatic Selection Manual Selection

*AE lock is applied at the AF

point that achieved focus.

AE lock is applied at the

selected AF point.

wre AE lock is applied to the center AF point.

AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.

204

In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the

shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter

button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night

scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long

exposures.

Set the Mode Dial to <F>.

Set the desired aperture.



While looking at the LCD panel, turn

the <

> or <

> dial.

Take the picture.



The exposure will continue for as long

as you keep the shutter button

pressed completely.



The elapsed exposure time will be

displayed on the LCD panel.

F: Bulb Exposures

Elapsed exposure time

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

Long exposures produce more noise than usual.

If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400 (p.150).

For a bulb exposure, if you use both the self-timer and mirror lockup

instead of the bulb timer, keep pressing the shutter button completely

(self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter

button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release

sound, but no picture will be taken. If you use the bulb timer under the

same shooting conditions, you need not keep holding down the shutter

button completely.

205

: Bulb Exposures

You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. With the bulb timer,

you need not keep holding down the shutter button during the bulb

exposure. This reduces camera vibration blur.

The bulb timer can be set only in the <

> (Bulb) shooting mode. It

cannot be set (or will not function) in any other shooting mode.

Select [Bulb timer].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Bulb

timer

], then press <

Select [Enable].



Select [

Enable

], then press the

> button.

p Bulb TimerN

With [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise

generated during long exposures (p.172).

For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended.

Using mirror lockup (p.219) with bulb exposures is also possible.

You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-60E3

(sold separately, p.221).

You can also use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.221) for

bulb exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button,

the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button

again to stop the bulb exposure.

: Bulb Exposures

206

Set the desired exposure time.



Select the hour, minute, or second.



Press <

> so <

> is displayed.



Set the desired number, then press

>. (Returns to <

>.)

Select [OK].



The set time will be displayed on the

menu screen.



When you exit the menu, <

will be displayed on the LCD panel.

Take the picture.



Press the shutter button completely,

and the bulb exposure will start and

continue until the set time elapses.



To cancel the timer setting, set

[

Disable

] in step 2.

Bulb timer

Elapsed exposure time

If you press the shutter button completely and then let go while the bulb

timer is operating, the bulb exposure will stop.

Doing any of the following will cancel the bulb timer (reverts to

[Disable]): Set the power switch to <2>, switch to movie shooting, or

change to a shooting mode other than <F>.

207

Clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced for a high dynamic

range of tones even with high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is

effective for landscape and still-life shots.

With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard

exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured

continuously for each shot and then merged together

automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.

* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.

Select [HDR Mode].



Under the [

] tab, select [

HDR

Mode

], then press <



The HDR mode screen will appear.

Set [Adjust dyn range].



Select the desired dynamic range

setting, then press <



Selecting [

Auto

] will have the

dynamic range set automatically

depending on the image’s overall

tonal range.



The higher the number, the wider the

dynamic range will be.



To exit HDR shooting, select [

Disable

HDR

Set [Effect].



Select the desired effect, then press

HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

208



Natural

For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and

shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and

shadows will be reduced.



Art standard

While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than

with [

Natural

], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to

have the picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have

bright (or dark) edges.



Art vivid

The colors are more saturated than with [

Art standard

], and the low

contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.



Art bold

The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and

the picture look like an oil painting.



Art embossed

The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are

decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and

old. The subject outlines will have bolder bright (or dark) edges.

Effects

Art standard Art vivid Art bold

Art embossed

Saturation Standard High Higher Low

Bold outline Standard Weak Strong Stronger

Brightness Standard Standard Standard Dark

Tone Flat Flat Flat Flatter

Each effect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style

currently set (p.154).

209

: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

Set [Continuous HDR].



Select either [

1 shot only

] or [

Every

shot

], then press <



With [

1 shot only

], HDR shooting will

be canceled automatically after the

shooting ends.



With [

Every shot

], HDR shooting

continues until the setting in step 3 is

set to [

Disable HDR

Set [Auto Image Align].



For handheld shooting, select

[

Enable

]. When using a tripod, select

[

Disable

], then press <

Take the picture.



HDR shooting is possible with

viewfinder shooting and Live View

shooting.



When you press the shutter button

completely, three consecutive images

will be captured, and the HDR image

will be recorded to the card.

w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN

210

You cannot select RAW or RAW+JPEG. The HDR mode cannot be set if

RAW or RAW+JPEG is set.

The HDR mode cannot be set when AEB, WB bracketing, Multi Shot

Noise Reduction, or multiple exposures are set, or during bulb exposures

and movie shooting.

HDR shooting is not possible with ISO expansion (H). HDR shooting is

possible within ISO 100 - ISO 16000.

The flash will not fire during HDR shooting.



During HDR shooting, the settings of [

Distortion correction

], [

Auto Lighting Optimizer

], and [

3: Highlight tone priority

] will be

automatically switched to [

Disable

If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave

afterimages.

In HDR shooting, 3 images are captured with different shutter speeds set

automatically. Therefore, even in <s> and <a> shooting modes, the

shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you set.

To prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.

You can display <z> in the viewfinder when HDR mode is set (p.425).

During Live View Shooting

Magnified view is not possible.

The Live View image displayed with the effect applied will not look

exactly the same as the actual image.

211

: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],

AF point display information (p.352) and Dust Delete Data (p.405) will

not be appended to the image.

If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to

[Enable], image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be

slightly lowered. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to

camera shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that

when shooting with excessively bright (or dark) exposure settings, auto

image alignment may not work properly.

If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to

[Disable], the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR effect

may be minimal. Using a tripod is recommended.

Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.

The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced

correctly. Irregular exposure, irregular colors, or noise may appear.

HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural

color reproduction of the illuminated areas.

With HDR shooting, it takes some time to record images to the card

since they are merged after shooting. During the processing of the

images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel,

and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.

If you change the shooting mode or switch to movie shooting after setting

HDR shooting, HDR shooting setting may be cleared ([Adjust dyn

range] setting may be switched to [Disable HDR]).

212

You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. With

Live View shooting (p.255), you can see in real time how the exposures

are merged when you shoot multiple-exposure images.

Select [Multiple exposure].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Multiple

exposure

], then press <

Set [Multiple exposure].



Select [

Enable

], then press <



To exit shooting multiple exposures,

select [

Disable

Set [Multi-expos ctrl].



Select the desired multiple-exposure

control method, then press <



Additive

The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively.

Based on the [

No. of exposures

], set a negative exposure

compensation. Refer to the basic guide below to set the exposure

compensation amount.

Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures

Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:

-2 stops

P Multiple ExposuresN

The noise, irregular colors, banding, etc. of the image displayed during

shooting with [Additive] set may be different from the final multiple-

exposure image recorded.

213

Multiple Exposures



Average

Based on the [

No. of exposures

], negative exposure compensation

is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot

multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s

background will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard

exposure.

Set the [No. of exposures].



Set the number of exposures, then

press <



You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.

Set [Continue Mult-exp].



Select either [

1 shot only

] or

[

Continuously

], then press <



With [

1 shot only

], multiple-exposure

shooting will be canceled

automatically after the shooting ends.



With [

Continuously

], multiple-

exposure shooting continues until the

setting in step 2 is set to [

Disable

Take the first exposure.



The captured image will be displayed.



The <

> icon will blink.



You can check the remaining

exposures in the brackets [ ] in the

viewfinder or on the screen.



Pressing the <

> button enables

you to view the captured image

(p.217).

Remaining number of

exposures

Multiple Exposures

214

Shoot subsequent exposures.



The merged multiple-exposure image

will be displayed.



With Live View shooting, the multiple-

exposure images merged so far will

be displayed. By pressing the

> button, you can display only

the Live View image.



Multiple-exposure shooting will end

when the set number of exposures

are taken. With continuous shooting,

if you keep holding down the shutter

button, the shooting continues until

the set numbers of exposures are

taken.

215

Multiple Exposures

During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed will

decrease greatly.

Only the merged multiple-exposure image will be saved. The images

taken in steps 6 and 7 for the multiple-exposure image will not be saved.

The image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed

noise reduction and color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will

also be set for the subsequent exposures.

You cannot set an aspect ratio for multiple-exposure shooting. Images

will be taken with a 3:2 aspect ratio.

If WB bracketing, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, HDR mode, or a Creative

filter is set, multiple-exposure shooting cannot be set.

During multiple-exposure shooting, the settings of [z1: Lens

aberration correction], [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3:

Highlight tone priority] will be automatically switched to [Disable].

If [z3: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for

shooting.

With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more

noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be. Also, as noise

increases with higher ISO speeds, shooting at low ISO speeds is

recommended.

If [Additive] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple

exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up longer.)

If you perform Live View shooting with [Additive] set, the Live View

function will stop automatically when the multiple-exposure shooting

ends.

In step 7, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image

displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final

multiple-exposure image recorded.

Multiple-exposure shooting will be canceled if the power switch is set to

<2> or if you switch to movie shooting.

If you switch the shooting mode to a Basic Zone mode, <w>, or <x>

during shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.

If you connect the camera to a computer, multiple-exposure shooting will

not be possible. If you connect the camera to a computer during

shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.

You can press the <x> button to view the multiple exposures taken so far

or delete the last single exposure (p.217).

Multiple Exposures

216

You can select a

image recorded on the card as the first single

exposure. The image data of the selected

image will remain intact.

You can only select

images.

You cannot select

JPEG images.

Select [Select image for multi. expo.].



The images on the card will be

displayed.

Select the first image.



Turn the <

> dial to select the

image to be used as the first single

exposure, then press <



Select [



The file number of the selected image

will be displayed at the bottom of the

screen.

Take the picture.



When you select the first image, the number of remaining

exposures as set with [

No. of exposures

] will decrease by 1.

For example, if [

No. of exposures

] is 3, you can shoot two

exposures.

Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card



Images shot with [

3: Highlight tone priority

] set to [

Enable

] and

images whose [

4: Aspect ratio

] is set to any setting other than [

3:2

]

(p.146) cannot be selected as the first single exposure.



[

Disable

] will be applied for [

1: Lens aberration correction

] and

[

2: Auto Lighting Optimizer

] regardless of the settings of the

image selected as the first single exposure.



The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, color

space, etc. set for the first

image will also be applied for the

subsequent images.



If [

3: Picture Style

] is [

Auto

] for the RAW image selected as the first

image, [

Standard

] will be applied for shooting.



You cannot select an image taken with another camera.



You can also select a

multiple-exposure image as the first single exposure.



If you select [

Deselect img

], the selected image will be canceled.

217

Multiple Exposures

Before you finish shooting the set

number of exposures, you can press the

> button to check the current

exposure level, overlap alignment, and

overall effect of the merged multiple-

exposure image.

If you press the <

> button, the

operations possible during multiple-

exposure shooting will be displayed.

Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting

Operation Description

q Undo last image Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another image).

The number of remaining exposures will increase by 1.

W Save and exit The images shot so far will be merged and saved as a

multiple-exposure image.

r Exit without saving Multiple-exposure shooting will exit without saving the

images shot.

2 Return to previous

screen

The screen before you pressed the <L> button will

reappear.

During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multiple-exposure

images.

Multiple Exposures

218



Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality?

All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If

is set, the merged multiple-exposure image will be a

image.



Can I merge images recorded on the card?

With [

Select image for multi. expo.

], you can select the first single

exposure from the images recorded on the card (p.216). Note that

you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.



Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting?

You can shoot multiple exposures with Live View shooting (p.255).



Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure

shooting?

As long as [

2: Auto power off

] is set to any setting other than

[

Disable

], the timing for auto power off to automatically take effect

will all become after approx. 30 min. of idle time. If the auto power off

takes effect, multiple-exposure shooting will end, and multiple-

exposure settings will be canceled.

Before starting the multiple-exposure shooting, the auto power off

will take effect at the time set with the camera, and multiple-

exposure settings will be canceled.

FAQ

Image-Recording Quality Setting Merged Multiple-Exposure Image

JPEG JPEG

1 1

41/61 1

1+JPEG 1+JPEG

41/61+JPEG 1+JPEG

219

Camera vibrations caused by the mirror’s reflex action when the picture

is taken is called “mirror shock”. Mirror lockup keeps the mirror up

before and during exposure to reduce blur caused by camera

vibrations. Useful when shooting close-ups (macro photography), using

a super telephoto lens, and shooting at slow shutter speeds.

Set [Mirror lockup] to [Enable].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Mirror

lockup

], then press <



Select [

Enable

], then press <

Focus on the subject, then press

the shutter button completely.



The mirror will swing up.

Press the shutter button

completely again.



The picture is taken and the mirror

goes back down.

2 Mirror LockupN



Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an

intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the

camera’s internal components.



In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day, take

the picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.



If you use the self-timer and bulb exposure in combination with a mirror

lockup, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay time +

bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the self-timer

countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no picture will be taken.



During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu operations, etc. are

disabled.

Using the Eyepiece Cover

220

Even if the drive mode is set to continuous shooting, only one shot can

be taken.

You can also use the self-timer with mirror lockup.

If approx. 30 sec. elapse after the mirror is locked up, it will go back down

automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the

mirror again.

When shooting with mirror lockup, using a tripod and Remote Switch

RS-60E3 (sold separately, p.221) is recommended.

You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.221) with mirror

lockup. Setting the remote controller to a 2-sec. delay is recommended.

Using the Eyepiece Cover

When you take a picture without looking through the viewfinder, such as

when you use the self-timer, bulb exposure, or a remote switch, stray

light entering the viewfinder can cause the picture to look dark. To

prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.33) attached to the camera

strap.

During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the eyepiece

cover is unnecessary.

Detach the eyecup.



Push the bottom of the eyecup to

detach it.

Attach the eyepiece cover.



Slide the eyepiece cover down into

the eyepiece groove to attach it.



After you finish shooting, detach the

eyepiece cover and attach the

eyecup.

221

You can connect Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) to the

camera and shoot (p.468).

For detailed instructions, refer to the remote switch’s instruction

manual.

Open the terminal cover.

Connect the plug to the remote

control terminal.

F Using a Remote Switch

R Remote Control Shooting

With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately), you

can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet

away from the camera. You can either shoot

immediately or with a 2-sec. delay.

You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 and RC-5

(sold separately).

Focus on the subject.

Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <MF>.



You can also shoot with <

Press the <R> button

(

)

Remote Control Shooting

222

Select the self-timer.



Look at the LCD panel and turn the

> dial to select <

> or <

Press the remote controller’s

transmit button.



Point the remote controller toward the

camera’s remote control sensor, and

press the transmit button.



The self-timer lamp lights up and the

picture is taken.

Remote

control

sensor

Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by

triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from

such light sources.

If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and

operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter

inadvertently.

If flash light is emitted from a flash on another camera around this

camera, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter

inadvertently. Do not expose the remote control sensor to flash light from

a flash on another camera.

Remote control shooting is also possible with an EX-series Speedlite

equipped with a remote-release function.

223

With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and the number

of shots. The camera will take a series of single shots at the set interval

until the set number of shots are taken.

Select [Interval timer].



Under the [

] tab (the [

] tab in

Basic Zone modes), select [

Interval

timer

], then press <

Select [Enable].



Select [

Enable

], then press the

> button.

Set the shooting interval and

number of shots.



Select the number to be set (hours:

minutes: seconds / number of shots).



Press <

> so <

> is displayed.



Set the desired number, then press

>. (Returns to <

>.)



Interval

Settable from [

00:00:01

] to [

99:59:59



No. of shots

Settable from [

] to [

]. If you set [

], the camera will keep

shooting until you stop the interval timer.

p Interval Timer Shooting

Interval Timer Shooting

224

Select [OK].



The interval timer settings will be

displayed on the menu screen.



When you exit the menu, <

will be displayed on the LCD panel.

Take the picture.



After taking the first shot, subsequent

shots will be taken according to the

interval timer settings.



During interval timer shooting,

> will blink.



After the set number of shots are

taken, the interval timer shooting will

stop and be automatically canceled.

Interval No. of shots

Interval timer

Using a tripod is recommended.

Taking test shots is recommended.

After the interval timer shooting starts, you can still press the shutter

button completely to take a picture as usual. However, from 5 sec. before

the next interval timer shooting, the shooting function settings, menu

operation, image playback, and other operations will be suspended and

the camera will return to shooting-ready state.

If a picture is being taken or an image is being processed when the next

shot is scheduled on the interval timer, the shot set for that time will be

skipped. The camera will thereby shoot fewer shots than the number set

for interval timer shooting.

Auto power off operates with the interval timer. The power will

automatically turn on approx. 1 min. before the next shot.

Interval timer shooting can be combined with AEB, WB bracketing,

multiple exposures, and HDR mode.

You can stop the interval timer shooting by selecting [Disable] or turning

the power switch to <2>.

225

Interval Timer Shooting

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

If the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, the camera will not shoot

when focus is not achieved. Setting it to <MF> and focusing manually is

recommended.

Live View shooting, movie shooting, or bulb exposures cannot be

performed with interval timer.

If the shooting time is long, using DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately)

and AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) is recommended.

If a shutter speed longer than the shooting interval is set, such as a long

exposure, the camera cannot shoot with the set interval. The camera will

thereby shoot fewer shots than the number set for interval timer

shooting. Also, the number of shots may decrease when the shutter

speed and the shooting interval are nearly the same.

If the image recording time on the card is longer than the set shooting

interval due to card performance or shooting settings, etc., the camera

may not shoot with the set shooting interval.

If you use flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than

the flash’s recycling time. If the interval is too short, the flash may not

fire.

If the shooting interval is too short, the camera may not take a picture or

may capture an image without autofocusing.

Interval timer shooting will be canceled and reset to [Disable] if you do

any of the following: Set the power switch to <2>, display the Live

View or movie shooting screen, set the shooting mode to <F> or <w/

x>, or use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.512).

After interval timer shooting starts, you cannot use remote control

shooting (p.221) or remote-release shooting with an EOS-dedicated,

external Speedlite.

If your eye will not remain on the viewfinder eyepiece during interval

timer shooting, attach the eyepiece cover (p.220). If stray light enters the

viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.

226

227

Flash Photography

This chapter explains how to shoot with built-in flash

and external Speedlites (EX-series, sold separately),

how to set flash settings on the camera’s menu screen,

and how to use the built-in flash for wireless flash

shooting.

Flash cannot be used with movie shooting. It will not fire.

AEB cannot be used with flash.

228

In Creative Zone modes, just press the

> button to raise the built-in flash for

flash photography.

Before shooting, check that [

] is

displayed in the viewfinder. After shooting,

push the built-in flash back down with your

fingers until it clicks into place.

In Basic Zone modes, depending on the shooting mode, you can set the

built-in flash with Quick Control (p.107).

The table below shows the shutter speed and aperture settings that will

be used with flash.

D Using the Built-in Flash

Shooting Mode Shutter Speed Aperture

dAutomatically set (1/250 sec. - 1/60 sec.) Automatically set

sManually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.) Automatically set

fAutomatically set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.) Manually set

aManually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.) Manually set

Exposure continues while you hold down

the shutter button or while the bulb timer is

operating.

Manually set

Flash Photography in the <f> Mode

To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set automatically

(autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture. The shutter speed

will be set automatically between 1/250 sec. - 30 sec. to suit the scene’s

brightness.

In low light, the main subject is exposed with the auto flash metering, and

the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically. Both

the subject and background look properly exposed with a touch of

atmosphere (automatic slow-speed flash sync). If you are handholding the

camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is

recommended.

To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash

sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)]

(p.236).

229

Using the Built-in Flash

Effective Range of Built-in Flash

(Approx. in meters / feet)

* When a high ISO speed is set and focusing distance is long, appropriate

exposure may not be obtained depending on the subject conditions, etc.

ISO Speed

(p.

148

)

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM

Wide Angle Telephoto

f/3.5 f/5.6

ISO 100 1 - 3.4 / 3.3 - 11.2 1 - 2.1 / 3.3 - 6.9

ISO 400 1 - 6.9 / 3.3 - 22.6 1 - 4.3 / 3.3 - 14.1

ISO 1600 1.7 - 13.7 / 5.6 - 44.9 1.1 - 8.6 / 3.6 - 28.2

ISO 6400 3.4 - 27.4 / 11.2 - 89.9 2.1 - 17.1 / 6.9 - 56.1

Detach any lens hood when shooting with the built-in flash.

If a lens hood is attached or if the subject is too close, the built-in flash

will be obstructed and the bottom of the captured image may look dark.

Do not perform flash photography when the built-in flash is held down

with your finger or not fully raised for some other reason.

If you use a super telephoto lens or large-aperture lens and the bottom of

the picture looks dark, using an external Speedlite (sold separately, p.233) is

recommended.

Using the Built-in Flash

230

Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can

reduce red eye.

Select [Red-eye reduc.].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Red-eye

reduc.

], then press <

Select [Enable].



For flash photography, when you

press the shutter button halfway, the

red-eye reduction lamp will be

emitted.

Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject

does not come out as desired. You can set the flash exposure

compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

Press the <Q> button

(7)



The Quick Control screen will appear.

3 Red-eye Reduction

y Flash Exposure CompensationN

The red-eye reduction feature is more effective when the subject looks at

the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are

close to the subject.

When you press the shutter button halfway, the scale

display on the bottom of the viewfinder will shrink and

turn off. For best results, take the picture after this

scale display turns off.

The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the

individual subject.

231

Using the Built-in Flash

Select [y].



Press the <

> <

> or <

> <

keys to select [

*], then press



The flash exposure compensation

setting screen will appear.

Set the flash exposure

compensation amount.



To make the flash exposure brighter,

turn the <

> or <

> dial to the

right (increased exposure).

To make it darker, turn the <

> or

> dial to the left (decreased

exposure).



When you press the shutter button

halfway, the <

> icon will appear in

the viewfinder.



After taking the picture, follow steps 1

to 3 and set the flash exposure

compensation amount to 0.

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.169) is set to any setting other than

[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased flash

exposure compensation is set.

If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite (sold

separately, p.233), you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with

the camera. If it is set with both the camera and external Speedlite, the

Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.

The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you

set the power switch to <2>.

You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash

settings] in [z1: Flash control] (p.235).

The camera can also be used to set the external Speedlite’s flash

exposure compensation in the same way as with the built-in flash.

Using the Built-in Flash

232

FE (flash exposure) lock obtains and locks the appropriate flash

exposure for the desired part of the image.

Press the <D> button.



The built-in flash will be raised.



Press the shutter button halfway and

look in the viewfinder to check that

the <

> icon is lit.

Focus on the subject.

Press the <A> button

(

)



Aim the viewfinder center over the

subject where you want to lock the flash

exposure, then press the <

> button.



The flash will fire a preflash and the

required flash output is calculated

and retained in memory.



In the viewfinder, “

FEL

” is displayed

for a moment and <

> will light up.



Each time you press the <

> button,

a preflash is fired and the required

flash output is calculated and retained

in memory.

Take the picture.



Compose the shot and press the

shutter button completely.



The flash is fired, and the picture is

taken.

A FE LockN



If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash,

the <

> icon will blink. Move closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.

FE lock is not possible during Live View shooting.

233

Using an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash

photography easy.

For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s

instruction manual.

This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all

the features of EX-series Speedlites.

To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera’s

menu, see pages 235-243.



Flash exposure compensation

Set it with Quick Control (p.56) or [

External flash func. setting

]

under [

1: Flash control

] (p.240). With Quick Control, you can set

flash exposure compensation in the same way as for the built-in

flash. See page 230.



FE lock

Set this in the same way as for the built-in flash. See steps 2 to 4 on

page 232.

D Using an External Speedlite

EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites

Macro LitesShoe-mount Speedlites

If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated, external

Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam as necessary.

Using an External Speedlite

234



With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL

autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.

Set the camera’s shooting mode to <

> (manual exposure) or

> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before

shooting.



When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the

manual flash mode.

Sync Speed

The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at

1/250 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, be sure to

test the flash synchronization before shooting with the sync speed set

within approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec. The flash duration of such units is

longer than that of compact flash units and varies depending on the

model.

Cautions for Live View Shooting

If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [

Silent LV shoot.

] to [

Disable

] (p.272). The flash will not fire if it is set to

[

Mode 1

] or [

Mode 2

Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series

Non-Canon Flash Units

If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to

another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and

malfunction may result.

Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may

not fire.

235

With the built-in flash or an EX-series, external Speedlite compatible

with flash function settings, you can use the camera’s menu screen to

set flash functions and the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions.

you use an external Speedlite, attach the Speedlite to the camera

and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions.

For details on the external Speedlite’s flash functions, refer to the

Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Select [Flash control].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Flash

control

], then press <



The Flash control screen will appear.

Select the desired item.



Select the menu option to be set, then

press <

To enable flash photography, set

[

Enable

]. To enable only the AF-assist

beam to be emitted, set [

Disable

For normal flash exposures, set it to

[

Evaluative

]. If [

Average

] is set, the

flash exposure will be averaged for the

entire metered scene. Depending on the

scene, flash exposure compensation

may be necessary. This setting is for

advanced users.

3 Setting the FlashN

Flash Firing

E-TTL II Metering

Setting the Flash

236

You can set the flash-sync speed for

flash photography in the aperture-priority

AE <

> mode.

4

: Auto

The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/250

sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is

also possible.

6

: 1/250-1/60 sec. auto

Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.

It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.

However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,

the background may come out dark.

7

: 1/250 sec. (fixed)

The flash-sync speed is fixed at 1/250 sec. This more effectively

prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [

1/250-1/60sec.

auto

]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out

darker than with [

1/250-1/60sec. auto

Flash Synchronization Speed in Av Mode

If [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is not

possible in the <f> mode with the external Speedlite.

237

Setting the Flash

When you use the built-in flash or an

external, EX-series Speedlite compatible

with flash function settings, you can

press the <

> button to directly display

the [

Built-in flash settings

] or [

External

flash func. setting

] screen without first

displaying the menu screen.



With built-in flash

Press the <D> button twice.



Press the button to raise the built-in

flash.



Press the button again to display the

[

Built-in flash settings

] screen.



If [

Flash firing

] is set to [

Disable

], the

[

1: Flash control

] screen will

appear (p.235).



With external Speedlite

Press the <D> button.



With the external Speedlite turned on,

press the <

> button to display the

[

External flash func. setting

]

screen.

Displaying the Flash Function Setting Screen Directly

When you press the <D> button to display the flash function setting screen,

you cannot set [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], [Flash sync. speed in Av

mode], or [External flash C.Fn setting]. Set these functions with [z1:

Flash control] instead.

Setting the Flash

238



Flash mode

Normally, set this to [

E-TTL II

]. This

enables autoexposure shooting with the

built-in flash.

To set the flash output level manually,

select [

Manual flash

Select [

flash output

], then set the

flash output level to within 1/1 - 1/128

(1/3-stop increments) before shooting.



Shutter synchronization

Normally, set this to [

1st curtain

] so that

the flash fires immediately after the

exposure starts.

If [

2nd curtain

] is set, the flash will fire right before the shutter closes.

When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can create a trail

of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel.

When second-curtain synchronization is set together with [

E-TTL II

], the

flash will be fired twice in a row: once when you press the shutter button

completely and once right before the end of the exposure.

Built-in Flash Settings

When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25

sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain

synchronization will be applied automatically even if [2nd curtain] is set.

239

Setting the Flash

2

Flash exposure compensation

The same setting as step 3 in “Flash

Exposure Compensation” on page 230

can be set.



Wireless functions

With wireless flash photography (via

optical transmission), you can use the

built-in flash to wirelessly control external

Speedlites.

For details, see “Wireless Flash

Photography” on page 244.

Setting the Flash

240

The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the

external Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom

Function settings, etc.

For the functions compatible with your Speedlite (sold separately), refer

to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Sample display



Flash mode

You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.

[

E-TTL II

] is the standard mode of

EX-series Speedlites for automatic flash

shooting.

[

Manual flash

] is for setting the

Speedlite’s [

Flash output level

]

yourself.

Regarding other flash modes, refer to the

instruction manual of a Speedlite

compatible with the functions.

External Flash Function Settings

Flash mode Flash zoom

(Flash coverage)

Flash exposure

compensation

Wireless functions/

Flash ratio control

Shutter

synchronization

Flash exposure

bracketing

241

Setting the Flash



Wireless functions / Flash ratio control

Wireless (multiple) flash shooting is

possible with radio or optical

transmission.

For details on wireless flash, refer to the

instruction manual of a Speedlite

compatible with wireless flash shooting.

With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.)

compatible with flash function settings,

you can set the flash ratio between flash

tubes or flash heads A and B, or perform

wireless flash with additional slave units.

For details on flash ratio control, refer to

the macro flash’s instruction manual.



Flash zoom (Flash coverage)

With Speedlites having a zooming flash

head, you can set the flash coverage.

Normally, set this to [

AUTO

] so that the

camera will automatically set the flash

coverage to match the lens focal length.



Shutter synchronization

Normally, set this to [

First-curtain

synchronization

] so that the flash fires

immediately after the exposure starts.

If [

Second-curtain synchronization

] is set, the flash will fire right before

the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you

can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night with a more

natural feel. When second-curtain synchronization is set together with [

E-

TTL II

], the flash will be fired twice in a row: once when you press the

shutter button completely and once right before the end of the exposure.

If [

High-speed synchronization

] is set, the flash can be used at all

shutter speeds. This is useful when you want to shoot with background

blur (open aperture) in locations such as outdoors in daylight.

Setting the Flash

242



Flash exposure compensation

The same setting as step 3 in “Flash

Exposure Compensation” on page 230

can be set.

For details, refer to the Speedlite’s

instruction manual.



Flash exposure bracketing

While the flash output is changed

automatically, three shots are taken.

For details, refer to the instruction

manual of a Speedlite compatible with

flash exposure bracketing.

When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25

sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain

synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain

synchronization] is set.

With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings,

you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and

[Flash exposure compensation] under [External flash func. setting].

([Shutter synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series

Speedlites.)

If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite, you

cannot set the flash exposure compensation with the camera (Quick

Control or External flash function settings). If it is set with both the

camera and external Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the

camera’s.

243

Setting the Flash

For details on the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the

Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Select [External flash C.Fn

setting].

Set the desired function.



Select the number, then press <



Select the setting, then press <

Select [Clear settings].

Select the settings to be cleared.



Select [

Clear built-in flash set.

[

Clear external flash set.

], or [

Clear

ext. flash C.Fn set.

], then press



When you select [

], the respective

flash settings or all the Custom

Function settings will be cleared.

External Speedlite Custom Function Settings

Clear Settings

With an EX-series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always fire at full output if the

[

Flash metering mode

] in Flash Custom Function is set to [

TTL

] (autoflash).

The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled on the

camera’s [Flash control] screen. Set it with the Speedlite.

244

The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit for Canon EX-

series, external Speedlites having a wireless slave feature. It can

wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire via optical transmission.

Be sure to read the instructions and cautions about wireless flash

photography (optical transmission) in the Speedlite’s instruction

manual.

Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and

set it as follows. The settings other than the ones below for the slave

unit’s control are all set with the camera. Different types of Speedlite

slave units can be used and controlled together.

(1) Set the external Speedlite as a slave unit.

(2) Set the Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same channel

as set on the camera.

(3) For flash ratio control, set the slave unit’s firing group.

(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown

below.

(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.

Wireless Flash PhotographyN

Slave Unit Settings and Position

Example of Wireless Flash Set-up

Indoors

Outdoors

Approx. 10 m/32.8 ft.

Approx. 7 m/23.0 ft.

Approx. 80°

Approx. 5 m/

16.4 ft.

Approx. 7 m/

23.0 ft.

245

Wireless Flash Photography

*1: If the slave Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function,

the flash can work regardless of the camera’s channel setting.

*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not

face the camera. The camera’s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and

be received by the slave unit. When using an EX-series Speedlite with fixed

light-emitting unit (flash head) and wireless sensor, take pictures while making

sure it can fire.



Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off

To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the camera’s <

button. If you are using manual flash firing, press the slave unit’s test

firing button to cancel the auto power off.

The camera’s master function cannot be used for wireless flash photography

with radio transmission.

Wireless Flash Photography

246

The tables below show the possible configurations for wireless flash

shooting. Select the configuration suiting the subject, shooting

conditions, the number of external Speedlites you use, etc.

Wireless Flash Photography Configurations

External Speedlite

Built-in

Flash Page

Setting

Quantity

A:B

Flash

Ratio

Wireless

Functions

Firing

Group

Fully

Automatic

(E-TTL II

autoflash)

Single - - p.247 01 All

Single -Used p.249 0:3-

Multiple - - p.250 01 All

Multiple Set - p.251 01(A:B)

Multiple -Used p.252 0+31 All and 2

Multiple Set Used 0+31(A:B)2

•

Flash exposure compensation

p.253

• FE lock

External Speedlite

Built-in

Flash Page

Setting

Quantity

A:B

Flash

Ratio

Wireless

Functions

Firing

Group

Manual

Flash

Single/

Multiple --

p.254

01 All

Multiple Set -01(A:B)

Single/

Multiple -Used 0+31 All and 2

Multiple Set Used 0+31(A:B)2

Even if you disable the built-in flash from firing, it will still fire in order

to control the slave unit via optical transmission. The flash fired to

control the slave unit may therefore appear in the picture depending on the

shooting conditions.

247

Wireless Flash Photography

This shows the most basic setup for

fully-automatic wireless flash shooting

with one external Speedlite.

Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all

wireless flash shooting. Therefore,

these steps are omitted in other

wireless flash setups explained on

the pages hereafter.

On the menu screens, the <

> and

> icons indicate the external

Speedlite, and the <

> and <

icons indicate the built-in flash.

Press the button to raise the

built-in flash.



For wireless flash shooting, be sure

to raise the built-in flash.

Select [Flash control].



Under the [

] tab, select

[Flash

control

Select [Built-in flash settings].

Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite

Wireless Flash Photography

248

Set [Flash mode: E-TTL II].

Set [Wireless func.] to [0].

Set [Channel].



Set the transmission channel (1-4) to

the same one as the slave unit.

Set [Firing group] to [1All].

Take the picture.



Set the camera and take the picture

in the same way as with normal flash

shooting.



To terminate wireless flash shooting,

set [

Wireless func.

] to [

Disable

Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.

Firing a test flash is not possible with the slave unit.

249

Wireless Flash Photography

This is fully automatic wireless flash

shooting with one external Speedlite and

the built-in flash.

You can change the flash ratio between

the external Speedlite and built-in flash

to adjust how the shadows cast on the

subject.

Set [Wireless func.] to [0:3].



In step 5 on page 248, set [

Wireless

func.

] to [

Set the desired flash ratio and

take the picture.



Select [

] and set the flash ratio

within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio

to the right of 1:1 is not possible.

Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and Built-in Flash

If the built-in flash output is not enough, set a higher ISO speed (p.148).

The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop

increments).

Wireless Flash Photography

250

Multiple Speedlite slave units can be fired as one flash unit or separated

into slave groups for shooting with flash ratio control.

The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [

Firing group

]

setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple

Speedlites.

Basic settings:

Flash mode : E-TTL II

Wireless func. :

Channel :

(Same as slave units)



[

All] Firing multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit

Effective when you need a large flash

output. All the slave units will fire at the

same output and be controlled to obtain

a standard exposure.

No matter which firing group (A, B, or C)

the slave units belong to, they will all fire

as one group.

Set [Firing group] to [1All].

Take the picture.

Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites

251

Wireless Flash Photography



[

(A:B)] Firing multiple slave units in multiple groups

You can divide the slave units into

groups A and B, and change the flash

ratio to obtain the desired lighting effect.

Refer to the Speedlite’s instruction

manual and set one slave unit to firing

group A and the other to firing group B.

Position the Speedlites as shown in the

illustration.

Set [Firing group] to [1(A:B)].

Set the A:B flash ratio and shoot.



Select [

A:B

fire ratio

] and set the

flash ratio.

A B

If [Firing group] is set to [1 (A:B)], group C will not fire.

The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2-

stop increments) for the exposure level.

Wireless Flash Photography

252

The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained

on pages 250-251.

The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [

Firing group

]

setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple

Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.

Basic settings:

Flash mode : E-TTL II

Wireless func. :

Channel :

(Same as slave units)

Set [Firing group].



Select [

All and

] or

[

(A:B)



With [

(A:B)

], set the A:B flash

ratio and shoot.

Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and Multiple External Speedlites

A B

[

All and

][

(A:B)

]

253

Wireless Flash Photography



Flash exposure compensation

When [

Flash mode

] is set to [

E-TTL II

], flash exposure compensation

can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below) that

can be set vary depending on the [

Wireless func.

] and [

Firing group

]

settings.

Flash exposure compensation



The set amount of flash exposure

compensation will be applied to the

built-in flash and all the external

Speedlites.

2 exp. comp.



Flash exposure compensation is

applied only to the built-in flash.

1 exp. comp.



The set amount of flash exposure

compensation will be applied to all

the external Speedlites.



FE lock

If [

Flash mode

] is set to [

E-TTL II

], you can press the <

> button to

perform FE lock (p.232).

Creative Wireless Flash Shooting

Wireless Flash Photography

254

When [

Flash mode

] is set to [

Manual flash

], flash exposure can be set

manually. The flash output settings that can be set ([

flash output

[

Group A

output

], etc.) vary depending on the [

Wireless func.

] setting

(see below).

Wireless func.: 0



Firing group:

All

The manual flash output setting is

applied to all the external Speedlites.



Firing group:

(A:B)

You can set the flash output

separately for slave groups A and B.

Wireless func.: 0+3



Firing group:

All and

The flash output can be set

separately for the external

Speedlite(s) and built-in flash.



Firing group:

(A:B)

You can set the flash output

separately for slave groups A and B.

You can also set the flash output for

the built-in flash.

Setting the Flash Output Manually for Wireless Flash Shooting

255

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

(Live View Shooting)

You can shoot while viewing the

image on the camera’s LCD

monitor. This is called “Live View

shooting”.

Live View shooting is enabled by

setting the Live View shooting/

Movie shooting switch to <A>.



If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the

LCD monitor, camera shake may cause blurred images.

Using a tripod is recommended.

Remote Live View Shooting

With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.512) installed on your computer,

you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely

while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the EOS

Utility Instruction Manual.

256

Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <A>.

Display the Live View image.



Press the <

> button.



The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.



The Live View image will be displayed

in the brightness level closely

matching that of the actual image to

be captured.

Focus on the subject.



When you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus with

the current AF method (p.276).



You can also tap on the screen to

select the face or subject (p.286).

Take the picture.



Press the shutter button completely.



The picture is taken and the captured

image is displayed on the LCD monitor.



When the playback display ends, the

camera will return to Live View

shooting automatically.



Press the <

> button to exit the

Live View shooting.

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with the image-recording

quality set to JPEG 73).

In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the

depth-of-field preview button.

You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.221) for Live

View shooting.

257

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Set [

5: Live View shoot.

] (the [

]

tab in Basic Zone modes) to [

Enable

Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting

(Approx. number of shots)

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N and

CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, continuous Live View shooting is

possible for approx. 2 hr. 30 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F).

Enabling Live View Shooting

Temperature Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

Low Temperatures

(0°C / 32°F)

No Flash 340 310

50% Flash Use 300 270

In the <8: x> mode, Live View shooting is not possible.

In the <8: FG> modes and <v: ABCD> modes, the

shooting range will be smaller.

When the flash is recycling, “BUSY” is displayed on the LCD monitor,

and you cannot view the subject. Also, the continuous shooting speed

will decrease.

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

General Live View Shooting Cautions are on pages 290-291.

You can also focus by pressing the button.



When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot will

be taken. Also, the time it takes to capture an image after you press the

shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder shooting.

If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn

off automatically after the time set in [52: Auto power off] (p.66). If [52:

Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end

automatically after approx. 30 min. (camera power remains on).



With the HDMI cable HTC-100, you can display the Live View image on a TV

set (p.373). Note that no sound will be output. If the picture does not appear

on the TV screen, check if the [

53: Video system

] is correctly set to [

For

NTSC

] or [

For PAL

] (depending on the video system of your TV set).

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

258



Each time you press the <

> button, the information display will

change.

Information Display

ISO speed

Possible shots/Seconds remaining on self-timer

Exposure level indicator/AEB range

Flash-ready/Flash off

Shutter speed

Battery level

Exposure simulation

Drive mode

Wireless signal strength/

Eye-Fi card transmission status

AF method

•

+ Tracking

•

: FlexiZone - Multi

•

: FlexiZone - Single

AEB/FEB

Highlight tone priority

Histogram

Image-recording

quality

Touch shutter

Wi-Fi function

Picture Style

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

HDR shooting/Multiple exposures/Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Electronic level

Maximum burst/Number of remaining multiple exposures

Metering mode

Flash exposure compensation

AE lock

Creative filters

Quick Control

GPS connection indicator

Magnified view

Switch to auto

selection (AF point)

White balance

Aperture

Shooting mode/

Scene icon

AF operation

AF point (FlexiZone - Single)

Digital compass

You can edit what to display when the button is pressed (p.262).

259

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

The histogram can be displayed by pressing the button when

[z5: Expo. simulation: Enable] (p.271) is set. However, the histogram

is not displayed while pressing the shutter button completely.

You can display the electronic level by pressing the button

(p.72). Note that if the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or the camera

is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot

be displayed.

When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image

is displayed at the brightness level closely matching that of the actual

image captured.

If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at

a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low-or

bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect

the exposure setting. Note that noise may be more noticeable than the

actual image recorded.

When the <8: FG> mode is set, shooting with flash in Basic Zone

modes, or [Expo. simulation: Enable] in Creative Zone modes is set

and Multi Shot Noise Reduction, HDR mode, bulb exposure, or flash is

used, exposure simulation will not be performed (p.271). <g> icon

and histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be displayed on

the LCD monitor at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be

properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.

Exposure simulation is not performed in <v: ABCD> modes.

<g> icon will be displayed in gray. The histogram will not be

displayed.

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.

Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same

body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature

contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation

problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot

places.

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

260

In the <

> shooting mode, the camera will detect the scene type and

set all the settings automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene

type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. For certain scenes or

shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF

method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is

detected.

*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension

Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.

*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:

The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on

a tripod.

Scene Icons

Subject Portrait

Non-Portrait

Background

Color

Background

Movement Nature and

Outdoor Scene Movement

Bright

Gray

Backlit

Blue Sky

Included Light blue

Backlit

Sunset

*3 *3

Orange

Spotlight

Dark blue

Dark

With

Tripod

*4*5 *3 *4*5 *3

261

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:

• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II • EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II

• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM • EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM • EF600mm f/4L IS II USM

• Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.

*4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow

down.

Final image simulation is a function that shows the Live View image as

it will look with the current settings for Picture Style, white balance, and

other shooting functions applied.

During shooting, the Live View image will automatically reflect the

function settings listed below. However, it may be slightly different from

the resulting image.

Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting



Picture Style

* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be

reflected.



White balance



White balance correction



Ambience-based shots



Lighting/scene based shots



Background blur (in <

> mode)

* You can check the effect only during the setting procedure (when

[Simulating blur] is displayed).



Color tone (in <

> mode)



Metering mode



Exposure (with [

5: Expo. simulation: Enable

] set)



Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)



Auto Lighting Optimizer



Peripheral illumination correction



Chromatic aberration correction



Highlight tone priority



Aspect ratio (shooting range confirmation)

Final Image Simulation

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

262

You can change what is displayed when the <

> button is pressed

during Live View shooting or movie shooting.

Select [zbutton LV display

options].



Under the [

] tab, select

[

button LV display options

then press <



Live View info switch setting

Select [Live View info switch

setting].

Select a number.



The numbers represent the number of

times to press the <

> button.



Select a number for the displayed

content you want to change, then

press the <

> button.



You can also remove the [

] mark

from a number. However, you cannot

remove the [

] mark for all the

numbers.

The default settings are shown below.

B Button Display Options

1234

IBasic shooting info kkk -

JDetailed shooting info -k k -

KOn-screen buttons kkk -

LHistogram - - k-

MElectronic level - - k-

263

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Edit the options.



Select what you want to display and

press <

> to add a checkmark [



For what you do not want to display,

press <

> to remove the checkmark

[



After completing the settings, select

[



Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary.



Histogram display

• Brightness/RGB

You can switch the histogram display between [

Brightness

] and

[

RGB

] (p.352).

Set with [

Brightness/RGB

] in

[

Histogram disp

• Display size

You can change the display size of the histogram.

Set with [

Display size

] in [

Histogram

disp



Reset

To revert to the default settings (p.262),

select [

Reset

], then select [

264

When the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <

>, <

>, or <

> button, the setting screen will appear on the

LCD monitor and you can turn the <

> or <

> dial to set the

respective shooting function.

Shooting Function Settings

f / R / i / DSettings

With Live View shooting, you cannot set or <M> for the drive

mode. In addition, the continuous shooting settings set with viewfinder

shooting will not be maintained with Live View shooting.

When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a circle

indicating the metering area will be displayed at the center of the screen.

265

Shooting Function Settings

In Creative Zone modes, you can set the following:

AF method

, AF

operation,

Drive mode

, Metering mode,

Image quality

, White balance,

Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, and Creative filters.

In Basic Zone modes, you can set the functions shown in the table on page

107 (except background blur) as well as the functions in bold above.

Press the <Q> button

(7)



The settable functions will be

displayed.

Select a function and set it.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select a function.



The settings of the selected function and Feature guide (p.75)

will appear.



Press the <

> <

> keys to set the function.



In the <

> and <

> modes, select the shooting mode

option on the upper left of the screen, then press <

> to select

the shooting mode.



To set Auto white balance, select [

], then press <



To set the RAW image quality, WB correction/WB bracketing,

Picture Style parameters, or Creative filter effects, press the

> button.



Press <

> to return to Live View shooting.



You can also select [

] to return to Live View shooting.

Q Quick Control

With

[

Servo AF

]

(p.275), the image quality can be set to 1 or JPEG. If

41 or 61 is set, the image will be recorded in 1 quality.

266

While viewing the Live View image, you can apply one of seven filter

effects (Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect, Water

painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect) for shooting.

The camera saves only the image with the Creative filter applied. You

can also take a picture without a Creative filter, then apply an effect

afterward and save it as a new image (p.399).

Turn the Mode Dial to a Creative

Zone mode.

Press the <Q> button

(7)



The Quick Control screen will appear.

Select [x].



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[

] (Creative filter) on the right side

of the screen.

Select a filter.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select a

filter (p.268).



The image will be displayed with the

effects of the filter applied.



For the Miniature effect, press the

> <

> keys to move the white

frame to where you want the image to

look sharp.

U Applying Creative FiltersN

267

Applying Creative Filters

Adjust the filter effect.



Press the <

> button (except for



Press the <

> <

> keys to adjust

the filter effect, then press <

Take the picture.



The image is shot with the filter effct

applied.

When you set a Creative filter, single shooting will take effect even if the

drive mode is set to <o> or .

You cannot shoot with Creative filters if the recording quality is RAW or

RAW+JPEG, or if AEB, white balance bracketing, or Multi Shot Noise

Reduction is set.

The histogram is not displayed when you shoot with Creative filters.

Applying Creative Filters

268

G

Grainy B/W

Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the black-

and-white effect by adjusting the contrast.

W

Soft focus

Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness

by adjusting the blur.

X

Fish-eye effect

Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type

distortion.

Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along

the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter expands

the center part of the image, the resolution at the center may

decrease depending on the number of recorded pixels. Check the

image on the screen when setting this filter. The AF method will be

FlexiZone - Single (fixed at center).

Y

Art bold effect

Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more

three-dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note

that subjects such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered

with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or noise will become

more noticeable.

Z

Water painting effect

Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You

can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that

some scenes including night scenes or low-light scenes may not be

rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or noise

will become more noticeable.

Creative Filter Characteristics

269

Applying Creative Filters

H

Toy camera effect

Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a unique color tone that

makes it look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the

color cast by adjusting the color tone.

c

Miniature effect

Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks

sharp. In step 4, if you press the <

> button (or tap [

] on the

screen), you can switch between the white frame’s vertical and

horizontal orientations. The AF method will be FlexiZone - Single to

focus at the center of the white frame.

With Grainy B/W, the grainy effect displayed on the LCD monitor will look

different from the grainy effect recorded in the picture.

With the Soft focus and Miniature effect, the blurred effect displayed on

the LCD monitor may look different from the blurred effect recorded in

the picture. You can check the picture’s blurred effect by pressing the

depth-of-field preview button.

270

When the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch is set to <

>, menu

options exclusive to the Live View

shooting will appear under the [

] and

[

] tabs (the [

] tab in Basic Zone

modes).

The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View

shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting (settings are

disabled).



Live View shooting

You can set Live View shooting to [

Enable

] or [

Disable



AF method

You can select [

+Tracking

], [

FlexiZone - Multi

], or [

FlexiZone -

Single

]. See pages 276-285 for more about the AF method.



Touch shutter

Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take

the picture automatically. For details, see page 286.



Grid display

With [

3x3

] or [

6x4

], you can display grid lines to help you

level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [

3x3+diag

the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you

compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the

subject.

3 Menu Function Settings

271

Menu Function Settings



Exposure simulation

Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness

(exposure) of the actual image will look.

•Enable (

)

The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual

brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure

compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.

• During

(

)

Normally, the image is displayed at the standard brightness to

make the Live View image easy to see (

). The image will be

displayed with a brightness (exposure) close to that of the actual

image to be captured only while you hold down the depth-of-field

preview button (

• Disable (

)

The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the

Live View image easy to see. Even if you set exposure

compensation, the image is displayed at the standard brightness.

Menu Function Settings

272

z6 N



Silent LV shooting

•Mode 1

When shooting, you can suppress the mechanical sound more

than with viewfinder shooting. Continuous shooting is also

possible. If <

> is set, you can shoot at a maximum continuous

shooting speed of approx. 7.0 fps.

•Mode 2

When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will

be taken. While you are holding down the shutter button, the

camera operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the

shutter button’s halfway position, the camera operation will resume.

The shooting noise is thereby minimized. Even if continuous

shooting is set, only a single shot will be taken.

• Disable

Be sure to set it to [

Disable

] if you use a TS-E lens (other than

those listed in )

for shifting or tilting the lens

or if you use an

Extension Tube. If [

Mode 1

] or [

Mode 2

] is set, the standard

exposure may not be obtained, or an irregular exposure may result.

Between [Mode 1] and [Disable], the internal operation alone is different

between the single drive mode and the first shot during continuous

shooting. Continuous shooting with [Mode 1] will have the same

mechanical sound as the [Disable] setting for the second and

subsequent shots.

When shooting with flash, the [Disable] setting will be applied regardless

of the [Silent LV shoot.] setting. (You cannot suppress the mechanical

sound when shooting.)

When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not

fire if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].

If [Mode 2] is set and you use a Remote Controller (p.221), the operation

will be the same as with [Mode 1].

273

Menu Function Settings



Metering timer

You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock

time).

With the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L II lens, you can use [Mode 1]

or [Mode 2].

Selecting any of the following menu items will stop Live View shooting. To

start Live View shooting again, press the <0> button.

•[z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54: Clear all camera

settings], or [54: z firmware ver.].

274

You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting

conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation

is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.

Press the <f> button.

Select the AF operation.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the desired AF operation, then press

: One-Shot AF

: Servo AF

Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus only once.



When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper

will sound.



While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be

locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

Selecting the AF OperationN

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs, the

picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely.

Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or see “Shooting Conditions

that Make Focusing Difficult” (p.284).

If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is

achieved.

275

Selecting the AF Operation

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold

down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on

the subject continuously.



If the drive mode is set to high-speed continuous shooting, the

maximum speed will be approx. 5.0 fps. The pictures will be taken

with priority given to the continuous shooting speed.



If the drive mode is set to low-speed continuous shooting, the

maximum speed will be approx. 3.0 fps. The pictures will be taken

with priority given to subject tracking.



For flash photography, the continuous shooting speed will become

slower.



When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue. The beeper will

not sound in this case.



The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.



Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject, and the

subject’s speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct

focus.



If you operate the zoom during continuous shooting, the focus may

be lost. Shoot after using the zoom to obtain the desired

composition.

Servo AF for Moving Subjects

With

[

Servo AF

]

, the image quality can be set to 1 or JPEG. If 41

or 61 is set, the image will be recorded in 1 quality.

When [Servo AF] is set and Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, [High ISO

speed NR] will automatically switch to [Standard].

276

You can select an AF method to suit the shooting conditions and your

subject. The following AF methods are provided: [

(face)+Tracking

]

(p.277), [

FlexiZone - Multi

] (p.279), and [

FlexiZone - Single

] (p.281).

If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens’s focus mode switch to

>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.288).

Press the <f> button.

Select the AF method.



Turn the <

> dial to select the AF

method, then press <

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

Selecting the AF Method

You can also set the AF method with [z5: AF method] (the [z3] tab in

Basic Zone modes).

The procedures on pages 277-282 assume that One-Shot AF is set. If

Servo AF is set, the AF point will turn blue when focus is achieved. The

beeper will not sound in this case (p.274).

In the <8: 5C> modes, Servo AF is set automatically and when

focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue and the beeper will sound.

277

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the

AF point <

> also moves to track the face.

Display the Live View image.



Press the <

> button.



The Live View image

will appear

the LCD monitor.

Check the AF point.



When a face is detected, the area

frame and the <

> frame will appear

on the face for focusing.



If multiple faces are detected, <

will be displayed. Use the <

> to

move the <

> frame over the face

you want to focus on.



You can also tap on the LCD monitor

screen to select the face or subject. If

the subject is not a face, <

> will be

displayed.

Focus on the subject.



Press the shutter button halfway to focus.



If no faces can be detected or if you

do not tap on the LCD monitor, the

camera will switch to FlexiZone -

Multi with automatic selection (p.279).



When focus is achieved, the AF point will

turn green and the beeper will sound.



If focus is not achieved, the AF point

will turn orange.

Take the picture.



Check the focus and exposure, then

press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.256).

u(face)+Tracking:c

Area frame

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

278



Focusing on a subject other than a human face

Press <

> or <

> and the AF frame <

> will appear at the

screen’s center. Then use <

> to move the AF frame over the

desired subject. Once the AF frame <

> achieves focus, it will track

the subject even if the subject moves or if you change the

composition.

If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be

possible. Adjust the focus manually (p.288) so that the face can be

detected, then perform AF.

An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.

Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the

picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.

The may cover only a part of the face.

Use the area frame as a guide, and focus within the area frame.

The size of the AF frame changes depending on the subject.

279

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

You can use up to 35 AF points for wide-area focusing (automatic

selection). This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing

(zone selection).

Display the Live View image.



Press the <

> button.



The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

Select the AF point.O



Pressing <

> or the <

> button

will toggle between automatic

selection and zone selection. In Basic

Zone modes, automatic selection is

set automatically.



Use <

> to select the zone. To

return to the center zone, press <

or the <

> button again.



You can also tap on the LCD monitor

screen to select a zone. When a zone

is selected, tap [

] on the screen

to switch to automatic selection.

FlexiZone - Multi: o

Area frame

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

280

Focus on the subject.



Aim the AF point over the subject and

press the shutter button halfway.



When focus is achieved, the AF point

will turn green and the beeper will

sound.



If focus is not achieved, the area

frame will turn orange.

Take the picture.



Check the focus and exposure, then

press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.256).

If the camera does not focus on the desired target subject with automatic

AF point selection, select a zone or switch the AF method to [FlexiZone

- Single] and refocus.

The number of AF points varies, depending on the [z4: Aspect ratio]

setting. At [3:2], there are 35 AF points. At [4:3] and [1:1], there are 25

AF points. And at [16:9], 21 AF points. Also, at [16:9], there are three

zones.

For movie shooting, there are 21 AF points and three zones.

281

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you

want to focus on a particular subject.

Display the Live View image.



Press the <

> button.



The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.



The AF point < > will appear.



During movie shooting, if [

Movie

Servo AF

] is set to [

Enable

], the AF

point will be displayed in a larger size.

Move the AF point.



Use <

> to move the AF point to

where you want to focus. (It cannot

be moved to the edge of the screen.)



Pressing <

> or the <

> button

will return the AF point to the screen’s

center.



You can also tap on the LCD monitor

screen to move the AF point.

Focus on the subject.



Aim the AF point over the subject and

press the shutter button halfway.



When focus is achieved, the AF point

will turn green and the beeper will

sound.



If focus is not achieved, the AF point

will turn orange.

FlexiZone - Single: d

AF point

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

282

Take the picture.



Check the focus and exposure, then

press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.256).

283

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

AF Operation



Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway

will focus again.



The image brightness may change during and after the AF

operation.



Depending on the subject or shooting conditions, etc., focusing may

take longer or the continuous shooting speed may become slower.



If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,

the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,

exit Live View shooting and perform AF under the actual light source

under which you are shooting.



If [

+Tracking

] is set, magnified view is not possible.



When [

FlexiZone - Multi

] is set and you press the <

> button (or

tap <

> on the screen), the center of the selected zone (or image

center with automatic selection) will be magnified. If you press the

shutter button halfway, the display will return to normal and the

camera will focus.



When [

FlexiZone - Single

] is set and you press the <

> button (or

tap <

> on the screen), the area covered by the AF point will be

magnified. Press the shutter button halfway to focus in the magnified

view. This is effective when the camera is attached to a tripod and

you need to attain very precise focus. If focusing is difficult in

magnified view, return to the normal display and use AF. Note that

the AF speed differs between the normal and magnified views.



If you magnify the view after focusing with [

FlexiZone - Multi

] or

[

FlexiZone - Single

] in the normal view, precise focus may not be

achieved.



In Servo AF mode, when you press the shutter button halfway in the

magnified view, the display will return to normal and the camera will

focus.

Notes for AF

Magnified View

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

284

Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult



Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces

or when highlight or shadow details are lost.



Subjects in low light.



Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the

horizontal direction.



Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,

computer keyboards, etc.).



Fine lines and subject outlines.



Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps

changing.



Night scenes or points of light.



The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.



Extremely small subjects.



Subjects at the edge of the picture.



Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Cars with highly

reflective bodies, etc.).



The AF point covers both near and distant subjects (Example:

Animal in a cage, etc.).



Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still

due to camera shake or subject blur.



Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.



Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.



A special effect filter is used.



Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.

285

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

If focus is not achieved with the shooting conditions listed on the

preceding page, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus

manually.

Depending on the lens used, focusing may take longer or correct focus

may not be achieved. For details, refer to the Canon website.

If you shoot a peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus, aim the

center AF point or zone over the subject to focus, focus again and then

take the picture.

The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series

Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used, the LED

light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.

In magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to camera

shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

286

Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the

picture automatically. This works in all shooting modes.

Display the Live View image.



Press the <

> button.



The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

Enable the touch shutter.



Tap [

] on the screen’s bottom left.

Each time you tap on the icon, it will

toggle between [

] and [



[

] (Touch shutter: Enable)

You can tap on the spot to focus and

shoot.



[

] (Touch shutter: Disable)

You can tap on a spot to perform

focusing on where you want to focus.

Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

Tap on the screen to shoot.



Tap on the face or subject on the

screen.



On the point you tap, the camera will

focus with the AF method that was

set (p.276-282).



When focus is achieved, the AF point

turns green and the picture is taken

automatically.



If focus is not achieved, the AF point

turns orange and the picture cannot

be taken. Tap on the face or subject

on the screen again.

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter

287

Shooting with the Touch Shutter

Even if you set the drive mode to <o> or , the camera will still

shoot in single shooting mode.

When you tap on the screen, focusing will be performed with One-Shot

AF regardless of the [x: Touch shutter] or [AF operation] settings.

The touch shutter does not work with the magnified view.

If the Fish-eye effect Creative filter is set, the camera will focus using the

AF point at the center of the screen regardless of the point you tap on.

If the Miniature effect Creative filter is set, the touch shutter does not

work.

If [FlexiZone - Multi] and [y Touch shutter: Disable] are set with a

Basic Zone mode, focusing cannot be performed by tapping on the

screen.

When [V Shutter butt. half-press] is set to [Metering start] or [AE

lock (while button pressed)] under [8 C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls],

autofocusing does not take effect.

You can also set the touch shutter with [z5: Touch Shutter] (the [z3]

tab in Basic Zone modes).

To shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The first tap on the

screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the

exposure. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the

screen.

288

You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus.

Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <MF>.



Turn the lens focusing ring to focus

roughly.

Display the magnifying frame.



Press the <

> button.



The magnifying frame will appear.



You can also tap [

] on the screen to

magnify the image.

Move the magnifying frame.



Use <

> to move the magnifying

frame to the position where you want

to focus. You can also tap it to move

it.



Pressing <

> or <

> button will

return the magnifying frame to the

screen’s center.

Magnify the image.



Each time you press the <

> button,

the magnification of the image will

change in the following sequence:



While in magnified view, you can use

> or tap the directional wedges

displayed on the top, bottom, left, and

right of the screen to scroll around the

magnified image.

MF: Focusing Manually

Magnifying frame

AE lock

Magnified area position

Magnification (Approx.)

Normal view

10x

289

MF: Focusing Manually

Focus manually.



While looking at the magnified image,

turn the lens focusing ring to focus.



After achieving focus, press the <

button to return to the normal view.

Take the picture.



Check the exposure, then press the

shutter button completely to take the

picture (p.256).

In magnified view, the exposure is locked. (Shutter speed and aperture will

be displayed in red.)

290

General Live View Shooting Cautions

Image Quality

When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and

banding) may become noticeable.

Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in

the image.

If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the

camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may

deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.

If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is

high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a

few minutes before shooting again.

White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons

If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live

View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red

<E> icon will appear.

The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will

deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View

shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.

The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop

automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the

camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or

turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.

Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period

will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not

shooting, always turn off the camera.

If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot

with high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the

white <s> icon is displayed.

Shooting Results

In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in

red. If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come

out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.

Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image area for the

normal view will be captured.

291

General Live View Shooting Cautions

Live View Image

Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect

the brightness of the captured image.

Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed

Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image

recorded will have less noise. (The image quality of the Live View image

is different from that of the recorded image.)

If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen

may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume Live

View shooting under the actual light source.

If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live

View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness

level stabilizes before shooting.

If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may

appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image

will correctly show the bright area.

In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise

or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the

noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.

When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more

pronounced than in the actual image.

Custom Functions

During Live View shooting, certain Custom Function settings will not take

effect (p.411).

Lens and Flash

If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image

Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all

times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image

Stabilizer consumes battery power and may decrease the number of

possible shots depending on the shooting conditions. When the Image

Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is

recommended to set the IS switch to <2>.

The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when

using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode

released in and after the second half of 2011.

FE lock will not work if the built-in flash is used. FE lock and modeling

flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.

292

293

Shooting Movies

Movie shooting is enabled by

setting the Live View shooting/

Movie shooting switch to <k>.



For cards that can record movies, see page 5.



If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera

shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is

recommended in such cases.

Full HD 1080

Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-

Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning

lines).

294

Autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current

brightness.

Set the Mode Dial to a mode other

than <v> and <a>.

Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <k>.



The reflex mirror will make a sound,

then the image will appear on the

LCD monitor.

Focus on the subject.



Before shooting a movie, focus with

AF or manual focus (p.276-285, 288).



When you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus with

the current AF method.

Shoot the movie.



Press the <

> button to start

shooting a movie.



While the movie is being shot, the [

]

mark will be displayed on the upper

right of the screen.



Sound will be recorded by the built-in

microphones.



To stop shooting the movie, press the

> button again.

k Shooting Movies

Autoexposure Shooting

Recording movie

Microphones

295

Shooting Movies

In Basic Zone modes, the shooting result will be the same as with <A>.

Also, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed

on the upper left (p.297).

In the <s>, <f>, and <F> shooting modes, the settings will be the

same as when shooting in the <d> mode.

Settable menu functions differ between Basic Zone modes and Creative

Zone modes (p.477).

In Creative Zone modes, you can press the <A> button (p.203) to lock

the exposure (AE lock). After applying AE lock during movie shooting,

you can cancel it by pressing the <S> button. (AE lock setting is

retained until you press the <S> button.)

In Creative Zone modes, you can set the <R> switch downward

and turn the <5> dial to set the exposure compensation.

If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the ISO speed, shutter speed,

and aperture will not be recorded in the movie’s Exif information.

With autoexposure (modes other than a) movie shooting, the camera

will automatically turn on the Speedlite’s LED light under low-light

conditions. For details, refer to the instruction manual of an EX-series

Speedlite equipped with an LED light.

Shooting Movies

296

ISO Speed in Basic Zone Modes



The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 12800.

ISO Speed in the

, and

Modes



The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 12800.



In [

Range for movies

] under [

2: ISO speed settings

], if you set

[

Maximum

] to [

H(25600)

], the automatic setting range will be

expanded to H (equivalent to ISO 25600). Even if you set

[

Minimum

] to ISO 200 or higher and [

Maximum

] to ISO 3200 or

lower, the range will be set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 automatically

(p.332).



If [

3: Highlight tone priority

] is set to [

Enable

] (p.174), the ISO

speed will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800.



Under [

2: ISO speed settings

], [

Auto range

] and [

Min. shutter

spd.

] cannot be set (p.152-153) for movie shooting.

Since shooting a movie at ISO 16000 may result in much noise, it is

designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as “H”).

When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the

ISO speed settings before shooting movies.

297

Shooting Movies

During movie shooting in a Basic Zone mode (except the <

> mode),

an icon representing the scene detected by the camera will be

displayed, and the shooting will be performed to suit the scene. For

certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not

match the actual scene.

*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF

method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is

detected.

*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension

Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.

Scene Icons

Subject

Portrait

Non-Portrait

Background

Color

Background Nature and

Outdoor Scene Close

Bright

Gray

Backlit

Blue Sky Included

Light blue

Backlit

Sunset *3 *3 Orange

Spotlight

Dark blue

Dark

Shooting Movies

298

You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie

shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users.

Set the Mode Dial to <a>.

Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <k>.

Set the ISO speed.



Press the <

> button.



The ISO speed setting screen will

appear on the LCD monitor.



Turn the <

> dial to set the ISO

speed.



For details on the ISO speed, see the

next page.

Set the shutter speed and

aperture.



Press the shutter button halfway and

check the exposure level indicator.



To set the shutter speed, turn the <

dial. The settable shutter speeds vary

depending on the frame rate.

•

: 1/4000 sec. - 1/25 sec.

•

: 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.

•

: 1/4000 sec. - 1/50 sec.

•

: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.



To set the aperture, turn the <

> dial.



If it cannot be set, set the <

switch downward, then turn the

> or <

> dial.

Focus and shoot the movie.



The procedure is the same as steps 3

and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”

(p.294).

Manual Exposure Shooting

Shutter speed

Aperture

299

Shooting Movies

ISO Speed During Manual Exposure Shooting



With [

Auto

] (

), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO

100 - ISO 12800. In [

Range for movies

] under [

2: ISO speed

settings

], if you set [

Maximum

] to [

H(25600)

], the automatic setting

range will be expanded to H (equivalent to ISO 25600). Even if you

set [

Minimum

] to ISO 200 or higher and [

Maximum

] to ISO 3200 or

lower, the range will be set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 automatically

(p.332).



You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 12800 in

1/3-stop increments. In [

Range for movies

] under [

2: ISO speed

settings

], if you set [

Maximum

] to [

H(25600)

], the automatic setting

range will be expanded to H (equivalent to ISO 25600) (p.332).



If [

3: Highlight tone priority

] is set to [

Enable

] (p.174), the ISO

speed will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800.



Under [

2: ISO speed settings

], [

Auto range

] and [

Min. shutter

spd.

] (p.152-153) cannot be set for movie shooting.

Since shooting a movie at ISO 16000 may result in much noise, it is

designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as “H”).

When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the

ISO speed settings before shooting movies.

Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not

recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.

When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed within

approx. 1/30 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter

speed, the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.

If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED

lighting, image flicker may be recorded.

Under [8C.FnIII-4: Custom Controls], if [s: Expo comp (hold btn,

turn S)] is set (p.438), you can set exposure compensation while ISO

Auto is set.



When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <

> button to lock the ISO speed.

If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the

exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.300)

compared to when the <A> button is pressed.

By pressing the button, you can display the histogram.

Shooting Movies

300



Each time you press the <

> button, the information display will

change.

* Applies to a single movie clip.

Information Display

Picture Style

Quick Control

AF point (FlexiZone - Single)

Exposure level indicator

Aperture

Shutter speed

White balance

Movie shooting mode/

Scene icon

: Autoexposure

(Basic Zone

modes)

: Autoexposure

(Creative filters)

: Autoexposure

(Creative Zone

modes)

: Manual

exposure

: Time-lapse

movie

Movie recording size

AE lock

AF method

•

+ Tracking

•

: FlexiZone - Multi

•

: FlexiZone - Single

Battery level

Frame rate

ISO speed

Recording level:

Manual

Wireless signal strength/Eye-Fi

card transmission status

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Movie shooting remaining time* / Elapsed time

Wi-Fi function

Wind filter: Disable

Attenuator

Digital zoom

Video snapshot

Movie Servo AF

Digital compass

GPS connection

indicator

Magnify/Digital zoom

Exposure compensation

Headphone volume

Movie recording format

Creative filters

Highlight tone priority

Level meter

301

Shooting Movies

Final image simulation is a function that shows the movie as it will look

with the current settings for Picture Style, white balance and other

shooting functions applied.

During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically show the

effects of the settings listed below.

Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting



Picture Style

* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be

reflected.



White balance



White balance correction



Exposure



Depth of field (except during time-lapse movie shooting)



Auto Lighting Optimizer



Peripheral illumination correction



Chromatic aberration correction



Highlight tone priority



HDR movie



Creative filters

Final Image Simulation

You can display the electronic level by pressing the button

(p.72).

You can edit what to display when the button is pressed (p.262).

Note that if the AF method is set to [u +Tracking] or the camera is

connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.373), the electronic level

cannot be displayed.

The electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during

movie shooting. (The display will disappear when you start shooting a

movie.)

When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will

change to the elapsed time.

Shooting Movies

302

Still photo shooting is not possible during movie shooting.

shoot still photos, stop shooting the movie and perform viewfinder

shooting or Live View shooting.

Still Photo Shooting

Cautions for Movie Shooting

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

When you press the shutter button halfway to autofocus during movie

shooting, the following phenomena may occur.

• Focus may become far off momentarily.

• The brightness of the recorded movie may change.

• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.

• The movie may record the lens mechanical sound.

If <Q> or <Qw> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during

movie shooting, the white balance may also change.

If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may

flicker.

Shooting a few test movies is recommended where you will perform

zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie shooting may

result in recording of changes in exposure or mechanical sound of the

lens, or images may be out of focus.

During movie shooting, you cannot magnify the image even if you press

the button.



Be careful not to cover the built-in microphones (p.294) with your finger, etc.

If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting, the

movie shooting will end.

General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 343-344.

If necessary, also read General Live View Shooting Cautions on

pages 290-291.

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.

Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same

body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature

contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation

problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot

places.

303

Shooting Movies

Notes for Movie Shooting

Movie-related settings are under the [z4] and [z5] tabs (p.326). (In

Basic Zone modes, they are under the [z2] and [z3] tabs.)

A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size

exceeds 4 GB, a new file will be created for every subsequent 4 GB

(p.309).

The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie recording

size set to [1920x1080]).

You can also focus on the image by pressing the button.

Stereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphones.

Most external stereo microphones equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini

plug can be used.

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the total movie shooting time

will be as follows: approx. 1 hr. 50 min. at room temperature (23°C /

73°F) and approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at low temperatures (0°C / 32°F) (with

[z4: Movie Servo AF: Disable] set).

The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a

(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, released in

and after the second half of 2011.

304

If you press the <

> button while the image is displayed on the LCD

monitor, the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can

turn the <

> dial to set the AF method.



During manual exposure shooting (p.298), you can press the <

button to set the ISO speed.



> drive mode and <

> metering mode cannot be set.

Shooting Function Settings

f / i Settings

305

Shooting Function Settings

In Creative Zone modes, the

AF method

Movie recording size

Digital zoom

, Recording level (set manually only),

Volume

(headphones), White balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer,

Creative filters, and

Video snapshot

can be set.

In Basic Zone modes, only the functions in bold above can be set.

Press the <Q> button

(7)



The settable selected function will be

displayed.



[

HDR Movie Shooting

] is settable

only in Basic Zone modes (p.314).

Select a function and set it.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select a

function.



The settings of the selected function

and Feature guide (p.75) will appear

on the screen.



Press the <

> <

> keys to set the

function.



To set Auto white balance, select

[

], then press <



To set the WB correction, Picture

Style parameters, or Creative filters,

press the <

> button.



Pressing <

> will return the camera

to movie shooting.



You can also select [

] to return to

movie shooting.

Q Quick Control

306

With [

4: Movie rec quality

] (the [

]

tab in Basic Zone modes), you can set

the movie recording format, movie

recording size (image size, frame rate,

and compression method), and other

functions.

You can select the movie’s recording format.

MOV

The movie is recorded in the MOV

format (file extension: “.MOV”).

Convenient for editing with a computer.

MP4

The movie is recorded in the MP4 format (file extension: “.MP4”). This

format is compatible with a larger range of playback systems than the

MOV format.

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

MOV/MP4

307

Setting the Movie Recording Size

You can select the movie’s size, frame rate, and compression method.



Image Size

1920x1080

Full High-Definition (Full HD)

recording quality. The aspect ratio is

16:9.

1280x720

High-Definition (HD) recording

quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.



Frame Rate

(fps: frames per second)

29.97 fps

59.94 fps

For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan,

South Korea, Mexico, etc.).

25.00 fps

50.00 fps

For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,

Australia, etc.).

23.98 fps

Mainly for motion pictures.

Movie Recording Size

The frame rate displayed on the movie recording size screen switches

depending on whether [53: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For

PAL] (p.475). 4 (23.98 fps) can be selected only when [For NTSC] is set.

Setting the Movie Recording Size

308



Compression Method

Fixed at

if the recording format is MOV. For the MP4 format,

can be selected.

• In MOV Format

ALL-I

(For editing/I-only)

Compresses one frame at a time for recording. Although the file

size is larger than with IPB (Standard) and IPB (Light), the movie is

better suited for editing.

•In MP4 Format

IPB

(Standard)

Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording.

IPB

(Light)

Records a movie at a bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard),

resulting in a smaller file size and compatibility with a larger range

of playback systems.

If you change the [53: Video system] setting, set the movie recording size

again.

309

Setting the Movie Recording Size



In MOV Format

(Approx.)



In MP4 Format

(Approx.)



Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB

Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting

without interruption.

During movie shooting, if the file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie

file will be created automatically.

When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file

individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in

consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next

movie to be played back.

Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute

Movie Recording

Quality

Total Recording Time on Card File Size

4 GB 16 GB 64 GB

L 654 W

5 min. 23 min.

1 hr. 33 min.

654 MB/min.

Movie Recording

Quality

Total Recording Time on Card File Size

4 GB 16 GB 64 GB

87 X

8 min. 35 min. 2 hr. 21 min. 431 MB/min.

654 X

17 min. 1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 41 min. 216 MB/min.

65 Xv

43 min. 2 hr. 53 min. 11 hr. 35 min. 87 MB/min.

w87 X

20 min. 1 hr. 21 min. 5 hr. 24 min. 184 MB/min.

65 Xv

2 hr. 5 min. 8 hr. 20 min. 33 hr. 22 min. 30 MB/min.

HDR Movie Shooting

17 min. 1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 41 min. 216 MB/min.

An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie

shooting to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table

(p.343).

If the file size exceeds 4 GB during movie shooting, “buSY” may be

displayed on the LCD panel for a while.

Setting the Movie Recording Size

310



Movie Shooting Time Limit

The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If

the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting

will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by

pressing the <

> button. (The movie will be recorded as a new

movie file.)

311

When the recording size is

(NTSC) or

(PAL),

you can shoot with an approx. 3x to 10x digital zoom (except in <

mode).

Select [Digital zoom].



Under the [

] tab (the [

] tab in

Basic Zone modes), select [

Digital

zoom

] and press <

Select [Approx. 3-10x zoom].



Select [

Approx. 3-10x zoom

], then

press <



Press the <

> button to exit the

menu and return to movie shooting.

Use digital zoom.



Press the <

> <

> keys.



The digital zoom bar will appear.



Press the <

> key to zoom in or

press the <

> key to zoom out.



When you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus with

[

FlexiZone - Single

] (fixed at center).



To cancel digital zoom, set [

Disable

]

in step 2.

3 Using Movie Digital Zoom

Use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

When movie digital zoom is set, the maximum ISO speed will be ISO

6400.

Since movie digital zoom processes the image digitally, the image will

look grainier at higher magnifications. Noise, dots of light, etc., may also

become noticeable.

When movie digital zoom is set, the scene icon will not be displayed.

Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page

284.

312

You can shoot movies while recording

sound with the built-in stereo

microphones or a commercially-available

external stereo microphone. You can

also freely adjust the sound-recording

level.

Set the sound recording with [

Sound recording

[

Auto

] : The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto

level control will operate automatically in response to the

sound level.

[

Manual

] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-recording

level to one of 64 levels.

Select [

Rec. level

] and turn the <

> dial while looking at

the level meter to adjust the sound-recording level. Look at

the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the level meter

sometimes lights up on the right of the “12” (-12 dB) mark

for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound will be

distorted.

[

Disable

] : Sound will not be recorded.

[

Wind filter

] : When set to [

Auto

], it reduces wind noise when there is

wind outdoors. This feature takes effect only with the

built-in microphones. When the wind filter function takes

effect, low bass sounds will also be reduced.

[

Attenuator

]: Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by

loud noises. Even if you set [

Sound recording

] to [

Auto

]

or [

Manual

] before shooting, sound distortion may still

result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case, setting

it to [

Enable

] is recommended.

3 Setting the Sound Recording

Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level

Wind Filter/Attenuator

313

Setting the Sound Recording



Using Microphones

Normally, the built-in microphones will record stereo sound.

Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting a

commercially-available external stereo microphone equipped with a

miniature stereo plug (



3.5 mm) to the camera’s external

microphone IN terminal (p.26).



Using Headphones

By connecting stereo headphones (commercially-available)

equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug to the camera’s

headphone terminal (p.26), you can listen to the sound during movie

shooting. To adjust the headphones’ sound volume, press the <

button and select <

>. Then turn <

> to adjust (p.305).

You can also use headphones during movie playback.

When using headphones for audio, noise reduction will not be applied to

the headphone output. Because of this, what you hear will differ from the

actual audio recorded with the movie.

An external microphone may pick up noise while wireless functions are in

use. Keep a distance between the camera and microphone.

In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [z2: Sound recording]

will be [On/Off]. If [On] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted

automatically (same as with [Auto]), and the wind filter function will take

effect.

The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be

adjusted.

Audio is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.

314

You can shoot movies by reducing the clipped highlight details of bright

areas even in high-contrast scenes. This function is settable in Basic

Zone modes (except the <

> mode).

HDR movie can be set when the MP4 format is set and the recording

size is

L6X

(NTSC) or

L5X

(PAL).

Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone

mode.

Press the <Q> button

(



The Quick Control screen will appear.

Select [4].



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[

] (HDR Movie Shooting) on the

screen’s right side.

Select [Enable].



For recording time and file sizes, see

the table on page 309.

Shooting HDR Movies

315

Shooting HDR Movies

Since multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, a part of the

movie may be distorted. During shooting while handholding the camera,

the distortion caused by camera shake may be more noticeable. Using a

tripod is recommended. Note that even if a tripod is used for shooting,

afterimages may be noticeable or noise may look increased when the

HDR movie is played back frame-by-frame or in slow-motion compared

to normal playback.

HDR movie shooting cannot be set if movie digital zoom, video snapshot,

or time-lapse movie is set.

316

In the <

> (Creative filters) mode, you can shoot movies with one of

five filter effects (Memory, Dream, Old Movies, Dramatic B&W, and

Miniature effect movie).

The recording size can be set to

(NTSC) or

(PAL).

Set the Mode Dial to <v>.

Press the <Q> button

(

)



The Quick Control screen will appear.

Select [l].



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[

] (Creative filters) on the upper left

of the screen, then press <

Select a filter effect.



Press the <

> <

> or <

> <

keys to select a filter (p.317-318),

then press <

> and select [



The image will be displayed with the

effects of the filter applied.



For the Miniature effect movie, press

the <

> <

> keys to move the white

frame to where you want the image to

look sharp.

v Shooting Movies with Creative Filters

317

Shooting Movies with Creative Filters

Adjust the filter effect level.



Press the

button and select the

icon below [

Creative filters



Press the <

> <

> keys to adjust

the filter effect, then press <



When the Miniature effect movie is

set, select the playback speed.

Shoot the movie.

k

Memory

Creates the atmosphere of a distant memory. Gives the movie a soft

look overall, reducing brightness of the periphery of the screen. You

can modify the overall saturation and the dark areas along the

screen edges by adjusting the filter effect.

l

Dream

Creates a soft, dreamy, otherworldly atmosphere. Gives the movie a

soft look overall, blurring the periphery of the screen. You can adjust

the blurry areas along the screen edges.

m

Old Movies

Creates an atmosphere like an old film by adding wavering,

scratches, and flickering effects to the image. (The top and bottom of

the screen are masked in black.) You can modify the wavering and

scratch effects by adjusting the filter effect.

Creative Filter Characteristics

Magnified view is not possible.

The histogram is not displayed.

It is not possible to set movie digital zoom, video snapshot, or time-lapse

movie.

In Creative Zone modes, use the Quick Control to set a Creative filter

(p.305).

Shooting Movies with Creative Filters

318

n

Dramatic B&W

Creates an atmosphere of dramatic realism with high-contrast black

and white. You can adjust the graininess and black-and-white effect.

o

Miniature effect movie

You can shoot movies having a Miniature (diorama) effect. Select

the playback speed and shoot. You can change where the image

looks sharp. In step 4, if you press the <

> button (or tap [

] on

the bottom right of the screen), you can switch between the white

frame’s vertical and horizontal orientations. In step 5, set the

playback speed to [

], [

10x

], or [

20x

] and shoot. The AF method

will be FlexiZone - Single to focus on the center of the white frame.

The white frame is not displayed during shooting.

Playback Speed and Length (for 1-minute movie)

Speed Playback Length

5x Approx. 12 sec.

10x Approx. 6 sec.

20x Approx. 3 sec.

A smooth gradation of the color of the sky or white walls may not be

reproduced. Irregular exposure, irregular colors, or noise may appear.

> Miniature Effect Movies

Sound will not be recorded.

Since sound will not be output during shooting, you cannot listen to the

sound even if you connect headphones to the camera.

Movie Servo AF will not function.

Miniature effect movies whose playback time is shorter than 1 sec.

cannot be edited (p.367).

319

Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically

to create a time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject

changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took. It

is effective for a fixed-point observation of changing scenery, growing

plants, celestial motion, etc.

Time-lapse movies are recorded in the MOV format and in

L6W

(NTSC) or

L5W

(PAL) recording size.

Set the Mode Dial to a mode other

than <v>.

Select [Time-lapse movie].



Under the [

] tab (the [

] tab in

Basic Zone modes), select [

Time-

lapse movie

] and press <

Select [Enable].



Select [

Enable

], then press the

> button.

N Shooting Time-lapse Movies

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or

an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or

the camera’s internal components.

Shooting Time-lapse Movies

320

Set the shooting interval and

number of shots.



Check the [

: Time required

] and

[

: Playback time

] displayed at the

bottom of the screen to set the

shooting interval and number of shots.



Select the number to be set (hours:

minutes: seconds / number of shots).



Press <

> so <

> is displayed.



Set the desired number, then press

>. (Returns to <

>.)



Shooting interval

Settable from [

00:00:01

] to [

99:59:59



Number of shots

Settable from [

0002

] to [

3600

]. Set one digit at a time. If 3600 is set,

the time-lapse movie will be approx. 2 min. for NTSC and approx. 2

min. 24 sec. for PAL.

Select [OK].



The screen for step 2 will reappear.

Check the settings.



With [

Time-lapse movie

] selected on

the screen in step 2, press <



The current settings will be displayed.



Time required

Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the

set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.



Playback time

Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the

movie) to create the time-lapse movie in

L 6W

(NTSC) or

L 5W

(PAL) from the still photos taken with the set intervals.

Time required Playback

time

321

Shooting Time-lapse Movies



Card- time left

The total length of a time-lapse movie that can be recorded on the

card based on its remaining capacity.

Exit the menu.



Press the <

> button to turn off

the menu screen.

Read the message.



Read the message and select [

Take test shots.



Set the exposure and shooting

functions, and press the shutter

button halfway to focus as you do

with Live View shooting.



Press the shutter button completely to

start taking test shots. The test

images will be recorded to the card.



If there are no problems with the test

shots, go to the next step.



To take test shots again, repeat this

step.

Press the <0> button.



The camera will be ready to start

shooting a time-lapse movie.



To return to step 9, press the <

button again.

Shooting Time-lapse Movies

322

Shoot the time-lapse movie.



Press the shutter button halfway to

check the focus and exposure.



Press the shutter button completely to

start shooting the time-lapse movie.



AF will not work during time-lapse

movie shooting. The exposure setting

for the first shot will be applied to

subsequent shots.



During time-lapse movie shooting,

nothing will be displayed on the LCD

monitor. <

> will blink on the LCD

panel.



Since the electronic shutter is used

for shooting, the reflex mirror and

shutter make no mechanical sound

during time-lapse movie shooting.



When the set number of shots are

taken, the time-lapse movie shooting

will stop and be automatically canceled.

Time-lapse movie

Shots remaining

Using a tripod is recommended.

Taking test shots is recommended.

To cancel the time-lapse movie shooting before it is completed, either

press the shutter button completely or press the <0> button ([Disable]

is set). The time-lapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card.

You can play back the shot time-lapse movie with this camera the same

way that you play back normal movies.

If the time required for shooting is more than 24 hours but not more than

48, “2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the

number of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments.

Even if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie

file will still be created. For [Playback time], “00:00:00” will be displayed.

If the shooting time is long, using DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately)

and AC Adapter AC-E6 (sold separately) is recommended.



When shooting in Basic Zone modes, the scene icon for the scene

detected by the camera is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.260).

323

Shooting Time-lapse Movies

With time-lapse movie set to [Enable], you cannot set [z4: Movie rec

quality] and [53: Video system].

Cannot be set when movie digital zoom is set.

If the camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable, or if an

HDMI cable is connected to the camera, you cannot select [Enable].

The maximum ISO speed will be ISO 6400 in the <d>, <s>, <f>,

and <F> modes, and in the <a> mode with ISO Auto set.

If the shooting mode is <f>, <s> or <F>, the operation will be the

same as the <d> mode.

Movie Servo AF will not function.

The shutter speed will be in the range from 1/4000 to 30 sec.

If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie may

not be displayed properly (may differ from that of the resulting movie).

Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie shooting. Zooming the

lens may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or

the lens aberration correction not to function properly.

When shooting a time-lapse movie under a flickering light, noticeable

image flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be

recorded.

The image displayed during time-lapse movie shooting and the resulting

movie may look different (in terms of flicker, depth of field, etc.).

If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving

subject while shooting a time-lapse movie, the image may look extremely

distorted.

During time-lapse movie shooting, auto power off will not take effect.

Also, you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function

settings, or play back images.

Sound is not recorded for time-lapse movies.

The shooting function settings for the first shot will be applied to

subsequent shots.

If a long exposure or shutter speed longer than the shooting interval is

set, the camera cannot shoot with the set interval. Also, shooting may

not be performed when the shutter speed and the shooting interval are

nearly the same.

If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may

make the time-lapse movie’s recording time shorter.

Shooting Time-lapse Movies

324

If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the interval between

shots due to the shooting functions set or card performance, shooting

with the set interval may not be performed.

The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel

the time-lapse movie shooting after only one shot is taken, it will be

recorded as a movie file.

If the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of

shots, [Playback time] will be displayed in red. Although the camera can

continue shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.

If you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable

provided with the camera and use EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5:

Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If it is set to [Enable], the camera

cannot communicate with the computer.

During time-lapse movie shooting, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not

operate.

If the power switch is set to <2> or the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch is operated, time-lapse movie shooting will be terminated

and the setting is switched to [Disable].

Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.

Shooting-ready state of the time-lapse movie is canceled and the setting

is switched to [Disable] with any of the following operations:

• Selecting [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54:

Clear all camera settings], or [54: zfirmware ver.].

• Selecting <w> or <x> shooting modes.

When time-lapse movie shooting ends, the settings are cleared

automatically, and the camera returns to normal movie shooting. Note

that if you have set the shutter speed slower than 1/60 sec. for time-

lapse movie shooting and the settings are automatically cleared, the

shutter speed may be automatically changed to a speed within the

settable range for normal movie shooting.

If you start time-lapse movie shooting while the white <s> (p.343) is

displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse movie may deteriorate.

325

Shooting Time-lapse Movies

You can perform time-lapse movie shooting with a fully-charged Battery

Pack LP-E6N for the approximate durations (from start of shooting until the

battery is exhausted) listed in the table below. Possible time for time-lapse

movie shooting will vary depending on the shooting conditions.

Approximate Total Possible Time for Time-lapse Movie Shooting

(Approx.)

Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

Low Temperatures

(0°C / 32°F)

Shooting interval: 1 sec. 3 hr. 50 min. 3 hr. 20 min.

Shooting interval: 10 sec. 5 hr. 4 hr. 30 min.

You can start or stop the time-lapse movie shooting using Remote Controller

RC-6 (sold separately, p.221). Set [z5: Remote control] to [Enable]

beforehand.

When Using Remote Controller RC-6

Camera Status/

Remote Control Setting <2> (2-sec. delay) <o> (Immediate

shooting)

Test-shooting screen To shooting-ready Shoots still photo

Shooting-ready To test-shooting

screen Starts shooting

During time-lapse movie

shooting Ends shooting Ends shooting

326

When the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch is set to <

>, the

movie shooting menu options will appear

under the [

] and [

] tabs (the

[

] and [

] tabs in Basic Zone

modes).



Movie Servo AF

With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject

continuously during movie shooting. The default setting is [

Enable

When [Enable] is set:

•The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you

are not pressing the shutter button halfway.

•If you want to keep the focus at a specific point, or if you do not

want the lens mechanical sound to be recorded, you can

temporarily stop Movie Servo AF as follows. When you stop Movie

Servo AF, the AF point will turn gray. When you perform the same

steps below, Movie Servo AF will resume.

• Tap the [

] icon on the lower left of the screen.

• Press the <

> button.

• Under [

C.Fn III-4: Custom controls

], if a button is assigned

with [

AF stop

], you can pause the Movie Servo AF while holding

down that button. When you let go of the button, Movie Servo AF

will resume.

•While Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting

after operations such as pressing the <

> or <

> button, or

changing the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.

When [Disable] is set:

•Press the shutter button halfway or press the <

> button to

focus.

3 Menu Function Settings

327

Menu Function Settings



AF method

The AF methods are the same as described on pages 276-285. You

can select [

+Tracking

], [

FlexiZone - Multi

], or [

FlexiZone -

Single

Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]

Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult

• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.

• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.

• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page

284.

Since this drives the lens continuously, it will consume battery power and

shorten the total possible movie shooting time (p.309).

With certain lenses, the lens mechanical sound during focusing may be

recorded. If this happens, use a commercially-available external

microphone to reduce the lens mechanical sound in the movie. Also,

using certain USM lenses (for example, the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

USM) or certain STM lenses (for example, the EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

STM) will reduce the lens mechanical sound to be recorded.

Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or in magnified view.

During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the

camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie

image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image

magnification).

If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during Movie

Servo AF, first set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to

<A>.

Menu Function Settings

328



Movie recording quality

You can set the movie recording format (MOV or MP4) and movie

recording size. For details, see page 306.



Digital zoom

You can use digital zoom for telephoto shooting. For details, see

page 311.



Sound recording

You can set the sound-recording functions. For details, see page

312.

329

Menu Function Settings



Movie Servo AF speed

You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF

speed and its operation conditions.

This function is settable when [

Movie

Servo AF

] is set to [

Enable

] and [

method

] is set to [

FlexiZone - Single

Additionally, the function is enabled

when using a lens supporting slow focus

transition during movie shooting*.

When active

Always on

] sets the AF adjustment speed to take effect

at all times for movie shooting (before and during movie

shooting). [

During shooting

] sets the AF adjustment

speed to take effect only during movie shooting.

AF speed

: You can adjust the AF speed (focus transition speed)

from standard speed to slow (one of seven levels) or

fast (one of two levels), to obtain the desired effect for

movie creation.

* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie shooting

USM lenses released in and after 2009 (for example, the EF-S 18-

135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM) and STM lenses (for example, the EF-S 18-

55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM) support slow focus transition during movie

shooting. For details, refer to the Canon website.

If [AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Multi], the operation

will be the same as when [AF speed] is set to [Standard (0)].

Menu Function Settings

330



Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity

You can change the Movie Servo AF’s

tracking sensitivity to one of seven

levels. This affects the responsiveness of

AF tracking sensitivity when the AF

points stray from the subject, such as

during panning or when an obstacle cuts

across the AF points.

This function is settable when [

Movie

Servo AF

] is set to [

Enable

] and [

method

] is set to [

FlexiZone - Single

Locked on: -3/-2/-1

This setting makes the camera less inclined to track a different subject if

the AF point loses the original subject. The closer the setting is to the

minus (-) symbol, the less the camera is inclined to track a different

subject. It is effective when you want to prevent the AF points from

rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during

panning or when an obstacle cuts across the AF points.

Responsive: +1/+2/+3

This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that

covers the AF point. The closer the setting is to the plus (+) symbol, the

more responsive the camera is. It is effective when you want to keep

tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera changes, or

to rapidly focus on another subject.

If [AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Multi], the tracking

sensitivity will be equivalent to the [0] setting.

331

Menu Function Settings



Metering timer

You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock

time).



Grid display

With [

3x3

] or [

6x4

], you can display grid lines to help you

level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [

3x3+diag

the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you

compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the

subject.

V

button function

You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button

halfway or completely during movie shooting.

If [

] or [

] is set, besides pressing the <

> button, you

can start/stop the movie shooting by pressing the shutter button

completely or by using Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately, p.221).

Setting Pressed Halfway Pressed Completely

a/- Metering and AF No function (disabled)

q/- Metering only No function (disabled)

a/kMetering and AF Starts/stops movie shooting

q/kMetering only Starts/stops movie shooting

Even if you set [V btn function] to [q/-] or [q/k], AF will be

performed when you press the shutter button halfway during time-lapse

movie shooting.

During movie shooting, the [V btn function] setting overrides any

function assigned to the shutter button with [8C.Fn III-4: Custom

Controls].

Menu Function Settings

332



Video snapshot

You can shoot video snapshots. For details, see page 333.



Time-lapse movie

You can shoot time-lapse movies. For details, see page 319.



Remote control shooting

When [

Enable

] is set, you can start or stop movie shooting using

Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.221). [

] will be

displayed on the LCD panel. Set the release mode switch to <

then press the transmit button. If the switch is set to <

> (immediate

shooting), the [

btn function

] setting will be applied.

ISO Speed Menu During Movie Shooting

When the Live View shooting/Movie shooting

switch is set to <k>, the corresponding setting

in [z2: ISO speed settings] will change to

[Range for movies].

333

You can shoot a series of short movie clips lasting approx. 2 sec., 4

sec., or 8 sec. called video snapshots. The video snapshots can be

joined together into a single movie called a video snapshot album. You

can thereby show quick highlights of a trip or event.

A video snapshot album can also be played back together with

background music (p.340, 372).

Set the Mode Dial to a mode other

than <v>.

Select [Video snapshot].



Under the [

] tab (the [

] tab in

Basic Zone modes), select [

Video

snapshot

] and press <

Select [Enable].

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration

Video Snapshot Album Concept

Video snapshot album

Video

snapshot 1

Video

snapshot 2

Video

snapshot **

Shooting Video Snapshots

334

Select [Album settings].

Select [Create a new album].

Select the snapshot length.



Press <

> and use the <

> <

keys to select the snapshot’s length,

then press <

Select [OK].



Press the <

> button to exit the

menu.



A blue bar will appear to indicate the

snapshot length.



Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot

Album” (p.335).

Shooting duration

335

Shooting Video Snapshots

Shoot the first video snapshot.



Press the <

> button, then shoot.



The blue bar indicating the shooting

duration will gradually decrease. After

the set shooting duration elapses, the

shooting stops automatically.



The confirmation screen will appear

(p.336-337).

Save as a video snapshot album.



Select [

Save as album

], then

press <



The movie clip will be saved as the

video snapshot album’s first video

snapshot.

Continue to shoot more video

snapshots.



Repeat step 8 to shoot the next video

snapshot.



Select [

Add to album

], then press



To create another video snapshot

album, select [

Save as a new

album



Repeat step 10 as necessary.

Exit the video snapshot shooting.



Set [

Video snapshot

] to [

Disable

To return to normal movie

shooting, be sure to set [Disable].



Press the <

> button to exit the

menu, and return to the normal movie

shooting.

Creating a Video Snapshot Album

Shooting Video Snapshots

336

Options in Steps 9 and 10

Function Description

J Save as album (Step 9) The movie clip will be saved as the video

snapshot album’s first video snapshot.

J Add to album (Step 10)

The video snapshot just recorded will be

added to the album recorded immediately

before.

W Save as a new album

(Step 10)

A new video snapshot album is created and

the movie clip is saved as the first video

snapshot. The new album will be a different

file from the previously recorded album.

1 Playback video snapshot

(Step 9 and 10)

The video snapshot just recorded will be

played back. For playback operations, see the

table on the next page.

r Do not save to album

(Step 9)

r Delete without saving to

album (Step 10)

The video snapshot just recorded will be

erased instead of being saved to the album.

Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.

If you want to shoot another video snapshot

right after shooting one video snapshot, set

[Show confirm msg] to [Disable]. This

setting will allow you to immediately shoot the

next video snapshot without the confirmation

screen appearing after you shoot each time.

337

Shooting Video Snapshots

[Playback video snapshot] Operations in Steps 9 and 10

*With [Skip backward] and [Skip forward], the skipping length corresponds to

the number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8

sec.).

Function Playback Description

Play By pressing <0>, you can play back or pause the video

snapshot recorded immediately before.

First frame Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.

Skip backward* Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips back

by a few seconds.

Previous frame Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is

displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.

Next frame

Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-

frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the

movie.

Skip forward* Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips

forward by a few seconds.

Last frame Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.

Playback position

mm' ss" Playback time (minutes:seconds)

Volume Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in

speaker (p.365).

Pressing the <M> button returns to the previous

screen.

Shooting Video Snapshots

338

Select [Add to existing album].



Follow step 5 on page 334 to select

[

Add to existing album

], then press

Select an existing album.



Turn the <

> dial to select an

existing album, then press <



Select [

], then press <



Certain video snapshot settings will

change to match the existing album’s

settings.



Press the <

> button to exit the

menu.



The video snapshot shooting screen

will appear.

Shoot the video snapshot.



See “Creating a Video Snapshot

Album” (p.335) to shoot the video

snapshot.

Adding to an Existing Album

You cannot select an album shot with another camera.

339

Shooting Video Snapshots

Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots

When the MOV format is selected, video snapshot cannot be set.

You can add to an album only video snapshots with the same duration

(approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each).

Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a

new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.

• Changing the [Movie rec. size].

• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto]/[Manual] to [Disable]

or from [Disable] to [Auto]/[Manual].

• Updating the firmware.

The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate.

Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during

playback may not be exact.

Shooting Video Snapshots

340

You can play back a video snapshot album in the same way as a normal

movie (p.365).

Play back the movie.



Press the <

> button to display an

image.

Select the album.



In the single-image display, the

[

] icon displayed on the upper

left of the screen indicates a video

snapshot album.



Turn the <

> dial to select an

album.

Play back the album.



Press <



On the movie playback panel

displayed, select [

] (Play), then

press <

Playing back an Album

Background Music

You can play background music when you play back albums, normal

movies, and slide shows on the camera (p.366, 372). To play

background music, you must first copy the background music to the card

using EOS Utility (EOS software). For information on how to copy the

background music, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.

Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private

enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.

341

Shooting Video Snapshots

After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video

snapshots in the album.

Select [X].



On the movie playback panel

displayed, select [

] (Edit), then

press <



The editing screen will be displayed.

Select an editing operation.



Select an editing option, then press

Editing an Album

Function Description

T Move snapshot

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot

you want to move, then press <0>. Press the <Y>

<Z> keys to move the snapshot, then press <0>.

L Delete snapshot

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot

you want to delete, then press <0>. The [L] icon will

be displayed on the selected video snapshot. Pressing

<0> again will cancel the selection and [L] will

disappear.

7 Play snapshot Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot

you want to play, then press <0>.

Shooting Video Snapshots

342

Save the edited album.



Press the <

> button to return to

the Editing panel at the screen’s

bottom.



Select [

] (Save), then press <



The save screen will appear.



To save it as a new album, select

[

New file

]. To save it and overwrite

the original album, select

[

Overwrite

], then press <

If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be

available.

When the battery level is low, editing albums is not possible. Use a fully-

charged battery.

343

General Movie Shooting Cautions

Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icon

If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie

shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a red <E> icon will

appear.

The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated

automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the

camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the

camera rest for a while.

Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause

the <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always turn

off the camera.

Recording and Image Quality

If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image

Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all

times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image

Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie

shooting time depending on the shooting conditions. If you use a tripod

or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recommended to set the

IS switch to <2>.

The camera’s built-in microphones will also pick up the operation sound

during shooting and mechanical sound of the camera. Use a

commercially-available external microphone to reduce these sounds in

the movie.

Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the

camera’s external microphone IN terminal.

If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, the

movie may freeze temporarily. In such a case, shoot movies with manual

exposure.

If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may

appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost

exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.

In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie

will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.

If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may

deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support

MOV/MP4 format).

344

General Movie Shooting Cautions

Recording and Image Quality

If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level

indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie

shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been

written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer

memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will

climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting

will stop automatically.

If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either

not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.

First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.

Playback and TV Connection

If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.373) and shoot a movie, the TV

set will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the sound

will be properly recorded.

Indicator

Restrictions on MP4-format Movies

Note that generally the following restrictions apply to MP4-format movies.

Sound will not be recorded on approx. the last two frames.

When you play back movies on Windows, images and sound may

become slightly out of synchronization.

345

Image Playback

This chapter explains how to play back and erase

photos and movies, how to display them on a TV

screen, and other playback-related functions.

Images shot and saved with another device

The camera may not be able to properly display images captured

with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their

file names changed.

346

Play back the image.



Press the <

> button.



The last image captured or played

back will appear.

Select an image.



To play back images starting with the

last image captured, turn the <

dial counterclockwise. To play back

images starting with the first captured

image, turn the dial clockwise.



Each time you press the <

button, the information display will

change.

x Image Playback

Single-Image Display

No information Basic information

display

Shooting information display

347

Image Playback

Exit the image playback.



Press the <

> button to exit the

image playback and return to

shooting-ready state.

With the shooting information screen displayed (p.346), you can press

the <

> <

> keys to change the shooting information displayed at the

screen’s bottom as follows. For details, see pages 349-350.

In single-image display, you can overlay

the grid on the image playback.

With [

3: Playback grid

], you can

select [

3x3

], [

6x4

], or [

3x3+diag

This function is convenient for checking

the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt as

well as composition.

Shooting Information Display

3 Grid Display

Detailed information

Lens aberration correction information

Color space / Noise reduction information

Picture Style information 2

Lens / Histogram information

White balance information

Picture Style information 1

The grid is not displayed during movie playback.

348

The information displayed varies depending on the shooting mode and

settings.



Basic information display

B: Shooting Information Display

Sample Information for Still Photos

Folder number -

File number

Rating

Wireless signal strength/

Eye-Fi card transmission status

Playback number/

Total images recorded

Protect images

Eye-Fi transfer completed

Battery level

Image-recording

quality

Highlight tone priority

ISO speed

Exposure compensation

amount

Wi-Fi function

Shutter speed

Aperture

If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information

may not be displayed.

It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on

other cameras.

349

: Shooting Information Display



Shooting information display

•

Detailed information

* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be

displayed.

* For images shot with flash and without exposure compensation, <0> will be

displayed.

*<w> and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images

shot with HDR shooting.

* will be displayed for images shot with multiple-exposure shooting.

*<M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.

*<G> will be displayed for still photos taken as test shots for time-lapse movies.

* will be displayed for images shot with the Creative filter function and for

images that are processed (RAW image processing performed, resized, or

Creative filter applied) and then saved.

* For cropped images, and <N> will be displayed.

Exposure compensation amount

Shutter speed

Shooting mode

ISO speed

Shooting date and time

Image-recording quality

Histogram (Brightness/RGB)

White balance

White balance correction

Highlight tone priority

Metering mode

File size

Flash exposure compensation

amount / Multi Shot Noise

Reduction

Picture Style/Settings

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Scroll bar

Aperture

AF Microadjustment

: Shooting Information Display

350

•

Lens/Histogram information

Histogram display

(Brightness)

Lens name

Focal length

Histogram display

(RGB)

•

White balance information

•

Picture Style information 1

•Color space / Noise

reduction information

•

Lens aberration correction

information

•Picture Style information 2

If you used GPS Receiver GP-E2 to record GPS information for the image,

the “GPS information” screen will also appear.

351

: Shooting Information Display

* If manual exposure is used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed (when

set manually) will be displayed.

*The <

> icon will be displayed for video snapshots.

*The <

> icon will be displayed for HDR movies.



Highlight Alert

When [

3: Highlight alert

] is set to [

Enable

], overexposed,

clipped highlights will blink. To obtain more image detail in the

overexposed, blinking areas, set the exposure compensation to a

negative amount and shoot again.

Sample Movie Information Display

Movie shooting mode/

Time-lapse movie

Movie file size

Shutter speed

Compression method

Movie recording size Shooting time, Playback time

Playback

Aperture

Frame rate

Recording format

Creative filters

During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and

[Threshold] of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].

: Shooting Information Display

352



AF Point Display

When [

3: AF point disp.

] is set to [

Enable

], the AF point that has

achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point selection

is set, multiple AF points may be displayed at the same time.



Histogram

The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and

overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color

saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [

Histogram disp

[Brightness] Display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution

of the image’s brightness level. The horizontal

axis indicates the brightness level (darker on the

left and brighter on the right), while the vertical

axis indicates how many pixels exist for each

brightness level. The more pixels there are

toward the left, the darker the image. The more

pixels there are toward the right, the brighter the

image. If there are too many pixels on the left, the

shadow detail will be lost. If there are too many

pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be lost.

The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By

checking the image and its brightness histogram,

you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.

[RGB] Display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary

color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).

The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on

the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how

many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels

there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The

more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the

color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the respective color

information will be lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right,

the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By checking the

image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation and

gradation condition, as well as white balance inclination.

Sample Histograms

Dark image

Normal brightness

Bright image

353

Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or

100 images on one screen.

Switch to the index display.



During image playback, press the

> button.



The 4-image index display will

appear. The selected image is

highlighted with an orange frame.



Pressing the <

> button will

switch the display as follows: 9

images

36 images

100 images.

Pressing the <

> button will switch

the display as follows: 100 images

36 images

9 images

4 images

1 image.

Select an image.



Turn the <

> dial to move the

orange frame and select the image.

You can also press the <

> <

> or

> <

> keys to select the image.



Turning the <

> dial will display

image(s) on the next or previous

screen.



Press <

> in the index display to

display the selected image in the

single-image display.

x Searching for Images Quickly

Displaying Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)

 

Searching for Images Quickly

354

In the single-image display, you can turn the <

> dial to jump through

the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.

Select [Image jump w/6].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Image

jump w/

], then press <

Select the jump method.



Select the jump method, then press

Display images one by one

Jump 10 images

Jump 100 images

Display by date

Display by folder

Display movies only

Display stills only

Display by image rating

(p.359)

Turn the <

> dial to select.

Browse by jumping.



Press the <

> button to play back

images.



In the single-image display, turn the

> dial.



You can browse images with the

method that was set.

Jumping through Images (Jump Display)

Playback position

Jump method

To search images by shooting date, select [Date].

To search images by folder, select [Folder].

If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or

[Stills] to display only one or the other.

If no images match the selected [Rating], you cannot browse through the

images with the <6> dial.

355

You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD

monitor.

Magnify the image.



Press the <

> button during image

playback.



The image will be magnified.



If you hold down the <

> button, the

image will be magnified until it

reaches the maximum magnification.



Press the <

> button to reduce

the magnification. If you hold down

the button, the magnification will be

reduced to the single-image display.

Scroll around the image.



Use <

> to scroll around the

magnified image.



To exit magnified view, press the

> button and the single-image

display will reappear.

u/y Magnified View

Magnified area position

Turn the <5> dial to view another image while the magnification is

maintained.

Magnified view is not possible during the image review immediately after

the image is taken.

A movie cannot be magnified.

356

The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your

fingers for various playback operations.

First, press the

button

to play back images.

Swipe with one finger.



With single-image display, touch the

LCD monitor with

one finger

. You

can browse to the next or previous

image by swiping your finger to the

left or right.

Swipe to the left to see the next

(newer) image, or swipe to the right to

see the previous (older) image.



With index display, also touch the

LCD monitor with

one finger

. You

can browse to the next or previous

screen by swiping your finger up or

down.

Swipe up to see the next (newer)

images or swipe down to see the

previous (older) images.

When you select an image, the

orange frame will appear. Tap on the

image again to display it as a single

image.

Swipe with two fingers.

Touch the LCD monitor with two fingers.

When you swipe

two fingers

to the left

or right, you can jump through images

with the method set in [

Image jump w/

] under the [

] tab.

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen

Browsing Images

Jumping through Images (Jump Display)

357

Playing Back with the Touch Screen

Pinch two fingers.

Touch the screen with two fingers spread

apart, and pinch your fingers together on

the screen.



Each time you pinch your fingers, the

single-image display will change to

the index display. If you spread your

fingers, the image display will change

in the reverse order.



When you select an image, the

orange frame will appear. Tap on the

image again to display it as a single

image.

Spread two fingers apart.

Touch the screen with two fingers

together, then spread your fingers apart

on the screen.



As you spread your fingers, the

image will be magnified.



The image can be magnified up to

approx. 10x.



You can scroll around the image by

dragging your fingers.



To reduce the image, pinch your

fingers together on the screen.



Tapping on the [

] icon will return to

the single-image display.

Reducing Image (Index Display)

Magnifying Image

Touch screen operations on the camera’s LCD monitor are also possible

while playing back images on a TV set connected to your camera (p.373).

358

You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.

Select [Rotate image].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Rotate

image

], then press <

Select an image.



Turn the <

> dial to select the

image to be rotated.



You can also select an image in the

index display (p.353).

Rotate the image.



Each time you press <

>, the

image will rotate clockwise as follows:

90°

270°

0°.



To rotate another image, repeat steps

2 and 3.

b Rotating the Image

If you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.387) before taking vertical

shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.

If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during

image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].

A movie cannot be rotated.

359

You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of five rating

marks:

. This function is called rating.

Select [Rating].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Rating

then press <

Select an image.



Turn the <

> dial to select an image

or movie to be rated, then press



By pressing the <

> button, you

can select images from a three-image

display. To return to the single-image

display, press the <

> button.

Set the rating.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select a

rating.



When you select a rating for the

image, the number beside the set

rating will increase by one.



To rate another image, repeat steps 2

and 3.

3 Setting Ratings

Setting Ratings

360

A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed. If there are

more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed.

Taking Advantage of Ratings

With [32: Image jump w/6], you can display only images having the

specified rating.

With [32: Slide show], you can play back only images having the

specified rating.

Depending on the computer OS, you can see each file’s rating as part of

the file information display or in the provided image viewer (JPEG

images only).

361

During playback, you can press the <

> button to set the following:

[

: Protect images

], [

: Rotate image], [

: Rating

], [

: RAW

image processing], [

: Creative filters], [

: Resize (JPEG images

only)], [

: Cropping (JPEG images only)], [

: Highlight alert

], [

AF point display

], [

: Image jump w/

], and [

: Send images to

smartphone

*].

For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.

* Not selectable if [Wi-Fi/NFC] under [51: Wireless communication settings] is

set to [Disable].

Press the <Q> button.



During image playback, press the

> button.



The Quick Control options will

appear.

Select a function and set it.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select a

function.



The current setting of the selected

function is displayed at the bottom of

the screen.



Press the <

> <

> keys to change

the setting.



When setting the RAW image

processing (p.390), Creative filters

(p.399), Resize (p.395), Cropping

(p.397), or Send images to

smartphone, also press <

> to

finalize the setting.



Image jump w/

: Set the Rating

(p.354) by pressing the <

button.



To cancel, press the <

> button.

Q Quick Control for Playback

Quick Control for Playback

362

Exit the setting.



Press the <

> button to exit the

Quick Control screen.

To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]

is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to

the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.

Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the

single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing

the <Q> button again will return to the index display.

For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may

be restricted.

363

You can play back movies in the following three ways:

By connecting the camera to a TV set

with HDMI Cable HTC-100, you can play

back the camera’s movies and still

photos on the TV set.

You can play back movies on the

camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit

out the movie’s first and last scenes, and

play back the still photos and movies on

the card in an automatic slide show.

k Enjoying Movies

Playback on a TV Set

(p.373)

Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor

(p.365-372)

Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera

cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.

Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB

cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.

A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played

back with the camera.

Enjoying Movies

364

The movie files recorded on the card can

be transferred to a computer and played

back or edited with pre-installed or

general-purpose software compatible

with the movie’s recording format.

Playback and Editing with a Computer

To play back or edit a movie with commercially-available software, use

software compatible with MOV-format and MP4-format movies. For details

on commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.

365

Play back the image.



Press the <

> button to display an

image.

Select a movie.



Turn the <

> dial to select the

movie to be played back.



In the single-image display, the

> icon displayed on the upper

left of the screen indicates a movie. If

the movie is a video snapshot,

> will be displayed.



In the index display, perforations at

the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a

movie.

As movies cannot be played

back from the index display, press

> to switch

to the single-image

display.

In the single-image display, press

<0>.



The movie playback panel will appear

at the bottom of the screen.

Play back the movie.



Select [

] (Play), then press <



The movie will start playing back.



Press <

> during playback to

pause. Press again to resume.



You can adjust the sound volume by

turning the <

> dial even during

movie playback.



For more details on the playback

procedure, see the next page.

k Playing Back Movies

Speaker

Before listening to a movie’s sound through headphones, turn down the

volume to prevent hurting your ears.



The camera may not be able to play back movies shot with another camera.

Playing Back Movies

366

Movie Playback Panel

* When background music is set, the movie sound will not be played back.

Operation Playback Description

7 Play Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.

8 Slow motion

Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the <Y> <Z>

keys. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper

right of the screen.

5 First frame Displays the movie’s first frame.

3 Previous frame Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is

displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.

6 Next frame

Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-

frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the

movie.

4 Last frame Displays the movie’s last frame.

v Background

music*

Plays back a movie with the selected background music

(p.372).

X Edit Displays the editing screen (p.367).

Playback position

mm' ss" Playback time (minutes:seconds)

9 Volume Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in

speaker (p.365).

32Press the <M> button to return to the single-image

display.

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the continuous playback time

at room temperature (23

C / 73

F) is approx. 3 hr. 40 min.

By connecting commercially-available headphones equipped with a 3.5

mm diameter stereo mini plug to the camera’s headphone terminal

(p.26), you can listen to the movie’s sound (p.313).

If you connect the camera to a TV set to play back a movie (p.373),

adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not

change the sound volume.) If there is audio feedback, place the camera

farther away from the TV set or turn down the TV sound volume.

367

Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

Tap [7] on the center of the

screen.



The movie will start playing back.



To display the movie playback panel,

tap <

> on the upper left of the

screen.



To pause the movie while it is playing

back, tap on the screen. The movie

playback panel will also appear.

Playback with the Touch Screen

Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.

increments.

On the movie playback screen,

select [X].



The movie editing panel will be

displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Specify the part to be edited out.



Select either [

] (Cut beginning) or

[

] (Cut end), then press <



Press the <

> <

> keys to see the

previous or next frames. Holding

down the key will fast forward or fast

rewind the frames. Turn the <

> dial

for frame-by-frame playback.



After deciding which part to edit out,

press <

>. The portion highlighted

in white on the top is what will remain.

Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

368

Check the edited movie.



Select [

] and press <

> to play

back the edited movie.



To change the editing, go back to step



To cancel the editing, press the

> button, then select [

] on

the confirmation dialog.

Save the edited movie.



Select [

], then press <



The save screen will appear.



To save it as a new movie, select

[

New file

]. To save it and overwrite

the original movie file, select

[

Overwrite

], then press <



On the confirmation dialog, select

[

], then press <

> to save the

edited movie and return to the movie

playback screen.

Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position

indicated by [Z] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the

movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.

If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be

available.

When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fully-

charged battery.

Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.

369

You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.

Select [Slide show].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Slide

show

], then press <

Select the images to be played

back.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the desired option, then press <

All images/Movies/Stills



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

one of the following: [

All images

]

[

Movies

] [

Stills

]. Then press

Date/Folder/Rating



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

one of the following: [

Date

]

[

Folder

] [

Rating



When <

> is highlighted,

press the <

> button.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select an

option, then press <

Slide Show (Auto Playback)

Number of images

to be played back

[

Date

][

Folder

][

Rating

]

Slide Show (Auto Playback)

370

Configure [Set up] as desired.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

[

Set up

], then press <



Set the [

Display time

], [

Repeat

]

(repeated playback), [

Transition

effect

] (effect when changing

images), and [

Background music

]

for the still photos.



The background music selection

procedure is explained on page 372.



After selecting the settings, press the

> button.

Item Playback Description

jAll images All the still photos and movies on the card will be played

back.

iDate Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date

will be played back.

nFolder Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played

back.

kMovies Only the movies on the card will be played back.

zStills Only the still photos on the card will be played back.

9Rating Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will

be played back.

[

Display time

][

Repeat

]

371

Slide Show (Auto Playback)

Start the slide show.



Press the <

> keys to select

[

Start

], then press <



After [

Loading image...

] is displayed,

the slide show will start.

Exit the slide show.



To exit the slide show and return to

the setting screen, press the

> button.

[

Transition effect

][

Background music

]

To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be

displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume

the slide show.

During auto playback of still photos, you can press the button to

change the display format (p.346).

During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the

<6> dial.

During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view

another image.

During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.

The display time may vary depending on the image.

To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 373.

Slide Show (Auto Playback)

372

After you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to copy background music to

the card, you can play background music together with the slide show.

Select [Background music].



Set [

Background music

] to [

then press <



If the card has no background music,

you cannot perform step 2.

Select the background music.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the desired background music, then

press <

>. You can also select

multiple background music tracks.

Play the background music.



To listen to a sample of the

background music, press the

> button.



Press the <

> <

> keys to play

another background music track. To

stop listening to the background

music, press the <

> button

again.



Adjust the sound volume by turning

the <

> dial.



To delete a background music track,

press the <

> <

> keys and select

the track, then press the <

> button.

Selecting the Background Music

At the time of purchase, the camera does not have background music. The

procedure to copy background music to a card is explained in the EOS

Utility Instruction Manual.

373

By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable, you can play

the camera’s still photos and movies on the TV set. For the HDMI cable,

HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended.

If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [

3: Video

system

] is correctly set to [

For NTSC

] or [

For PAL

] (depending on the

video system of your TV set).

Connect the HDMI cable to the

camera.



With the plug’s <

HDMI MINI

> logo

facing the front of the camera, insert it

into the <

> terminal.

Connect the HDMI cable to the TV

set.



Connect the HDMI cable to the TV

set’s HDMI IN port.

Turn on the TV set and switch the

TV set’s video input to select the

connected port.

Set the camera’s power switch to

<1>.

Press the <x> button.



The image will appear on the TV

screen. (Nothing will be displayed on

the camera’s LCD monitor.)



The images will automatically be

displayed at the optimum resolution

of the TV set.



By pressing the <

> button, you

can change the display format.



To play back movies, see page 365.

Viewing Images on a TV Set

374

If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible

with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback

operations.

* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that

you can control them with one remote control unit.

Select [Ctrl over HDMI].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Ctrl over

HDMI

], then press <

Select [Enable].

Connect the camera to a TV set.



Use an HDMI cable to connect the

camera to the TV set.



The TV set’s input will switch

automatically to the HDMI port

connected to the camera. If it does not

switch automatically, use the TV set’s

remote control to select the HDMI IN

port the cable is connected to.

Press the camera’s <x> button.



An image will appear on the TV

screen and you can use the TV set’s

remote control to play back images.

Using HDMI CEC TV Sets

Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot

be adjusted with the camera.

Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and

TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.

Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.

Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>

terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Certain TV sets may not be able to display the captured movies.

375

Viewing Images on a TV Set

Select an image.



Point the remote control toward the

TV set and press the





button to

select an image.

Press the remote control’s Enter

button.



The menu appears and you can

perform the playback operations

shown on the left.



Press the





button to select the

desired option, then press the Enter

button. For a slide show, press the

remote control’s





button to select

an option, then press the Enter

button.



If you select [

Return

] and press the

Enter button, the menu will disappear

and you can use the





button to

select an image.

Still photo playback

Movie playback menu

: Return

: 9-image index

: Play movie

: Slide show

: Display shooting info

: Rotate

Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For

details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.

Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not

operate properly. In such a case, set [33: Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable],

and use the camera to control the playback operation.

376

You can set protections to prevent the precious images from being

erased accidentally.

Select [Protect images].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Protect

images

], then press <

Select [Select images].



An image will be displayed.

Protect the image.



Turn the <

> dial to select the

image to be protected, then press



The image will be protected, and the

> icon will appear at the top of

the screen.



To cancel the image protection, press

> again. The <

> icon will

disappear.



To protect another image, repeat step

Protecting Images

3 Protecting a Single Image

Image protect icon

377

Protecting Images

You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

When you select [

All images in folder

]

or [

All images on card

] in [

Protect images

], all the images in the

folder or on the card will be protected.

To cancel the image protection, select

[

Unprotect all images in folder

] or

[

Unprotect all images on card

3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card

If you format the card (p.64), the protected images will also be erased.

Movies can also be protected.

Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase

function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the

protection.

If you erase all the images (p.379), only the protected images will

remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images

all at once.

378

You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or

erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.376) will not be erased.

Play back the image to be erased.

Press the <L> button.



The Erase menu will appear.

Erase the image.



Select [

Erase

], then press <

>. The

image displayed will be erased.

By adding checkmarks [

] to the images to be erased, you can erase

multiple images at once.

Select [Erase images].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Erase

images

], then press <

Erasing Images

Erasing a Single Image

Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no

longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images

from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing an image shot in

RAW+JPEG will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.

3 Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch

379

Erasing Images

Select [Select and erase images].



Select [

Select and erase images

then press <



An image will be displayed.

Select the images to be erased.



Turn the <

> dial to select the

image to be erased, then press



A checkmark [

] will be displayed on

the upper left of the screen.



By pressing the <

> button, you

can select images from a three-image

display. To return to the single-image

display, press the <

> button.



To select another image to be erased,

repeat step 3.

Erase the image.



Press the <

> button and select

[



The selected images will be erased at

once.

You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When

[

1: Erase images

] is set to [

All images in folder

] or [

All images on

card

], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.

3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card

To erase all images including protected images, format the card (p.64).

380

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded

on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image

selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one

batch or give the print order to a photofinisher.

You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file number imprinting.

The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They

cannot be set individually for each image.)

Select [Print order].



Under the [

] tab, select [

order

], then press <

Select [Set up].

Set the option as desired.



Set the [

Print type

], [

Date

], and [

File

No.



Select the option to be set, then press

>. Select the desired setting,

then press <

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Setting the Printing Options

381

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Exit the setting.



Press the <

> button.



The print order screen will reappear.



Next, select [

Sel.Image

], [

], or

[

All image

] to order the images to be

printed.

Print type

KStandard Prints one image on one sheet.

LIndex Multiple thumbnail images are printed on

one sheet.

LBoth Prints both the standard and index prints.

Date On [On] imprints the recorded date on the print.

Off

File number On [On] imprints the file number on the print.

Off

[

Print type

][

Date

][

File No.

]

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

382

RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered.

Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may

not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.

With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]

at the same time.

When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications

have been set. It cannot be printed with the specified print order if you

just extract images from the card and try to print them.

Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to

print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction

manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about

compatibility when ordering prints.

Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a

different camera and then try to specify a print order. All the print orders

may be overwritten inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be

possible, depending on the image type.

You can send images to a wireless compatible printer supporting PictBridge

(Wireless LAN) and print them. For details, refer to the Wireless Function

Instruction Manual.

383

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)



Sel.Image

Select and order images one by one.

By pressing the <

> button, you can

select images from a three-image

display. To return to the single-image

display, press the <

> button.

Press the <

> button to save the

print order to the card.

[Standard] [Both]

Press the <

> <

> keys to set the

number of copies to be printed for the

displayed image.

[Index]

Press <

> to add a checkmark to the

box [

]. The image will be included in

the index print.



Select [

Mark all in folder

] and select the folder. A print order for one

copy of all the images in the folder will be specified. If you select

[

Clear all in folder

] and select the folder, the print order for that

folder will all be canceled.



All image

If you select [

Mark all on card

], one copy of all the images on the

card will be set for printing. If you select [

Clear all on card

], the print

order will be cleared for all the images on the card.

Print Ordering

Quantity

Total images selected

Index icon

Checkmark

Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order

even if you set [Byn] or [All image].

When using a printer supporting PictBridge, print no more than 400

images for one print order. If you specify more than this, all the images

may not be printed.

384

You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When

you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer,

the specified images will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function

is useful for ordering photobooks online.

Select [Photobook Set-up].



Under the [

] tab, select

[

Photobook Set-up

], then press

Select [Select images].



An image will be displayed.



To display the three-image display,

press the <

> button. To return to

the single-image display, press the

> button.

Select the image to be specified.



Turn the <

> dial to select the

image to be specified, then press



Repeat this step to select another

image. The number of images that

have been specified will be displayed

on the upper left of the screen.



To cancel the image specification,

press <

> again.

Specifying Images for a Photobook

Specifying One Image at a Time

385

Specifying Images for a Photobook

You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

When [

1: Photobook Set-up

] is set

to [

All images in folder

] or [

All images

on card

], all the images in the folder or

on the card will be specified.

To cancel the image specification, select

[

Clear all in folder

] or [

Clear all on

card

Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card

RAW images and movies cannot be specified.

Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another

camera for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings

may be overwritten.

386

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to

view.

Select [LCD brightness].



Under the [

] tab, select [

LCD

brightness

], then press <

Adjust the brightness.



While referring to the gray chart,

press the <

> <

> keys, then press

Changing Image Playback Settings

3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness

To check the image’s exposure, referring to the histogram is recommended

(p.352).

387

Changing Image Playback Settings

Vertical images are rotated automatically so they

are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD

monitor and on the computer instead of

horizontally. You can change the setting for this

feature.

Select [Auto rotate].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Auto

rotate

], then press <

Set the image rotation.



Select the desired setting, then press



The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both

the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.



The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer.



Off

The vertical image is not automatically rotated.

3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images

Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation

was [Off]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [On] for playback.

Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be

automatically rotated for the image review.

If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the

image may not be rotated automatically for playback.

If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen,

it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image. Using

the EOS software is recommended.

388

389

Post-Processing

Images

You can process RAW images, resize or crop JPEG

images, and apply a Creative filter.



The

icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that

the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (

The camera may not be able to process images taken with

another camera.

Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be

performed if the camera is set for multiple exposures or when

it is connected to a computer via an interface cable.

390

You can process

images with the camera and save them as JPEG

images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply

different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images

from it.

Note that

and

images cannot be processed with the

camera.

Use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.512) to

process those images.

Select [RAW image processing].



Under the [

] tab, select [

RAW

image processing

], then press

1

images will be displayed.

Select an image.



Turn the <

> dial to select the

image you want to process.



By pressing the <

> button, you

can switch to the index display and

select an image.

Process the image.



Press <

> to make the RAW

processing options appear in a while

(p.392).



Press the <

> <

> keys

to select an option, then turn the

> dial to change the setting.



The displayed image will reflect such

settings as “Brightness adjustment”,

“White balance”, etc.



To return to the image settings at the

time of shooting, press the <

button.

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

391

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

Displaying the setting screen



Press <

> to display the setting

screen. Turn the <

> or <

> dial

to change the setting. Press <

> to

finalize the setting and return to the

screen in step 3.

Save the image.



Select [

] (Save), then press <



Select [

] to save the image.



Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [



To process another image, repeat

steps 2 to 4.

You can magnify the image by pressing the <

> button in step 3. The

magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of [

Image quality

]

set in [

RAW image processing

]. With <

>, you can scroll around the

magnified image.

To cancel magnified view, press the <

> button.

Frame lines indicating the shooting area will be displayed on images

shot with the aspect ratio (p.146) set to [

4:3

], [

16:9

], or [

1:1

]. JPEG

images generated from RAW images will be saved with the set aspect

ratio.

Magnified View

Images with Aspect Ratio Setting

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

392

P

Brightness adjustment

You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop

increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.

Q

White balance (p.162)

You can select the white balance. If you select [

] and press the

> button, you can select [

Auto: Ambience priority

] or [

Auto:

White priority

]. If you select [

] and press the <

> button, you

can set the color temperature. The displayed image will reflect the

setting’s effect.

R

Picture Style (p.154)

You can select the Picture Style. By pressing the <

> button,

you can adjust the sharpness, contrast, and other parameters. The

displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.

S

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.169)

You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. The displayed image will

reflect the setting’s effect.

T

High ISO speed noise reduction (p.170)

You can set the noise reduction for high ISO speeds. The displayed

image will reflect the setting’s effect. If the effect is difficult to discern,

magnify the image (p.391).

73

Image quality (p.142)

You can set the image quality when generating an image in JPEG

format.

RAW Image Processing Options

393

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

U

Color space (p.181)

You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD

monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the

image will hardly be perceptible when either color space is set.

V

Peripheral illumination correction (p.175)

A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the

lens characteristics can be corrected. If [

Enable

] is set, the

corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern,

magnify the image (p.391) and check the four corners. The

peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera will be less

pronounced than that applied with the Digital Photo Professional

(EOS software) at maximum correction amount. If the effects of

correction are not apparent, use Digital Photo Professional to apply

the peripheral illumination correction.

W

Distortion correction

Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If

[

Enable

] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image

periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.

Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the

sharpness with the Picture Style’s [

Sharpness

] parameter setting as

necessary.

X

Chromatic aberration correction (p.176)

Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline) due

to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [

Enable

] is set, the

corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern,

magnify the image (p.391).

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

394

Peripheral Illumination Correction, Distortion Correction, and

Chromatic Aberration Correction

To perform peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, and

chromatic aberration correction, the correction data of the lens used is

necessary. If you cannot apply correction when processing RAW images in

the camera, use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.512) to register the correction

data to the camera.

Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the

same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional.

When processing images with [Distortion correction] set to [Enable],

AF point display information (p.352) or Dust Delete Data (p.405) will not

be appended to the image.

395

You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it

as a new image. Resizing an image is possible with JPEG

images.

JPEG

and RAW images cannot be resized.

Select [Resize].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Resize

then press <



An image will be displayed.

Select an image.



Turn the <

> dial to select the

image you want to resize.



By pressing the <

> button, you

can switch to the index display and

select an image.

Select the desired image size.



Press <

> to display the image

sizes.



Select the desired image size, then

press <

Save the image.



Select [

] to save the resized

image.



Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [



To resize another image, repeat steps

2 to 4.

Resizing JPEG Images

Target sizes

Resizing JPEG Images

396

Resize Options by Original Image Size

The image sizes by aspect ratios are shown in the table below.

Original Image Size Available Resize Settings

4a b c

3kkkk

4kkk

akk

Image Sizes

Image

Quality

Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)

3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1

43984x2656

(

10.6 megapixels

)

3552x2664

(9.5 megapixels)

3984x2240*

(8.9 megapixels)

2656x2656

(7.1 megapixels)

a2976x1984

(5.9 megapixels)

2656x1992

(5.3 megapixels)

2976x1680*

(5.0 megapixels)

1984x1984

(3.9 megapixels)

b1920x1280

(2.5 megapixels)

1696x1280*

(2.2 megapixels)

1920x1080

(2.1 megapixels)

1280x1280

(1.6 megapixels)

c720x480

(

0.35 megapixels

)

640x480

(

0.31 megapixels

)

720x408*

(

0.29 megapixels

)

480x480

(

0.23 megapixels

)

The items marked with an asterisk do not exactly match the indicated aspect

ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.

397

You can crop a JPEG image and save it as another image.

JPEG

and RAW images cannot be cropped.

JPEG images shot with

RAW+JPEG can be cropped.

Select [Cropping].



Under the [

] tab, select

[

Cropping

], then press <



An image will be displayed.

Select an image.



Turn the <

> dial to select the

image you want to crop.



By pressing the <

> button, you

can switch to the index display and

select an image.

Set the cropping frame size,

aspect ratio, position, and

orientation.



Press <

> to display the cropping

frame.



The image area within the cropping

frame will be cropped.

Changing the Cropping Frame Size



Press the <

> or <

> button.



The cropping frame size will change. The smaller the cropping

frame, the larger the image magnification will be.

Changing the Aspect Ratio



Turn the <

> dial.



Cropping frame aspect ratio will change to [

3:2

], [

16:9

], [

4:3

], or

[

1:1

Cropping JPEG Images

398

Moving the Cropping Frame



Press the <

> <

> or <

> <

> keys.



The cropping frame will move up, down, left, or right.



You can also touch the frame and drag it to the desired position.

Switching the Orientations of the Cropping Frame



Press the <

> button.



The cropping frame will switch between the vertical and horizontal

orientations. This also enables you to crop a horizontally shot image

to look as if it was shot in vertical orientation.

Check the image area to be

cropped.



Press the <

> button.



The image area to be cropped will be

displayed.



To return to the original display, press

the <

> button again.

Save the image.



Press <

> and select [

] to save

the cropped image.



Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [



To crop another image, repeat steps 2

to 5.

Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again. In addition,

you cannot resize it or apply a Creative filter.

AF point display information (p.352) and Dust Delete Data (p.405) will

not be appended to the cropped images.

When [x3: Playback grid] is set (p.347), you can keep the grid displayed

while setting the cropping.

399

You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a

new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,

Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect.

Select [Creative filters].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Creative

filters

], then press <



An image will be displayed.

Select an image.



Turn the <

> dial to select the

image you want to apply a filter to.



By pressing the <

> button, you

can switch to the index display and

select an image.

Select a filter.



When you press <

>, the types of

Creative filters will be displayed

(p.400).



Select a filter, then press <



The image will be displayed with the

effects of the filter applied.

Adjust the filter effect.



Adjust the filter effect, then press



For the Miniature effect, press the

> <

> keys to move the white

frame to where you want the image to

look sharp, then press <

Applying Creative Filters

400

Save the image.



Select [

] to save the image.



Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [



To apply a filter to another image,

repeat steps 2 to 5.

G

Grainy B/W

Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the black-

and-white effect by adjusting the contrast.

W

Soft focus

Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness

by adjusting the blur.

Creative Filter Characteristics

When shooting 1+JPEG images, the Creative filter will be applied to

the 1 image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image.

When shooting 41+JPEG or 61+JPEG images, the Creative filter

will be applied to the JPEG image.

If an aspect ratio was set for a 1 image and the filter effect is applied

to it, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that is set.

Dust Delete Data (p.405) will not be appended to images with Fish-eye

effect applied.

401

Applying Creative Filters

X

Fish-eye effect

Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type

distortion.

Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along

the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect will

magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may

degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Set the filter

effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.

Y

Art bold effect

Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more

three-dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note

that subjects such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered

with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or noise will become

more noticeable.

Z

Water painting effect

Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You

can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that

some scenes including night scenes or low-light scenes may not be

rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or noise

will become more noticeable.

H

Toy camera effect

Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a unique color tone that

makes it look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the

color cast by adjusting the color tone.

c

Miniature effect

Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks

sharp. In step 4, if you press the <

> button (or tap on [

] at

the screen’s bottom), you can switch between the white frame’s

vertical and horizontal orientations.

402

403

Sensor Cleaning

The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit to

automatically shake off dust adhered to the image

sensor’s front layer (low pass filter).

The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the

image so that the dust spots remaining can be deleted

automatically by Digital Photo Professional (EOS

software, p.512).

Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor

Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases

lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of

the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor

cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is

recommended.

Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating, you can

press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start

shooting immediately.

404

Whenever you set the power switch to <

> or <

>, the Self

Cleaning Sensor Unit is activated to automatically shake off the dust on

the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this

operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning

manually, or disable it.

Select [Sensor cleaning].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Sensor

cleaning

], then press <

Select [Clean nowf].



Select [

Clean now

], then press



Select [



The screen will indicate that the

sensor is being cleaned. (A small

sound may be heard.) Although there

will be a shutter release sound during

the cleaning, no picture is taken.



In step 2, select [

Auto cleaning

] and set it to [

Disable



The sensor cleaning will no longer be performed when you set the

power switch to <

> or <

Automatic Sensor Cleaning

Cleaning the Sensor Now

Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning

For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed

upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.

Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.

Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]

option remains disabled temporarily.

405

Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust

that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust

still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for

erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital

Photo Professional (EOS software, p.512) to erase the dust spots

automatically.



Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.



Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.



Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <

> and set the focus to

infinity (

). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to

face toward you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

Select [Dust Delete Data].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Dust

Delete Data

], then press <

Select [OK].



After the automatic self-cleaning of

the sensor is performed, a message

will appear. Although there will be a

shutter release sound, during the

cleaning, no picture is taken.

Appending Dust Delete Data

Preparation

Obtaining the Dust Delete Data

Appending Dust Delete Data

406

Shoot a solid-white object.



At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.

- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a

patternless, solid-white object and

take a picture.



The picture will be taken in aperture-

priority AE mode at an aperture of

f/22.



Since the image will not be saved, the

data can still be obtained even if there

is no card in the camera.



When the picture is taken, the camera

will start collecting the Dust Delete

Data. When the Dust Delete Data is

obtained, a message will appear.



If the data is not obtained

successfully, an error message will

appear. Follow the “Preparation”

procedure on the preceding page,

then select [

]. Take the picture

again.

After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG

and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is

recommended to update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.

For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software,

p.512) to erase dust spots, refer to the Digital Photo Professional

Instruction Manual.

The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly

affects the image file size.

Dust Delete Data

Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the

object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and

affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with Digital Photo Professional (EOS

software).

407

Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can

be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before

cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.

The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be

cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is

recommended.

Select [Sensor cleaning].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Sensor

cleaning

], then press <

Select [Clean manually].

Select [OK].



In a moment, the reflex mirror will

lockup and the shutter will open.



“

CLn

” will blink on the LCD panel.

Clean the sensor.

End the cleaning.



Set the power switch to <

Manual Sensor Cleaning

If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged.

If you use Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately) with AA/R6 batteries,

manual sensor cleaning will not be possible.

For the power source, using DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and AC

Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) is recommended.

Manual Sensor Cleaning

408

When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, [Clean manually] cannot be

selected.

While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the

power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and

image sensor may get damaged.

• Setting the power switch to <2>.

• Removing or inserting the battery.

The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor

with care.

Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush may scratch the

sensor.

Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If

the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or

reflex mirror may get damaged.

Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air

may damage the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and

scratch it.

If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper

will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.

If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the

sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

409

Customizing the

Camera

You can make fine adjustments to various camera

functions to suit your picture-taking preferences with

Custom Functions.

Also, current camera settings can be saved under <w>

<x> positions of the Mode Dial.

The functions explained in this chapter can be set and

work only in the Creative Zone modes.

410

Select [8].

Select the group.



Select C.Fn I, II, or III, then press

Select the Custom Function

number.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the Custom Function number, then

press <

Change the setting as desired.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select

the desired setting (number), then

press <



Repeat steps 2 to 4 if you want to set

other Custom Functions.



At the bottom of the screen, the

current Custom Function settings are

indicated below the respective

function numbers.

Exit the setting.



Press the <

> button.



The screen for step 2 will reappear.

In step 2, select [

Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)

] to clear all the

Custom Function settings.

Setting Custom Functions

Custom Function number

Clearing All Custom Functions

Even if you clear all the Custom Function settings, the [8C.Fn III -4:

Custom Controls] settings will be retained.

411

Custom Functions

C.Fn I: Exposure

A LV

Shooting

k Movie

Shooting

1Exposure level increments p.413 k k

2ISO speed setting increments p.413 kIn a

3 Bracketing auto cancel p.413 k

4Bracketing sequence p.414 k

5Number of bracketed shots p.414 k

6 Safety shift p.415 k

C.Fn II: Autofocus

A LV

Shooting

k Movie

Shooting

1 Tracking sensitivity p.416

2Acceleration/deceleration tracking p.417

3AF point auto switching p.417

4 AI Servo 1st image priority p.418

5AI Servo 2nd image priority p.418

6AF-assist beam firing p.419 k*

7 Lens drive when AF impossible p.419

8Select AF area selection mode p.420

9AF area selection method p.420

10 Orientation linked AF point p.421

11 Initial AF point, o AI Servo AF p.422

12 Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking p.422

13 AF point selection pattern p.423

14 AF point display during focus p.423

15 Viewfinder display illumination p.424

16 AF Microadjustment p.424

* When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used.

Shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV) shooting or

movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)

Custom Functions

412

C.Fn III: Operation/Others

A LV

Shooting

k Movie

Shooting

1Warnings z in viewfinder p.425

2Dial direction during Tv/Av p.425 k k

3 Retract lens on power off p.426 kk

4Custom Controls p.426 Depends on setting

413

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn I: Exposure

C.Fn I -1 Exposure level increments

0: 1/3-stop

1: 1/2-stop

Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure

compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is

effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine

increments than 1/3-stop increments.

C.Fn I -2 ISO speed setting increments

0: 1/3-stop

You can set the ISO speed manually in 1/3-stop increments.

1: 1-stop

You can set the ISO speed manually in 1-stop increments.

C.Fn I -3 Bracketing auto cancel

0: On

When you set the power switch to <

>, the AEB and white

balance bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be

canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie

shooting.

1: Off

The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be

canceled even if you set the power switch to <

>. (If the flash

is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting, AEB will be

canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.)

When [1: 1/2-stop] is set, the exposure level will be displayed in the

viewfinder and on the LCD panel as shown below.

Even if [1: 1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop

increments when ISO Auto is set.

Custom Function Settings

414

C.Fn I -4 Bracketing sequence

The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence

can be changed.

0: 0

1: -

2: +

C.Fn I -5 Number of bracketed shots

The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can

be changed from the default 3 shots to 2, 5, or 7 shots.

When [

Bracketing sequence: 0

] is set, the bracketed shots will be

taken as shown in the table below.

0: 3 shots

1: 2 shots

2: 5 shots

3: 7 shots

AEB White Balance Bracketing

B/A Direction M/G Direction

0 : Standard

exposure 0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance

- : Decreased

exposure - : Blue bias - : Magenta bias

+ : Increased

exposure + : Amber bias + : Green bias

(1-stop/step increments)

1st Shot 2nd

Shot

3rd

Shot

4th

Shot

5th

Shot

6th

Shot

7th

Shot

0: 3 shots Standard (0) -1 +1

1: 2 shots Standard (0) ±1

2: 5 shots Standard (0) -2 -1 +1 +2

3: 7 shots Standard (0) -3 -2 -1 +1 +2 +3

If [1:2 shots] is set, you can select the + or - side when setting the AEB

range. With WB bracketing, the 2nd shot will be adjusted toward the minus

direction for either B/A or M/G (toward Blue and Magenta).

415

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn I -6 Safety shift

0: Disable

1: Shutter speed/Aperture

Takes effect in the <

> shutter-priority AE and <

> aperture-

priority AE modes. If the subject brightness changes and the

standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure

range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected

setting to obtain the standard exposure.

2: ISO speed

Works in the <

> Program AE, <

> shutter-priority AE, and

> aperture-priority AE modes. If the subject brightness

changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the

autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the

manually set ISO speed to obtain the standard exposure.

Under [z2: ISO speed settings], even if [Range for stills] or [Min.

shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will

override it if the standard exposure cannot be obtained.

The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO

speed will be determined by the [Auto range] setting (p.152). However, if

the manually set ISO speed exceeds the [Auto range], the safety shift

will take effect up or down to the manually set ISO speed.

Safety shift will take effect if necessary even when flash is used.

Custom Function Settings

416

C.Fn II: Autofocus

C.Fn II -1 Tracking sensitivity

Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity during

AI Servo AF when an obstacle cuts across

the AF points or when the AF points stray

from the subject.

Default setting suited for most subjects. Suitable for moving

subjects in general.

Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1

The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an

obstacle cuts across the AF points or if the subject strays from the

AF points. The -2 setting makes the camera keep tracking the

target subject longer than the -1 setting.

However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take

slightly longer to switch and focus on the target subject.

Responsive: +2 / Responsive:+1

The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different

distances that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when

you want to always focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting is

more responsive than the +1 setting when focusing on the next

subject.

However, the camera will be more prone to focus on an

unintended subject.

[Tracking sensitivity] is the feature named [AI Servo tracking sensitivity]

in the EOS-1D Mark III/IV, EOS-1Ds Mark III, and EOS 7D.

417

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn II -2 Acceleration/deceleration tracking

This sets the tracking sensitivity for moving

subjects whose speed can momentarily

change dramatically by starting or stopping

suddenly, etc.

Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in

moving speed).

+2 / +1:

Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden

acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving

subject’s speed suddenly changes dramatically, the camera continues

to focus on the target subject. For example, for an approaching

subject, the camera becomes less prone to focus behind it to avoid

subject blur. For a subject stopping suddenly, the camera becomes

less prone to focus in front of it. Setting +2 can track dramatic changes

in the moving subject’s speed better than with +1.

However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight movements

of the subject, the focusing may be unstable momentarily.

C.Fn II -3 AF point auto switching

This sets the switching sensitivity of the AF

points as they track the subject moving

dramatically up, down, left, or right.

This setting takes effect when the AF area

selection mode is set to Zone AF (manual

selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual

selection of zone), or 45-point automatic

selection AF.

Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.

+2 / +1:

Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or right and

moves away from the AF point, the camera switches its focus to neighboring

AF points to continue focusing on the subject. The camera switches to the

AF point deemed most likely to focus on the subject based on the subject’s

continual movement, contrast, etc. Setting +2 makes the camera more prone

to switch the AF point than with +1.

However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of field or if the subject

is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with the wrong AF point.

Custom Function Settings

418

C.Fn II -4 AI Servo 1st image priority

You can set the AF operation

characteristics and shutter-release timing

for the first shot with AI Servo AF.

Equal priority:

Equal priority is given to focusing and shutter release.

Release priority

Pressing the shutter button takes the picture immediately even if

focus has not been achieved. Useful when you want to give priority

to capturing the image rather than achieving focus.

Focus priority

Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is achieved.

Useful when you want to achieve focus before capturing the shot.

C.Fn II -5 AI Servo 2nd image priority

You can set the AF operation

characteristics and shutter-release timing

during continuous shooting after the first

shot with AI Servo AF.

Equal priority:

Equal priority is given to focusing and continuous shooting speed. In

low light or with low-contrast subjects, shooting speed may slow down.

Shooting speed priority

Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of

achieving focus.

Focus priority

Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous shooting

speed. The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved.

Under shooting conditions which activate anti-flicker shooting (p.179), even

if [Speed] is set, the continuous shooting speed may become slower or the

shooting interval may become irregular.

419

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn II -6 AF-assist beam firing

Enables or disables the built-in flash’s AF-assist beam or the EOS-

dedicated external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.

0: Enable

The AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary.

1: Disable

The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. This prevents the AF-

assist beam from disturbing others.

2: Enable external flash only

If an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam

when necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AF-

assist beam.

3: IR AF assist beam only

When an external Speedlite is attached, only the infrared AF-assist

beam will be emitted. Set this when you do not want the camera to

fire the AF-assist beam as a burst of small flashes.

With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED

light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.

C.Fn II -7 Lens drive when AF impossible

If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera

keep searching for the correct focus or have it stop searching.

0: Continue focus search

1: Stop focus search

If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be

achieved, the lens drive stops. This prevents the lens from

becoming grossly out of focus due to focus searching.

If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set

to [Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist

beam will not be emitted.

Super telephoto lenses, etc., with a wide focusing drive range can

become grossly out of focus during focus search, taking more time to

achieve focus next time. Setting [1: Stop focus search] is

recommended.

Even if [0: Continue focus search] is set, focus search may not be

performed when a wide-angle lens is used.

Custom Function Settings

420

C.Fn II -8 Select AF area selection mode

You can limit the selectable AF area selection modes to suit your

shooting preferences. Select the desired selection mode and press

> to add a checkmark [

]. Then select [

] to register the

setting.

Manual selection:1 pt AF

You can select one AF point.

: Manual select.:Zone AF

The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing.

: Manual select.:Large Zone AF

The AF area is divided into three focusing zones for focusing.

: Auto selection:45 pt AF

The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used for focusing.

C.Fn II -9 AF area selection method

You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.

AF area selection button

After you press the <

> or <

> button, each time you press the

> button, the AF area selection mode changes.

Main Dial

After you press the <

> or <

> button, turning the <

> dial

changes the AF area selection mode.

The [X] mark cannot be deleted from [Manual selection:1 pt AF].

If the attached lens belongs to group H (p.131), you can only select

[Manual selection:1 pt AF].

When [1: S 9 Main Dial] is set, use <9> to move the AF point

horizontally.

421

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn II -10 Orientation linked AF point

You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode + AF point

separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.

0: Same for both vertical/horizontal

The same AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF

point (or zone) are used for both vertical shooting and horizontal

shooting.

1: Separate AF pts: Area+pt

The AF area selection mode and AF point (or zone) can be set

separately for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical

with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at

the bottom).

When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF

point (or zone) for each of the three camera orientations, they will

be registered for the respective orientation. Whenever you change

the camera orientation during shooting, the camera will switch to

the AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or

zone) set for that orientation.

2: Separate AF pts: Pt only

The AF point can be set separately for each camera orientation (1.

Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical

with the camera grip at the bottom). While using the same AF area

selection mode, the AF point will switch automatically for the

respective camera orientation.

When you manually select the AF point for each of the three

camera orientations, it will be registered for the respective

orientation. During shooting, the AF point will switch to the

manually-selected one depending on the camera orientation. Even

if you change the AF area selection mode to Manual selection:1 pt

AF, the AF point set for the respective orientation will be retained.

If you change the AF area selection mode to Zone AF (manual

selection of zone) or Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone),

the zone will switch to the manually-selected one depending on

the camera orientation.

If you set this and later attach a lens from a different AF group (p.128-131,

particularly Group H), the setting may be cleared.

Custom Function Settings

422

C.Fn II -11 Initial AF Point, o AI Servo AF

You can set the AI Servo AF’s starting AF point for when the AF area

selection mode is set to Auto selection: 45 pt AF.

0: Auto

The AF point which AI Servo AF starts with is set automatically to

suit the shooting conditions.

1: Initial

AF pt selected

AI Servo AF will start with the manually-selected AF point when

the AF operation is set to AI Servo AF and the AF area selection

mode is set to Auto selection: 45 pt AF.

2: Manual

AF pt

If you switch from Manual selection:1 pt AF to Auto selection: 45 pt

AF, AI Servo AF will start with the AF point that was manually

selected before the switch. Convenient if you want AI Servo AF to

start with the AF point that was selected before the AF area

selection mode was switched to Auto selection: 45 pt AF.

C.Fn II -12 Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking

Use this function to autofocus by recognizing colors equivalent to skin

tones. This function works when the AF area selection mode is set to

Zone AF (manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection

of zone), or 45-point automatic selection AF.

0: Enable

The camera selects AF points automatically based on AF

information and information on colors equivalent to skin tones.

In One-Shot AF mode, focusing on a still human subject in the AF

area is made easier.

In AI Servo AF mode, focusing on a human subject in the AF area

is made easier. If no skin tones can be detected, the nearest

subject will be focused on. Once focus is achieved, AF points are

automatically selected so that the camera continues to focus on

the color of the area it focused on first.

1: Disable

AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information.

When [2: Manual S AF pt] is set, AI Servo AF will start with the zone that

corresponds to the manually selected AF point, even if you switch AF area

selection mode to Zone AF (manual selection of zone) or Large Zone AF

(manual selection of zone).

423

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn II -13 AF point selection pattern

During manual AF point selection, the selection can either stop at the

outer edge or it can cycle around to the opposite side.

This works with any AF area selection mode other than 45-point

automatic selection AF (with AI Servo AF enabled).

0: Stops at AF area edges

Useful if you often use an AF point along the edge.

1: Continuous

Instead of stopping at the outer edge, the selection of AF point

continues to the opposite side.

C.Fn II -14 AF point display during focus

You can set whether or not to display the AF point(s) in the following

cases: 1. when selecting the AF point(s), 2. when the camera is ready

to shoot (before AF operation), 3. during AF operation, and 4. when

focus is achieved.

0: Selected (constant)

The selected AF point(s) is always displayed.

1: All (constant)

All the AF points are always displayed.

2: Selected (pre-AF, focused)

The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1, 2, and 4.

3: Selected (focused)

The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1 and 4.

4: Disable display

For 2, 3, and 4, the selected AF point(s) will not be displayed.

With setting [0: Enable], focusing will take slightly longer than with

setting [1: Disable].

Even with setting [0: Enable], the expected result may not be obtained

depending on the shooting conditions and subject.

Under light so low that the flash emits the AF-assist beam automatically,

AF points are selected automatically based only on AF information. (The

AF will not use information on colors equivalent to skin tones.)

If [2: Selected (pre-AF, focused)] or [3: Selected (focused)] is set, the AF

point will not be displayed even when focus is achieved with AI Servo AF.

Custom Function Settings

424

C.Fn II -15 Viewfinder display illumination

You can set whether or not the AF points in the viewfinder will light up

in red when focus is achieved.

0: Auto

The AF points automatically light up in red under low light.

1: Enable

The AF points light up in red regardless of the ambient light level.

2: Disable

The AF points do not light up in red.

When you press the <

> button with [

0: Auto

] or [

1: Enable

] set, you

can set whether the AF point lights up in red (blink) during AI Servo AF.

AF point during AI Servo AF

OFF: Non illuminated

The AF points will not light up during AI

Servo AF.

ON: Illuminated

The AF points used for focusing light up in

red during AI Servo AF. They are also

illuminated during continuous shooting.

This function will not work if [

VF display

illumination

] is set to [

2: Disable

C.Fn II -16 AF Microadjustment

You can make fine adjustments for the AF’s point of focus. For details,

see page 427.

When you press the <S> or button, the AF points will be

illuminated in red regardless of this setting.

The aspect ratio lines (p.146), and the electronic level, grid, and flicker

detection set with [52:Viewfinder display] will also light up in red.

425

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn III: Operation/Others

C.Fn III -1 Warnings z in viewfinder

When any of the following functions are set, the <

> icon can be

displayed on the viewfinder’s bottom right (p.29). The <

> icon will

also appear on the shooting function settings display (p.55).

Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear,

press <

> to add a checkmark [

], then select [

When monochrome

is set:

If the Picture Style is set to [

Monochrome

] (p.155), the warning

icon will appear.

When WB is corrected:

If white balance correction is set (p.167), the warning icon will

appear.

When

is set:

If [

3: High ISO speed NR

] is set to [

Multi Shot Noise

Reduction

] (p.170), the warning icon will appear.

When HDR is set:

If [

3: HDR Mode

] is set (p.207), the warning icon will appear.

C.Fn III -2 Dial direction during Tv/Av

0: Normal

1: Reverse direction

Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture

can be reversed.

In the <

> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <

> and

> dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning

direction of only the <

> dial will be reversed. The <

> dial’s

turning direction in the <

> mode and the turning direction to set

the exposure compensation in the <

>, <

>, and <

> mode

will be the same.

Custom Function Settings

426

C.Fn III -3 Retract lens on power off

This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven

STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera. You

can set it to retract the extended lens automatically when the camera’s

power switch is set to <

0: Enable

1: Disable

C.Fn III -4 Custom Controls

You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials

according to your preferences. For details, see page 433.

With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.

Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.

With setting [0: Enable], this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s

focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).

427

Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder

shooting. This is called “AF Microadjustment”. Before making the

adjustment, read “General Cautions for AF Microadjustment” on page

432.

Set the adjustment amount manually by repeatedly making

adjustments, shooting, and checking the results until the desired result

is achieved. During AF, regardless of the lens used, the point of focus

will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.

Select [C.Fn II: Autofocus].



Under the [

] tab, select [

C.Fn II:

Autofocus

], then press <

Select [16: AF Microadjustment].

Select [1: All by same amount].

Press the <Q> button.



The [

1: All by same amount

] screen

will appear.

: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus

1: Adjust All by Same Amount

Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment

only if necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent

accurate focusing from being achieved.

: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus

428

Make the adjustment.



Set the adjustment amount. The

adjustable range is ±20 steps.



Setting it toward “-:

” will shift the

point of focus in front of the standard

point of focus.



Setting it toward “+:

” will shift the

point of focus to the rear of the

standard point of focus.



After making the adjustment, press



Select [

1: All by same amount

], then

press <



Press the <

> button to exit.

Check the result of the

adjustment.



Take a picture and play back the

image (p.346) to check the

adjustment result.



If the shooting result comes out with

focus in front of the targeted point,

adjust toward the “+:

” side. If it

comes out with focus behind the

targeted point, adjust toward the

“-:

” side.



If necessary, repeat the adjustment.

If [1: All by same amount] is selected, separate AF adjustment will not be

possible for the wide-angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses.

429

: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus

You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment

in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses.

When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered, the

point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.

Set the adjustment manually by repeatedly making adjustments,

shooting, and checking the results until the desired result is achieved. If

you use a zoom lens, make the adjustment for the wide-angle (W) and

telephoto (T) ends.

Select [2: Adjust by lens].

Press the <Q> button.



The [

2: Adjust by lens

] screen will

appear.

Check and change the lens information.

Checking the Lens Information



Press the <

> button.



The screen will show the lens name

and a 10-digit serial number. When

the serial number is displayed, select

[

] and go to step 4.



If the lens’s serial number cannot be

confirmed, “0000000000” will be

displayed. In this case, enter the

number by following the instructions

on the next page.



Regarding the asterisk “ * ” displayed

in front of some lens serial numbers,

see the next page.

2: Adjust by Lens

Registered number

: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus

430

Entering the Serial Number



Select the digit to be entered, then

press <

> so <

> is displayed.



Enter the number, then press <



After entering all the digits, select

[

Lens Serial Number



In step 3, if “ * ” appears in front of the 10-digit lens serial

number, you can register only one unit of the same lens model.

Even if you enter the serial number, “ * ” will remain displayed.



The lens serial number on the lens may differ from the serial

number displayed on the screen in step 3. This is not a

malfunction.



If the lens serial number includes letters, enter only the numbers.



If the lens serial number is eleven digits or longer, enter only the last

ten digits.



The location of the serial number varies depending on the lens.



Some lenses may not have a serial number inscribed. To register a

lens that has no serial number inscribed, enter any serial number.

If [2: Adjust by lens] is selected and an Extender is used, the

adjustment will be registered for the lens and Extender combination.

If 40 lenses have already been registered, a message will appear. After

you select a lens whose registration is to be erased (overwritten), you

can register another lens.

431

: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus

Make the adjustment.



For a zoom lens, select the wide-

angle (W) or telephoto (T) end.

Pressing <

> will turn off the frame

and make the adjustment possible.



Set the adjustment amount, then

press <

>. The adjustable range is

±20 steps.



Setting it toward “-:

” will shift the

point of focus in front of the standard

point of focus.



Setting it toward “+:

” will shift the

point of focus to the rear of the

standard point of focus.



For a zoom lens, repeat this

procedure and adjust it for the wide-

angle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.



After completing the adjustment,

press the <

> button to return to

the screen in step 1.



Select [

2: Adjust by lens

], then

press <



Press the <

> button to exit.

Check the result of the

adjustment.



Take a picture and play back the

image (p.346) to check the

adjustment result.



If the shooting result comes out with

focus in front of the targeted point,

adjust toward the “+:

” side. If it

comes out with focus behind the

targeted point, adjust toward the

“-:

” side.



If necessary, repeat the adjustment.

Single focal length lens

Zoom lens

: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus

432

When [

Clear all

] appears at the bottom of the screen, pressing the

> button will clear all the adjustments made for [

1: All by same

amount

] and [

2: Adjust by lens

Clearing All AF Microadjustments

When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the

AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments

made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or

telephoto end has been adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for

the intermediate range.

General Cautions for AF Microadjustment

The AF’s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject

conditions, brightness, zoom position, and other shooting conditions.

Therefore, even if you perform AF Microadjustment, focus may still not

be achieved at the suitable position.

The adjustment amount of one stop varies depending on the maximum

aperture of the lens. Keep adjusting, shooting, and checking the focus

repeatedly to adjust the AF’s point of focus.

The adjustment will not be applied to AF during Live View shooting or

movie shooting.

If you clear all the Custom Function settings (p.410), the AF

Microadjustment will be retained. However, the setting will become [0:

Disable].

Notes for AF Microadjustment

It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will

shoot. This will make the adjustment more precise.

Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended.

For making adjustments, shooting at the 73 image-recording quality is

recommended.

433

You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials

according to your preferences.

Select [C.Fn III: Operation/

Others].



Under the [

] tab, select [

C.Fn III:

Operation/Others

], then press

Select [4: Custom Controls].



The Custom Controls screen will

appear.

Select a camera button or dial.



Select a camera button or dial, then

press <



The name of the camera control and

the assignable functions will be

displayed.



The location of the camera control

can be checked in the illustration on

the left side of the screen.

Assign a function.



Select a function, then press <

Exit the setting.



When you press <

> to exit the setting,

the screen in step 3 will reappear.



Press the <

> button to exit.

: Custom Controls

With the screen in step 3 displayed, you can press the <L> button to cancel

the Custom Control settings. Note that the [8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls]

settings will not be canceled even if you select [8: Clear all Custom Func.

(C.Fn)].

: Custom Controls

434

Assignable Functions to Camera Controls

Function Page V r t

aMetering and AF start

436

k k k

bAF stop kk

ONE SHOT

AI SERVO/SERVO

SAF point direct selection

Exposure

qMetering start

437

tAE lock/FE lock k k

AAE lock k k

AAE lock (while button pressed) k

AE lock (hold) k k

dFE lock

438

k k

Set ISO speed (hold button, turn

)

fExposure compensation

(hold button, turnS)

Shutter speed setting in M mode

fAperture setting in M mode

Flash yFlash exposure compensation 438

0/3Flash function settings

Images

gImage quality

439

APicture Style

BWhite balance selection

Operation

hDepth-of-field preview

439

iIS start

MMenu display

jNo function (disabled) kk

435

: Custom Controls

e0*sS T T

k k

k k k

* The AF stop button (0) is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses.

: Custom Controls

436

When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF

are executed.

The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this

function. Useful when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF.

You can switch the AF operation. In One-Shot AF mode, when you hold

down the button to which this function is assigned, the camera switches

to AI Servo AF mode

. In the AI Servo AF mode, the camera switches to

One-Shot AF mode only while you hold down the button. Useful when

you need to keep switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo AF for

a subject that keeps moving and stopping.

* Servo AF mode for Live View shooting.

During metering, you can select an AF point directly with <

> without

pressing the <

> or <

> button.

a: Metering and AF start

b: AF stop

c: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO/SERVO

S: AF point direct selection

This setting is disabled when Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set during Live

View shooting.

437

: Custom Controls

When you press the shutter button halfway, exposure metering is

performed (AF is not performed).

Normal shooting (No flash)

When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the

exposure (AE lock) during the metering. Useful when you want to focus

and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take multiple

shots at the same exposure setting.

With flash

During flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function

will fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).

When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the

exposure (AE lock) during the metering. Useful when you want to focus

and meter the shot separately.

The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you press the shutter

button.

When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the

exposure (AE lock). The AE lock will be maintained until you press the

button again. Useful when you want to focus and meter the shot

separately or when you want to take multiple shots at the same

exposure setting.

q: Metering start

t: AE lock/FE lock

A: AE lock

A: AE lock (while button pressed)

T: AE lock (hold)

: Custom Controls

438

For flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function will

fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).

You can set the ISO speed by holding down <

> and turning the

> dial. If this control is used while ISO Auto is set, manual ISO

speed setting will take effect. If you use this function in the <

> mode,

you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the

current shutter speed and aperture.

You can set the exposure compensation by holding down <

> and

turning the <

> dial. Useful when you want to set exposure

compensation in <

> manual exposure with ISO Auto set.

In manual exposure <

>, you can set the shutter speed with the

> or <

> dial.

In manual exposure <

>, you can set the aperture with the <

> or

> dial.

Press <

> to display the exposure compensation setting screen

(p.230) for the attached (built-in or external) flash unit on the LCD

monitor.

Press <

> to display the flash function setting screen (p.237) on the

LCD monitor.

d: FE lock

e: Set ISO speed (hold button, turnS)

f: Exposure compensation (hold button, turnS)

s: Shutter speed setting in M mode

f: Aperture setting in M mode

y: Flash exposure compensation

0/3: Flash function settings

439

: Custom Controls

Press <

> to display the image-recording quality setting screen

(p.142) on the LCD monitor.

Press <

> to display the Picture Style selection setting screen on the

LCD monitor (p.154).

Press <

> to display the white balance setting screen (p.162) on the

LCD monitor.

When you press the depth-of-field preview button, the aperture will stop

down and you can check the depth of field (p.195).

If you press the button assigned to this function when the lens’s IS

switch is set to <

>, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will operate.

Press <

> to display the menu on the LCD monitor.

Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the

button.

g: Image quality

A: Picture Style

B: White balance selection

h: Depth-of-field preview

i: IS start

M: Menu display

j: No function (disabled)

440

Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom

Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name

the registered menu tabs and press the <

> button to display the

My Menu tab first.

Select [Add My Menu tab].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Add My

Menu tab

], then press <

Select [OK].



The [

MY MENU1

] tab is created.



You can create up to five menu tabs

by repeating steps 1 and 2.

Select [Configure: MY MENU*].



Turn the <

> dial to select

[

Configure

MY MENU*

] (tab for

registering menu items), then press

Registering My Menu

Creating and Adding My Menu Tab

Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)

441

Registering My Menu

Select [Select items to register].



Select the desired item, then press



Select [

] on the confirmation

dialog.



You can register up to six items.



To return to the screen in step 2,

press the <

> button.

You can sort and delete items under the

menu tab, and rename or delete the

menu tab.



Sort registered items

You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select

[

Sort registered items

] and select the item whose order you want to

change. Then press <

>. With [

] displayed, press the <

> <

keys to change the order, then press <



Delete selected items / Delete all items on tab

You can delete any of the registered items. [

Delete selected items

]

deletes one item at a time, and [

Delete all items on tab

] deletes all

registered items.

My Menu Tab Settings

Registering My Menu

442



Delete tab

You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [

Delete

tab

] to delete the [

MY MENU*

] tab.



Rename tab

You can rename the My Menu tab from [

MY MENU*

Select [Rename tab].

Enter text.



Press the <

> button to delete any

unnecessary characters.



Press the <

> button to toggle

between the top and bottom entry

areas.



Press the <

> <

> or <

> <

keys to move the

and select the

desired character. Then press <

to enter it.



By selecting [

] and pressing

>, you can change the input

mode.



To cancel the text entry, press the

> button, then select [

] on

the confirmation screen.



You can enter up to 16 characters.

Exit the setting.



After entering the text, press the

> button, then select [



The name is saved.

443

Registering My Menu

You can delete all My Menu tabs or all

My Menu items you created.



Delete all My Menu tabs

You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select

[

Delete all My Menu tabs

], all the tabs from [

MY MENU1

] to [

MENU5

] will be deleted and the [

] tab will revert to its default.



Delete all items

You can delete all the items registered under the [

MY MENU1

] to

[

MY MENU5

] tabs and keep the tabs. The menu tab(s) will remain.

When [

Delete all items

] is selected, all the items registered under

all the created tabs will be deleted.

Deleting All My Menu Tabs / Deleting All Items

If you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names

renamed with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.

Registering My Menu

444

You can select [

Menu display

] to set the

menu screen that is to appear first when

you press the <

> button.



Normal display

Displays the last displayed menu screen.



Display from My Menu tab

Displays with the [

] tab selected.



Display only My Menu tab

Only the [

] tab is displayed. (The

, and

tabs will not

be displayed.)

Menu Display Settings

445

You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting mode,

menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting

modes under the Mode Dial’s <

> and <

> positions.

Select [Custom shooting mode

(C1, C2)].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Custom

shooting mode (C1, C2)

], then press

Select [Register settings].

mode.



Select the Custom shooting mode to

be registered, then press <



Select [

] on the confirmation dialog.



The current camera settings (p.446)

will be registered under the Mode

Dial’s C* position.

If you change a setting while shooting in the <

> or <

> mode, the

respective Custom shooting mode can be automatically updated to

reflect the changes in settings. To enable this automatic update, in step

2, set [

Auto update set.

] to [

Enable

If you select [

Clear settings

] in step 2, the settings for respective

modes can be reverted to the default settings with no Custom shooting

modes registered.

: Registering Custom Shooting Modes

Automatic Update of Registered Settings

Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes

: Registering Custom Shooting Modes

446



Shooting functions

Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation,

AF area selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode,

Exposure compensation amount, Flash exposure compensation

amount



Menu functions

[

] Image quality, Image review time, Beep, Release shutter

without card, Lens aberration correction, Flash firing, E-TTL II

flash metering, Flash sync speed in Av mode, Red-eye

reduction

[

] Exposure compensation/AEB, ISO speed settings, Auto

Lighting Optimizer, White balance, White balance shift/

bracketing, Color space

[

] Picture Style, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO speed

noise reduction, Highlight tone priority, Multiple exposure

(settings), HDR Mode (settings)

[

] Interval timer, Bulb timer, Anti-flicker shooting, Mirror lockup,

Aspect ratio

[

5 (Live View shooting)

]

Live View shooting, AF method, Touch shutter, Grid display,

Exposure simulation

[

6 (Live View shooting)

]

Silent LV shooting, Metering timer

[

4 (Movie shooting)

]

Movie Servo AF, AF method, Movie recording quality, Digital

zoom, Sound recording, Movie Servo AF speed, Movie Servo

AF tracking sensitivity

[

5 (Movie shooting)

]

Metering timer, Grid display,

button function, Video

snapshot, Time-lapse movie (settings), Remote control shooting

[

] Slide show (settings), Image jump with <

[

] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram

display

Settings To Be Registered

447

: Registering Custom Shooting Modes

[

] File numbering, Auto rotate

[

] Auto power off, LCD brightness, LCD off/on button, Viewfinder

display

[

] Touch control, Auto cleaning,

button display options

[

] Multi function lock

[

] Exposure level increments, ISO speed setting increments,

Bracketing auto cancel, Bracketing sequence, Number of

bracketed shots, Safety shift

[

] Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking, AF

point auto switching, AI Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd

image priority, AF-assist beam firing, Lens drive when AF

impossible, Select AF area selection mode, AF area selection

method, Orientation linked AF point, Initial AF point,

Servo AF, Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking, AF point

selection pattern, AF point display during focus, Viewfinder

display illumination, AF Microadjustment

[

] Dial direction during Tv/Av, Retract lens on power off, Custom

Controls

My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes.

When the Mode Dial is set to <w> or <x>, you cannot select [54:

Clear all camera settings] or [8:Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)].

Even when the Mode Dial is set to <w> or <x>, you can still change

shooting function settings and menu settings.

By pressing the button, you can check which shooting mode is

registered under <w> and <x> (p.450-451).

448

449

Reference

This chapter provides reference information for camera

features, system accessories, etc.

Certification Logo

Select [54: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to

display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other

certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the

camera body, and on the camera’s package.

450

When you press the <

> button

while the camera is ready to shoot, you

can display [

Displays camera settings

[

Electronic level

] (p.72), and [

Displays

shooting functions

] (p.451).

Under the [

] tab, [

button

display options

] enables you to select

the options displayed when the <

button is pressed.



Select the desired display option and

press <

> to add a checkmark [



After completing the selections, select

[

Button Functions

Camera Settings

Note that you cannot remove the [X] for all three display options.

The [Displays camera settings] sample screen is displayed in English

for all languages.

Even if you uncheck the [Electronic level] so it does not appear, it will

still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press

the button.

(p.181)

(p.167-168)

Shooting mode

registered under the

Mode Dial’s

(p.37, 143)

(p.172)

(p.170)

> mode (p.88)

> mode (p.101)

(p.230)

(p.166)

451

Button Functions



Pressing the <

> button enables Quick Control of the shooting

settings (p.56).



When you press the <

>, <

>, or <

button, the setting screen will appear and you can use <

>, <

>, and <

> to set the function.

Shooting Function Settings

Battery level

Shutter speed

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Image-recording

quality

Shooting mode

ISO speed

Possible shots

Wireless signal strength/

Eye-Fi card transmission status

Maximum burst/Number of

remaining multiple exposures

White balance correction

Exposure level

indicator

Aperture

Highlight tone priority

Quick Control icon

Custom Controls

AE lock

White balance

Metering mode

Flash exposure compensation

Multiple exposures/HDR/

Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Drive mode

Exposure

compensation Wi-Fi function

AF point selection

White balance bracketing

GPS acquisition status

AF operation

Picture Style

If you turn off the power while the “Shooting function settings display” screen

is displayed, the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power

again. To cancel this, press the button to exit from “Shooting

function settings display” screen, then turn off the power switch.

452

You can check the condition of the battery you are using on the LCD

monitor. Each Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 has a unique serial number,

and you can register multiple batteries to the camera. When you use

this feature, you can check the registered batteries’ remaining capacity

and operation history.

Select [Battery info.].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Battery

info.

], then press <



The battery info. screen will appear.

Checking the Battery Information

Battery model or household power source

being used.

The battery level indicator (p.42) is

displayed together with the remaining

battery level shown in 1% increments.

The number of shots taken with the current

battery. The number is reset when the

battery is recharged.

Battery’s recharge performance level is

displayed in one of three levels.

(Green): Battery’s recharge

performance is fine.

(Green):

Battery’s recharge performance

is slightly degraded.

(Red) : Purchasing a new battery is

recommended.

Battery position

Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is recommended. If

you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, this camera’s full

performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.

The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movies are not

counted.)

The battery information will also be displayed when Battery Pack LP-

E6N/LP-E6 is used with Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately). If AA/R6

batteries are used, only the remaining battery level will be displayed.

If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the

message.

453

Checking the Battery Information

You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 batteries to the camera. To

each battery.

Press the button.



With the battery info. screen

displayed, press the <

> button.



The battery history screen will

appear.



If the battery is not registered, it will

be grayed out.

Select [Register].



The confirmation dialog will appear.

Select [OK].



The battery will be registered and the

battery history screen will reappear.



The grayed out battery number will

now be displayed in white.



Press the <

> button. The

battery info. screen will reappear.

Registering Batteries to the Camera

The battery cannot be registered if Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold

separately) using AA/R6 batteries is attached or the camera is powered

by AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately).

If six batteries are already registered, [Register] cannot be selected. To

delete unnecessary battery information, see page 455.

Checking the Battery Information

454

It is convenient to label each registered Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6

with their serial numbers, using commercially-available labels.

Write the serial number on a

label.



Write the serial number displayed on

the battery history screen on a label

approx. 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6

in. in size.

Remove the battery and affix the

label.



Set the power switch to <



Open the battery compartment cover

and remove the battery.



Affix the label as shown in the

illustration (on the side with no

electrical contacts).



Repeat this procedure for all of your

batteries so you can easily see the

serial number.

Labeling the Serial Number on the Battery

Serial number

7c400300

Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in

step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the

battery or impossible to turn on the camera.

If you use Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately), the label may peel off

as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery. If it peels off, affix a new

label.

455

Checking the Battery Information

You can check the remaining capacity of any battery (even when not

installed) and also when it was last used.

Look for the serial number.



Match the battery’s serial number on

the battery history screen with the

battery’s serial number label.



You can check the respective

battery’s remaining capacity and the

date when it was last used.

Select [Delete info.].



Follow step 2 on page 453 to select [

Delete info.

], then press

Select the battery information to be deleted.



Select the battery information to be deleted, then press <



[

] will appear.



To delete information for another battery, repeat this procedure.

Press the <L> button.



The confirmation dialog will appear.

Select [OK].



The battery information will be deleted and the screen in step 1

will reappear.

Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery

Serial number Date last used

Battery level

Deleting the Registered Battery Information

456

You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the

DC Coupler DR-E6 and AC Adapter AC-E6N (both sold separately).

Place the cord in the groove.



Insert the DC coupler’s cord carefully

without damaging the cord.

Insert the DC coupler.



Open the battery compartment cover

and open the DC coupler cord hole

cover.



Insert the DC coupler securely until it

locks and put the cord through the

hole.



Close the cover.

Connect the DC coupler’s plug.



Connect the DC coupler’s plug and

the AC adapter’s connector securely.

Connect the power cord.



Connect the power cord as shown in

the illustration.



After using the camera, unplug the

power plug from the power outlet.

Using a Household Power Outlet

DC coupler cord hole

Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC coupler while leaving

the camera’s power switch set to the <1> position.

AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) can also be used.

457

With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can

automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to

an online service via a wireless LAN.

The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on

how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image

transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or

contact the card manufacturer.

The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card

functions (including wireless transfer). In case of a problem

with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer.

Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in

many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card

is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been

approved for use in your area, please check with the card

manufacturer.

Insert an Eye-Fi card

(p.37)

Select [Eye-Fi settings].



Under the [

] tab, select [

Eye-Fi

settings

], then press <



This menu is displayed only when an

Eye-Fi card is inserted into the

camera.

Enable Eye-Fi transmission.



Select [

Eye-Fi trans.

], then press



Select [

Enable

], then press <



If you set [

Disable

], there will be no

automatic transmission even with the

Eye-Fi card inserted (transmission

status icon

Using Eye-Fi Cards

458

Display the connection

information.



Select [

Connection info.

], then press

Check the [Access point SSID:].



Check that an access point is

displayed for [

Access point SSID:



You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s

MAC address and firmware version.



Press the <

> button to exit the

menu.

Take the picture.



The picture is transferred and the

> icon switches from gray (not

connected) to one of the icons below.



For transferred images, [

] is

displayed in the shooting information

display (p.348).

(Gray)

Not connected

: No connection with access point.

(Blinking)

Connecting...

: Connecting to access point.

(Illuminated)

Connected

: Connection to access point

established.

(

)

Transferring...

: Image transfer to access point in

progress.

Transmission status icon

459

Using Eye-Fi Cards

Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards

If [Wi-Fi/NFC] under [51: Wireless communication settings] is set to

[Enable], image transfer with an Eye-Fi card is not possible.

If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card

information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.

Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In

hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are

prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.

If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and

computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.

Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image

transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.

The Eye-Fi card may become hot as it transmits.

The camera’s battery power will be consumed faster.

During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.

If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [Eye-Fi

settings] will not appear. Also, the transmission status icon <H> will not

appear.

460

o: Set automatically k: User selectable

: Not selectable/Disabled

*1: RAW+JPEG or RAW cannot be selected.

*2: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

Still Photo Shooting in Basic Zone Modes:

Function A 7 C8

P C x 6 F G 2 3 4 5

Image quality settings selectable

kkk k kkkk

kkkk

Aspect ratio

ISO speed

Automatically set/Auto

ooo o ooo o o oooo

Manually set

Picture

Style

Automatically set

D D D D D D D D D D D D D

Manual selection

Ambience-based shots

k k kkk k kkkk

Lighting/scene based shots

kkkkk

Background blur

Color tone

k k

White

balance

Auto

QQQQwQQQ Q Q QQQQ

Preset

Custom

Correction/Bracketing

Auto Lighting Optimizer

ooo o ooo o o oooo

Lens

aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction

ooo o ooo o o oooo

Chromatic aberration correction

ooo o ooo o o oooo

Distortion correction

Long exposure noise reduction

High ISO speed noise reduction

ooo o ooo o o oooo

Highlight tone priority

Anti-flicker shooting

ooo o ooo o o oooo

Color

space

sRGB

ooo o ooo o o oooo

Adobe RGB

Metering

mode

Evaluative metering

ooo o o o o o oooo

Center-weighted average metering

Metering mode selection

461

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

*3: AF will be performed using color tracking.

Function A 7 C8

P C x 6 F G 2 3 4 5

AF operation

(Viewfinder

shooting)

One-Shot AF

ooooo

AI Servo AF

AI Focus AF

AF operation

(Live View shooting)

One-Shot AF

oooo oooooo

Servo AF

o o

AF area selection mode

AF point

ooooooooooooo

AF-assist beam

ooo ooooo o

AF Microadjustment

Exposure

Program shift

Exposure compensation

AEB

AE lock

Depth-of-field preview

HDR shooting

Multiple exposure

Interval timer

kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Drive

Single shooting

kkkkkkkkkkkkk

High-speed continuous shooting

kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Low-speed continuous shooting

kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Silent single shooting

kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Silent continuous shooting

kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control

kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control

kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Built-in flash

Automatic firing

k k k o k k

Flash on (Fires at all times)

kkkk kkk

Flash off

kokkko kokoko

Red-eye reduction

kkkk kk k k

FE lock

Flash exposure compensation

Wireless control

External

flash

Flash on (Fires at all times)

ooooooo oooo

Flash off

o o

Function settings

Custom Function settings

Live View shooting

kkkkk kkkkkkk

Quick Control

kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

462

o: Set automatically k: User selectable

: Not selectable/Disabled

*1: RAW+JPEG or RAW cannot be selected.

*2: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.

Still Photo Shooting in Basic Zone Modes: v

Function v

G W X H c Z A B C D

Image quality settings selectable

kkkkkkkkkk

Aspect ratio

ISO speed Automatically set/Auto

oooooooooo

Manually set

Picture Style Automatically set

PPPPPPPPPP

Manual selection

Ambience-based shots

Lighting/scene based shots

Background blur

Color tone

White

balance

Auto

QQQQQQQQQQ

Preset

Custom

Correction/Bracketing

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Lens

aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction

oooooooooo

Chromatic aberration correction

oooooooooo

Distortion correction

Long exposure noise reduction

High ISO speed noise reduction

oooooooooo

Highlight tone priority

Anti-flicker shooting

oooooooooo

Color space sRGB

oooooooooo

Adobe RGB

Metering

mode

Evaluative metering

oo ooooooo

Center-weighted average metering

Metering mode selection

463

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

*3: AF will be performed using color tracking.

Function v

G W X H c Z A B C D

AF operation

(Viewfinder

shooting)

One-Shot AF

AI Servo AF

AI Focus AF

AF operation (Live

View shooting)

One-Shot AF

oooooooooo

Servo AF

AF area selection mode

AF point

oooooooooo

AF-assist beam

oooooooooo

AF Microadjustment

Exposure

Program shift

Exposure compensation

AEB

AE lock

Depth-of-field preview

HDR shooting

Multiple exposure

Interval timer

kkkkkkkkkk

Drive

Single shooting

kkkkkkkkkk

High-speed continuous shooting

kkkk

Low-speed continuous shooting

kkkk

Silent single shooting

kkkkkkkkkk

Silent continuous shooting

kkkk

Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control

kkkkkkkkkk

Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control

kkkkkkkkkk

Built-in flash

Automatic firing

kkkkkk

Flash on (Fires at all times)

kkkkkk

Flash off

kkkkkkoooo

Red-eye reduction

kkkkkk

FE lock

Flash exposure compensation

Wireless control

External

flash

Flash on (Fires at all times)

oooooo

Flash off

oooo

Function settings

Custom Function settings

Live View shooting

kkkkkkkkkk

Quick Control

kkkkkkkkkk

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

464

o: Set automatically k: User selectable

: Not selectable/Disabled

*1: RAW+JPEG or RAW cannot be selected.

*2: Settable only during Live View shooting.

*3: Works only during viewfinder shooting.

Still Photo Shooting in Creative Zone Modes

Function

d s f a F

Image quality settings selectable

kkkkk

Aspect ratio

kkkkk

ISO speed

Automatically set/Auto

kkkkk

Manually set

kkkkk

Picture Style

Automatically set

kkkkk

Manual selection

kkkkk

Ambience-based shots

Lighting/scene based shots

Background blur

Color tone

Creative filters

*1*2

kkkkk

White balance

Auto

kkkkk

Preset

kkkkk

Custom

kkkkk

Correction/Bracketing

kkkkk

Auto Lighting Optimizer

kkkkk

Lens aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction

kkkkk

Chromatic aberration correction

kkkkk

Distortion correction

kkkkk

Long exposure noise reduction

kkkkk

High ISO speed noise reduction

kkkkk

Highlight tone priority

kkkkk

Anti-flicker shooting

kkkkk

Color space

sRGB

kkkkk

Adobe RGB

kkkkk

Metering mode

Evaluative metering

kkkkk

Metering mode selection

kkkkk

465

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

*4: Settable only when ISO Auto is set.

*5: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.

Function

d s f a F

AF operation

(Viewfinder

shooting)

One-Shot AF

kkkkk

AI Servo AF

kkkkk

AI Focus AF

kkkkk

AF operation (Live

View shooting)

One-Shot AF

kkkkk

Servo AF

kkkkk

AF area selection mode

kkkkk

AF point

kkkkk

AF-assist beam

kkkkk

AF Microadjustment

kkkkk

Exposure

Program shift

Exposure compensation

kkk

AEB

kkkk

AE lock

kkk

Depth-of-field preview

kkkkk

HDR shooting

kkkk

Multiple exposure

kkkkk

Interval timer

kkkk

Bulb timer

Drive mode

Single shooting

kkkkk

High-speed continuous shooting

kkkkk

Low-speed continuous shooting

kkkkk

Silent single shooting

kkkkk

Silent continuous shooting

kkkkk

Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control

kkkkk

Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control

kkkkk

Built-in flash

Automatic firing

Flash on (Fires at all times)

kkkkk

Flash off

kkkkk

Red-eye reduction

kkkkk

FE lock

kkkkk

Flash exposure compensation

kkkkk

Wireless control

kkkkk

External flash

Flash on (Fires at all times)

kkkkk

Flash off

kkkkk

Function settings

kkkkk

Custom Function settings

kkkkk

Live View shooting

kkkkk

Quick Control

kkkkk

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

466

o: Set automatically k: User selectable

: Not selectable/Disabled

Movie Shooting

Function

A 7 C8vd s f Fa

ykM

Movie recording sizes selectable

kkkkkkkkkk

Digital zoom

kkkk kkkkk

HDR movie shooting

kkkk

Creative filters

kkkkkk

Video snapshot

kkkk kkkkk

Time-lapse movie

kkkk kkkkk

ISO speed

Automatically set/Auto

oooooooook

Manually set

Picture

Style

Automatically set

DDDDP kkkkk

Manual selection

kkkkk

White

balance

Auto

QQQQQ kkkkk

Preset

kkkkk

Custom

kkkkk

Correction

kkkkk

Auto Lighting Optimizer

oooo kkkkk

Lens

aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction

oooookkkkk

Chromatic aberration correction

oooookkkkk

Distortion correction

High ISO speed noise reduction

oooookkkkk

Highlight tone priority

kkkkk

467

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

*1: Settable only when ISO Auto is set.

*2: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.

Function

A 7 C8vd s f Fa

ykM

Metering mode

oooooooooo

Face+Tracking

kkkkkkkkkk

FlexiZone - Multi

kkkkkkkkkk

FlexiZone - Single

kkkkkkkkkk

Manual focus (MF)

kkkkkkkkkk

Movie Servo AF

kkkkkkkkkk

Exposure

Program shift

Exposure compensation

kkkk

AE lock

kkkk

Depth-of-field preview

Aspect ratio

Sound recording

kkkkkkkkkk

Quick Control

kkkkkkkkkk

468

System Map

Wide Strap

Bundled

Accessories

Battery Pack

LP-E6N*1

Battery Grip

BG-E14

Battery Charger

LC-E6 or LC-E6E

AC Adapter

AC-E6N*2

DC Coupler

DR-E6*2

Car Battery

Charger

CBC-E6

Car Battery

Cable CB-570

Hand Strap E2

Battery Magazine

BGM-E14A

for AA/LR6 batteries

(attached to BG-E14)

Battery Magazine

BGM-E14L

for LP-E6N/LP-E6

(attached to BG-E14)

Leather Case

EH21-L

Eyecup Eb

Rubber Frame Eb

Eyepiece Extender

EP-EX15

Magnifier

MG-Eb

Angle Finder C

E-series Dioptric

Adjustment Lenses

Macro Ring Lite

MR-14EX II

ST-E2 Macro Twin Lite

MT-24EX

270EX II 600EX-RT/

600EX

430EX III-RT/

430EX III

ST-E3-RT

469

System Map

External microphone

SD/SDHC/SDXC

memory card Card reader

Interface Cable

IFC-400PCU (1.3 m/4.3 ft.)

Interface Cable IFC-200U/500U

(1.9 m/6.2 ft.) / (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)

USB port

Computer

Remote Controller Adapter RA-E3

TV/Video

HDMI Cable

HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)

* Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E7 (Ver.2), WFT-E7 cannot be used.

* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.

*2: AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used.

*1: Battery Pack LP-E6 can also be used.

EF-S lenses

EF lenses

GPS Receiver

GP-E2

Remote Switch

RS-60E3

Remote

Controller

RC-6

Connect Station

CS100

Headphones Timer Remote

Controller

TC-80N3

Card slot

470

: Shooting 1

(Red)

Page

* Not selectable in the <8: FG> and <v> modes.

Menu Settings

Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting

Image quality 1

/ 41

/ 61

142

73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c

Image review Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 67

Beep Enable / Touch to n / Disable 66

Release shutter

without card Enable / Disable 38

Lens aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /

Disable

175Chromatic aberration correction: Enable /

Disable

Distortion correction: Disable / Enable

Flash control

Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.

speed in Av mode / Built-in flash settings /

External flash function settings / External flash

C.Fn setting / Clear settings

235

Red-eye reduction Disable / Enable 230

Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.

471

Menu Settings

: Shooting 2

(Red)

Page

* During Live View shooting, exposure compensation can be set up to ±3 stops.

: Shooting 3

(Red)

Exposure

compensation/AEB

1/3- and 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops*

(AEB ±3 stops)

200

201

ISO speed settings ISO speed / Range for stills / Auto range /

Minimum shutter speed for auto 148

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Disable / Low / Standard / High 169

Disabled in M or B modes

White balance

Q (Ambience priority) / Qw (White priority) /

W/E/R/Y/U/D/O/

P (Approx. 2500 - 10000)

162

Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance 164

White balance shift/

bracketing

White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias,

9 levels each 167

White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias,

single-level increments, ±3 levels

Color space sRGB / Adobe RGB 181

Picture Style

DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /

RLandscape / uFine Detail /

SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome /

WUser Def. 1-3

154

Long exposure noise

reduction Disable / Auto / Enable 172

High ISO speed noise

reduction

Disable / Low / Standard / High / Multi Shot

Noise Reduction 170

Highlight tone priority Disable / Enable 174

Dust Delete Data

Obtain data to be used by Digital Photo

Professional (EOS software) to delete dust

spots

405

Multiple exposure

Multiple exposure / Multiple exposure control /

Number of exposures / Continue multiple

exposure

212

HDR Mode Adjust dynamic range / Effect / Continuous

HDR / Auto Image Align 207

Menu Settings

472

: Shooting 4*

(Red)

Page

* In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z2] tab.

: Shooting 5*

(Red)

* In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z3] tab.

: Shooting 6

(Red)

Interval timer Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots) 223

Bulb timer Disable / Enable (Exposure time) 205

Anti-flicker shooting Disable / Enable 179

Mirror lockup Disable / Enable 219

Aspect ratio 3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1 146

Live View shooting Enable / Disable 257

AF method u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /

FlexiZone - Single 276

Touch shutter Disable / Enable 286

Grid display Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n270

Exposure simulation Enable / During e / Disable 271

Silent LV shooting Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable 272

Metering timer 4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /

10 min. / 30 min. 273

473

Menu Settings

: Playback 1

(Blue)

Page

: Playback 2

(Blue)

: Playback 3

(Blue)

Protect images Protect images 376

Rotate image Rotate images 358

Erase images Erase images 378

Print order Specify images to be printed (DPOF) 380

Photobook Set-up Specify images for a photobook 384

Creative filters

Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /

Art bold effect / Water painting effect /

Toy camera effect / Miniature effect

399

RAW image processing Process 1 images 390

Cropping Partially crop JPEG images 397

Resize Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count 395

Rating [OFF] / l / m / n / o / p359

Slide show Playback description / Display time / Repeat /

Transition effect / Background music 369

Image jump w/61 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /

Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating 354

Highlight alert Disable / Enable 351

AF point display Disable / Enable 352

Playback grid Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n347

Histogram display Brightness / RGB 352

Control over HDMI Disable / Enable 374

Menu Settings

474

: Set-up 1

(Yellow)

Page

* For details, refer to the Wireless Function Instruction Manual.

: Set-up 2

(Yellow)

Select folder Create and select a folder 182

File number Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset 184

Auto rotate OnzD / OnD / Off 387

Format card Initialize and erase data on the card 64

Eye-Fi settings Displayed when a commercially-available

Eye-Fi card is inserted 457

Wireless

communication

settings

Wi-Fi/NFC: Disable / Enable

Allow NFC connections

Wi-Fi function:

Transfer images between cameras / Connect

to smartphone / Remote control (EOS Utility) /

Print from Wi-Fi printer / View images on DLNA

devices / Upload to Web service

Send images to smartphone

Nickname

Clear Settings

Auto power off 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. /

30 min. / Disable 66

LCD brightness Adjust the brightness (seven levels) 386

LCD off/on button Remains on / Shutter button 67

Date/Time/Zone

Date (year, month, day) / Time (hour, min., sec.) /

Daylight saving time / Time zone

LanguageKSelect the interface language 46

Viewfinder display

Electronic level: Hide / Show 72

Grid display: Hide / Show 71

Flicker detection: Show / Hide 74

GPS device settings Settings available when the GPS Receiver GP-

E2 (sold separately) is attached -

475

Menu Settings

: Set-up 3

(Yellow)

Page

Video system NTSC / PAL 307

373

Feature guide Enable / Disable 75

Touch control Standard / Sensitive / Disable 63

Battery information

Power / Remaining capacity / Shutter count /

Recharge performance / Battery registration /

Serial number / Battery history

452

Sensor cleaning

Auto cleaningf: Enable / Disable 404

Clean nowf

Clean manually 407

z button display

options

Displays camera settings / Electronic level /

Displays shooting functions 450

z button LV display

options

Live View info switch setting: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 262

Histogram display: Brightness / RGB /

Display size 263

Reset

When using a wireless function or GPS device, be sure to check the

countries and areas of use, and observe the laws and regulations of the

country or region.

Note that when connecting GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) with a

cable, preparations as below are necessary.

- Update the GP-E2’s firmware to Version 2.0.0 or later. (Using the cable

for connection is not possible with the firmware version earlier than

Version 2.0.0.)

- An interface cable (sold separately, p.469) must be used.

When using the GP-E2 attached to the hot shoe, preparations as above

are not necessary. For how to update the GP-E2’s firmware, refer to the

Canon website.

Wireless functions cannot be set if the camera is connected to a

computer, GPS receiver, or another device with an interface cable.

Menu Settings

476

: Set-up 4

(Yellow)

Page

* During firmware updates, the touch screen will be disabled to prevent accidental

operations.

: Custom Functions

(Orange)

: My Menu

(Green)

Multi function lock

Main Dial

Quick Control Dial

Multi-controller

Touch control

Custom shooting mode

(C1, C2)

Dial’s w and x positions 445

Clear all camera

settings Resets the camera to the default settings 68

Display copyright information /

Enter author’s name /

Enter copyright details /

Delete copyright information

186

Certification Logo

Display

Displays some of the logos of the camera’s

certifications 449

zfirmware ver.* For updating the firmware -

C.Fn I: Exposure

Customize camera functions as desired

413

C.Fn II: Autofocus 416

C.Fn III: Operation/

Others 425

Clear all Custom

Functions (C.Fn) Clear all Custom Function settings 410

Add My Menu tab Add My Menu tabs 1-5 440

Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs 443

Delete all items Delete all items under My Menu tabs 1-5 443

Menu display Normal display / Display from My Menu tab /

Display only My Menu tab 444

477

Menu Settings

: Shooting 1

(Red)

Page

* Still photo shooting is not possible during movie shooting even if [Image quality]

menu is displayed during movie shooting.

Movie Shooting

Image quality* 1 / 41 / 61 142

73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c

Image review Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 67

Beep Enable / Touch to n / Disable 66

Release shutter

without card Enable / Disable 38

Lens aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /

Disable 175

Chromatic aberration correction: Enable /

Disable

 Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.

The menu tabs and options displayed will differ between viewfinder

shooting/Live View shooting and movie shooting. Note that the menu

tabs and options displayed in [x1] Playback 1 to [x3] Playback 3,

[51] Set-up 1 to [54] Set-up 4, [8] Custom Functions, and [9] My

Menu are the same as those displayed in viewfinder shooting/Live View

shooting (p.473-476).

Menu Settings

478

: Shooting 2

(Red)

Page

* Settable only for manual exposures.

: Shooting 3

(Red)

Exposure

compensation 1/3- and 1/2-stop increments, ±3 stops 200

ISO speed settings ISO speed* / Range for movies 148

332

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Disable / Low / Standard / High 169

Disabled in M or B modes

White balance

Q (Ambience priority) / Qw (White priority) /

W/E/R/Y/U/D/O/P (Approx. 2500 -

10000)

162

Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance 164

White balance

correction B/A/M/G bias, 9 levels each 167

Picture Style

DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /

RLandscape / uFine Detail / SNeutral

/ UFaithful / VMonochrome / WUser

Def. 1-3

154

High ISO speed noise

reduction Disable / Low / Standard / High 170

Highlight tone priority Disable / Enable 174

Dust Delete Data

Obtain data to be used by Digital Photo

Professional (EOS software) to delete dust

spots

405

479

Menu Settings

: Shooting 4

(Red)

Page

*1: In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z2] tab.

*2: In Basic Zone modes, [Sound recording] will be set to [On/Off].

Movie Servo AF Enable / Disable 326

AF method u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi / FlexiZone -

Single 327

Movie recording quality

MOV / MP4 306

Movie recording size (MOV format):

• 1920x1080

• NTSC: 29.97p / 23.98p

PAL: 25.00p

• ALL-I (For editing)

Movie recording size (MP4 format):

• 1920x1080 / 1280x720

• NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p

PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p

• IPB (Standard) / IPB (Light)

307

Digital zoom Disable / Approx. 3-10x zoom 311

Sound recording

Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable

312

Recording level

Wind filter: Auto / Disable

Attenuator: Disable / Enable

Movie Servo AF speed

When active: Always on / During shooting

329

AF speed: Slow (-7/-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1) /

Standard / Fast (+1/+2)

Movie Servo AF

tracking sensitivity

Locked on (-3/-2/-1) / 0 / Responsive (+1/+2/+3)

330

Menu Settings

480

: Shooting 5

(Red)

Page

*1: In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z3] tab.

Metering timer 4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /

10 min. / 30 min. 331

Grid display Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n331

V button function a/-/q/-/a/k/q/k331

Video snapshot

Video snapshot: Enable / Disable

333

Album settings: Create a new album / Add to

existing album

Show confirm message: Enable/Disable

Time-lapse movie Disable / Enable (Interval / No. of shots / Time

required / Playback time/ Card- time left) 319

Remote control

shooting Disable / Enable 332

481

If a problem occurs with the camera, first consult this Troubleshooting

Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,

contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

If the battery’s remaining capacity is 94% or higher, the battery will not

be recharged (p.452).

Do not use any battery other than a genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-

E6.



If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2) communication

with the battery failed (with a non-Canon battery), the protection circuit

will stop charging, and the charge lamp will blink in orange at a high

speed. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug from the

power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery to the charger. Wait a few

minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the

problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.



If the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger is high,

the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp off). If

the battery temperature becomes high for any reason during charging,

the charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the battery

temperature goes down, the charging will resume automatically.

Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (p.36).

Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.36).

Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.37).

Recharge the battery (p.34).

Troubleshooting Guide

Power-Related Problems

The battery does not recharge.

The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.

The charger’s lamp does not blink.

The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <

Troubleshooting Guide

482



If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the

access lamp will remain on/continue to blink for a few seconds. When the

image recording is completed, the power will turn off automatically.



Do not use any battery other than a genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.

Remove and install the battery again (p.36).

If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.

Use a fully-charged battery (p.34).

The battery performance may have degraded. See [53: Battery info.]

to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.452). If the

battery performance is poor, replace the battery with a new one.

The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following

operations:

• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.

• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.

• Using the LCD monitor frequently.

• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged

period.

• The Eye-Fi card’s communication function is enabled.

Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take

effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.66).

Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will

still turn off after the camera is left idle for approx. 30 min. (The

camera’s power does not turn off.)

The access lamp still lights or blinks

even when the power switch is <2>.

[Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon

logo?] is displayed.

The battery becomes exhausted quickly.

The camera turns off by itself.

483

Troubleshooting Guide

The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses (p.47).

Install a recharged battery in the camera (p.34).

Make sure if the card is properly inserted (p.37).

Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the write/erase position (p.37).

If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to

make space (p.37, 378).

If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode and the focus indicator

<o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the

shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus

manually (p.50, 137).

If a card error message is displayed, see page 39 or 496.

Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in the

AI Servo AF mode or when servo takes effect in AI Focus AF mode

(p.118).

Shooting-Related Problems

The lens cannot be attached.

The viewfinder is dark.

No images can be shot or recorded.

The card cannot be used.

I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.

Troubleshooting Guide

484

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (p.47).

Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.49-50).

If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.

In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter

speed (p.192), set a higher ISO speed (p.148), use flash (p.228, 233),

or use a tripod.

Depending on the attached lens, the number of usable AF points and

patterns varies. The lenses are categorized into eight groups from A to

H. Check which group your lens belongs to. Using a lens in Groups E

to H will have fewer usable AF points (p.130-131).

Regarding lighting up or blinking of the AF points when you press the

<S> button, see page 123.

The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low-light

conditions.

In Creative Zone modes, you can set whether to have the AF points

light up in red when focus is achieved (p.424).

The image is out of focus or blurred.

There are fewer AF points.

The AF point is blinking.

The AF points do not light up in red.

485

Troubleshooting Guide

The continuous shooting speed may become slower depending on the

shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions, brightness, lens, flash use,

temperature, battery type, remaining battery level, shooting function

settings, etc. For details, see page 139.

Depending on the shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus on

the subject. Use FlexiZone - Single or focus manually.

If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the

file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower

than the number listed on page 143.

When [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable], ISO100/125/

160 can be set (p.174).

If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable ISO

speed range will be ISO 200 - ISO 16000 (or up to ISO 12800 for

movie shooting). Even if you expand the settable ISO speed range in

[Range for stills] or [Range for movies], you cannot set expanded

ISO speeds (H).

The continuous shooting speed is slow.

With FlexiZone - Multi, it takes longer to focus.

The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.

ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion

cannot be selected.

Troubleshooting Guide

486

Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Low],

[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure

compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come

out bright (p.169).

When the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the

multiple-exposure image will be recorded in 1 quality (p.218).

If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed

automatically becomes slow (slow-sync shooting) so that both the

subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow

shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in

Av mode] to [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)] (p.236).

In shooting modes (<A> <C> <8: C624>

<v: GWXHcZ>) whose default setting is <a> (Auto built-in

flash firing), the built-in flash will be raised automatically when

necessary.

In the <8: xG> and <v: ABCD> modes, when you

press the shutter button halfway under low-light conditions, the built-in

flash may be raised automatically and emit the AF-assist beam.

Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation,

the image comes out bright.

The multiple-exposure image is shot in 1 quality.

When I use the <f> mode with flash,

the shutter speed becomes slow.

The built-in flash rises by itself.

487

Troubleshooting Guide

If you use the built-in flash too often in too short a period of time, the

flash may stop firing for a while to protect the light-emitting unit.

If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z6:

Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.272).

If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will

always be fired at full output (p.234).

When the external Speedlite’s [Flash metering mode] Custom

Function is set to [TTL] (autoflash), the flash will always be fired at full

output (p.243).

If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, flash

exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the

external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to

0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.

Under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to

[Auto] (p.236).

The built-in flash does not fire.

The external flash does not fire.

The external flash always fires at full output.

Flash exposure compensation cannot be set

for the external Speedlite.

High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.

Troubleshooting Guide

488

The built-in flash’s pop-up mechanism moves slightly. This is normal

and not a malfunction.

If you use flash, the shutter will make two shutter release sounds each

time you shoot (p.257).

It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white

<s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.

If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View

shooting will soon stop automatically (p.290).

It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the red

<E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie shooting will soon

stop automatically (p.343).

If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop

automatically. For cards that can record movies, see page 5. To find

out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website.

If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting

will stop automatically.

The camera makes a noise when it is shaken.

The shutter makes two shutter release

sounds during Live View shooting.

During Live View shooting, a white <s> or

red <E> icon is displayed.

During movie shooting, a red E icon is displayed.

Movie shooting stops by itself.

489

Troubleshooting Guide

In shooting modes other than <a>, the ISO speed is set

automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely set the ISO speed

(p.299).

ISO speed will be set according to the setting for [Range for stills]

during viewfinder shooting and Live View shooting, or that for [Range

for movies] during movie shooting with manual exposure.

If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the

changes in the exposure may be recorded.

Zooming the lens during movie shooting may cause changes in the

exposure regardless of whether the lens’s maximum aperture changes

or not. The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.

If you move the camera to the left or right quickly or shoot a moving

subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more

noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting.

Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be

caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources

during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or

color tone may be recorded. In the <a> mode, a slow shutter speed

may reduce the problem. The problem may be more noticeable in

time-lapse movie shooting.

The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.

The manually set ISO speed changes when

switching to movie shooting.

The exposure changes during movie shooting.

The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.

The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear

during movie shooting.

Troubleshooting Guide

490

If the camera is connected to a computer, GPS receiver, or other

device with an interface cable, wireless functions cannot be set ([51:

Wireless communication settings] will be grayed out). Disconnect

the interface cable before changing any settings.

Refer to the Wireless Function Instruction Manual.

Set the <R> switch downward (lock release, p.54).

Check the [54: Multi function lock] setting (p.54).

Check the [8C.Fn III -4: Custom Controls] setting (p.433).

Check if your finger is blocking the speaker (p.26).

Check if [53: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive]

(p.63).

Wireless Functions

Wireless functions cannot be set.

Operation Problems

I cannot change the setting with the <6>, <5>, <9>,

or touch screen.

A camera button or dial does not work as expected.

During touch screen operations, the beeper suddenly

sounds softer.

Touch screen operation is not possible.

491

Troubleshooting Guide

In Basic Zone modes, certain tabs and menu options are not

displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative Zone mode (p.58).

Under the [9] tab, [Menu display] is set to [Display only My Menu

tab] (p.444).

Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character

will be an underscore (p.181).

It is a movie file (p.185).

If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may

not start from 0001 (p.184).

Make sure the correct date and time are set (p.43).

Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.43).

The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and

time are instead recorded in the image data as shooting information.

When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using

the date and time recorded in the shooting information (p.380).

Display Problems

The menu screen shows fewer tabs and options.

The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).

The file name starts with “MVI_”.

The file numbering does not start from 0001.

The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.

The date and time are not in the image.

Troubleshooting Guide

492

If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the

camera can display, [###] will be displayed (p.360).

In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may become

slower due to the AF point display device’s characteristics. The display

speed will return to normal at room temperature.

If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.

In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow

or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.

[Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in

the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the

<LOCK> position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection

status or disable Eye-Fi transmission (p.457).

[33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.351).

[33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.352).

[###] is displayed.

In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow.

The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.

[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.

Playback Problems

Part of the image blinks in black.

A red box is displayed on the image.

493

Troubleshooting Guide

If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.

376



Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.

If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the

operation sound will also be recorded. Using a commercially-available

external microphone is recommended (p.313).

If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during autoexposure

movie shooting, the recording will stop momentarily until the

brightness stabilizes. In such a case, shoot in <a> mode (p.298).

Make sure the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or

[For PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV set).

Make sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (p.

373

If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created

automatically (p.309).

Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards

may not be correctly recognized. In such a case, connect your camera

to the computer with the interface cable, then transfer the images to

the computer using EOS Utility (EOS software, p.512).

The image cannot be erased.

The movie cannot be played back.

Operation sound and mechanical sound

can be heard during movie playback.

The movie appears to freeze momentarily.

No picture on the TV set.

There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.

My card reader does not recognize the card.

Troubleshooting Guide

494

41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the camera. Use

Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process the image

(p.512).

JPEG c, 1, 41, and 61 images cannot be resized or

cropped with the camera (p.395).

If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but no

picture is taken (p.404).

If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> / <2> at a short

interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.41).

I cannot process the RAW image.

I cannot resize or crop the image.

Sensor Cleaning Problems

The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.

Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.

495

Troubleshooting Guide

When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5: Time-lapse movie]

to [Disable] (p.319).

Install the EOS software on the computer (p.513).

During a wireless connection, the camera cannot be connected to a

computer via an interface cable.

Computer Connection Problems

Communication between the connected camera and

computer does not work.

I cannot download images to a computer.

496

If there is a problem with the camera, an

error message will appear. Follow the on-

screen instructions.

* If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your nearest

Canon Service Center.

Error Codes

Number Error Message and Solution

Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the

lens contacts.

Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a Canon

lens, or remove and install the battery again (p.25, 26, 36).

Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card

with camera.

Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the

card (p.37, 64).

Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.

Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card

(p.37, 64, 378).

The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on

again.

Operate the power switch (p.41).

Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and

on again.

Operate the power switch (p.41).

10, 20

30, 40

50, 60

70, 80

An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or

re-install the battery.

Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery again, or

use a Canon lens (p.36, 41).

Error number

Cause and countermeasures

497

•Type

Type: Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in

flash

Recording media: SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards

* UHS-I cards supported

Image sensor size: Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mm

Compatible lenses: Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)

* Excluding EF-M lenses

(35mm-equivalent angle of view is that of a lens with

approx. 1.6x the focal length indicated.)

Lens mount: Canon EF mount

• Image Sensor

Type: CMOS sensor

Effective pixels: Approx. 24.2 megapixels

* Rounded off to the nearest 10,000th.

Aspect ratio: 3:2

Dust delete feature: Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending

• Recording System

Recording format: Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0

Image type: JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original),

RAW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible

Pixels recorded: L (Large) : 24.0 megapixels (6000 x 4000)

M (Medium) : Approx. 10.6 megapixels (3984 x 2656)

S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 5.9 megapixels (2976 x 1984)

S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.5 megapixels (1920 x 1280)

S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)

RAW : 24.0 megapixels (6000 x 4000)

M-RAW : 13.5 megapixels (4500 x 3000)

S-RAW : 6.0 megapixels (3000 x 2000)

Aspect ratio: 3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1

Create/select a folder: Possible

File numbering: Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset

• Image Processing During Shooting

Picture Style: Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral,

Faithful, Monochrome, User Defined 1 - 3

Specifications

498

Specifications

White balance: Auto (Ambience priority), Auto (White priority), Preset

(Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White

fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature

setting (approx. 2500-10000 K), White balance

correction, and White balance bracketing provided

* Flash color temperature information transmission

enabled

Noise reduction: Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots

Automatic image

brightness correction:

Auto Lighting Optimizer provided

Highlight tone priority: Provided

Lens aberration

correction:

Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration

correction, Distortion correction

• Viewfinder

Type: Eye-level pentaprism

Coverage

(by aspect ratio):

3:2 (vertical: approx. 100%, horizontal: approx. 100%),

4:3 (vertical: approx. 100%, horizontal: approx. 97%),

16:9 (vertical: approx. 97%, horizontal: approx. 100%),

1:1 (vertical: approx. 100%, horizontal: approx. 96%)

* With eyepoint at approx. 22mm.

Magnification: Approx. 0.95x (-1 m

-1

with 50mm lens at infinity)

Eye point: Approx. 22mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m

-1

)

Diopric adjustment

range:

Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m

-1

(dpt)

Focusing screen: Fixed

Grid display: Provided

Electronic level: Provided

Mirror: Quick-return type

Depth-of-field preview: Provided

• Autofocus

(for viewfinder shooting)

Type: TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference

detection with the dedicated AF sensor

AF points: 45 (Cross-type AF point: Max. 45 points)

* Number of available AF points, Dual cross-type AF

points, and cross-type AF points vary depending on the

lens used and aspect ratio settings.

* Dual cross-type focusing at f/2.8 with center AF point.

(AF group: When Group A lenses are used)

Focusing brightness

range:

EV -3 - 18 (with the center AF point supporting f/2.8,

One-Shot AF, at room temperature, ISO 100)

499

Specifications

Focus operation: One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing

(MF)

AF area selection mode:Single-point AF (Manual selection), Zone AF (Manual

selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection of

zone), 45-point automatic selection AF

AF point automatic

selection conditions:

AF points can be selected automatically using

information on colors equivalent to skin tones.

AI Servo AF

characteristics:

Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking,

AF point auto switching

AF fine adjustment: AF Microadjustment (All lenses by same amount or

Adjust by lens)

AF-assist beam: Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash

• Exposure Control

Metering mode: 63-zone TTL open-aperture metering using 7560-pixel

RGB plus IR metering sensor

• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)

• Partial metering (approx. 6.0% of viewfinder at center)

• Spot metering (approx. 3.8% of viewfinder at center)

• Center-weighted average metering

Metering brightness

range:

EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Shooting mode: Basic Zone modes:

Scene Intelligent Auto, Flash Off, Creative Auto, Special

scene modes (Food, Kids, Candlelight, Night Portrait,

Handheld Night Scene, HDR Backlight Control, Portrait,

Landscape, Close-up, Sports), Creative filters (Grainy

B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Toy camera effect,

Miniature effect, Water painting effect, HDR art standard,

HDR art vivid, HDR art bold, HDR art embossed)

Creative Zone modes:

Program AE, Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE,

Manual exposure, Bulb exposure, Custom shooting

mode

ISO speed

(Recommended

exposure index):

Basic Zone modes*: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set

automatically

* Handheld Night Scene: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set

automatically, Landscape: ISO 100 - ISO 1600 set

automatically

P, Tv, Av, M, B: ISO Auto, ISO 100 - ISO 16000 set

manually (1/3- and whole-stop increments), and ISO

expansion to H (equivalent to ISO 25600)

500

Specifications

ISO speed settings: Range for stills, Auto range, and Minimum shutter speed

for auto settable

Exposure

compensation:

Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

AEB: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be

combined with manual exposure compensation)

AE lock: Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF with evaluative

metering when focus is achieved

Manual: With AE lock button

Anti-flicker: Possible

Interval timer: Shooting interval and shot count settable

Bulb timer: Bulb exposure time settable

• HDR Shooting

Dynamic range

adjustment:

Auto, ±1, ±2, ±3

Effects: Natural, Art standard, Art vivid, Art bold, Art embossed

Auto image alignment: Provided

• Multiple Exposures

Number of multiple

exposures:

2 to 9 exposures

Multiple-exposure

control:

Additive, Average

•Shutter

Type: Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter

Shutter speed: 1/8000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range;

available range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync

at 1/250 sec.

• Drive System

Drive mode: Single shooting, High-speed continuous shooting,

Low-speed continuous shooting, Silent single shooting,

Silent continuous shooting, 10-sec. self-timer/remote

control, 2-sec. self-timer/remote control

Continuous shooting

speed:

High-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 7.0 shots/

sec.*

* Max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec. during Live View shooting

or when [Servo AF] is set.

Low-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/

sec.

Silent continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.

501

Specifications

Max. burst: JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 77 shots (approx. 110 shots)

RAW: Approx. 20 shots (approx. 25 shots)

RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 20 shots (approx. 22

shots)

* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2

aspect ratio, ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style) using

an 8 GB card.

* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible

16 GB card based on Canon’s testing standards.

•Flash

Built-in flash: Retractable, auto pop-up flash

Guide No.: Approx. 12/39.4 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)

Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view

Recharge time: Approx. 3 sec.

External Speedlite: Compatible with EX-series Speedlites

Flash metering: E-TTL II autoflash

Flash exposure

compensation:

±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

FE lock: Provided

PC terminal: None

Flash control: Built-in flash function settings, external Speedlite function

settings, external Speedlite Custom Function settings

Wireless flash control via optical transmission possible

•Live View Shooting

Focus method: Dual Pixel CMOS AF system

AF method: Face+Tracking, FlexiZone-Multi, FlexiZone-Single

Manual focus (approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)

AF operation: One-Shot AF, Servo AF

Focusing brightness

range:

EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Metering mode: Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering

(approx. 6.1% of Live View screen), Spot metering

(approx. 2.6% of Live View screen), Center-weighted

average metering

Metering brightness

range:

EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Exposure

compensation:

±3 stops in 1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments

502

Specifications

Creative filters: Provided

Silent LV shooting: Provided (Mode 1 and 2)

Touch shutter: Provided

Grid display: Three types

• Movie Shooting

Recording format: MOV/MP4

Movie: MPEG-4 AVC / H.264

Variable (average) bit rate

Audio: MOV: Linear PCM, MP4: AAC

Recording size and

frame rate: [MOV]

Full HD (1920x1080): 29.97p/25.00p/23.98p

[MP4]

Full HD (1920x1080): 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p/

23.98p

HD (1280x720) : 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p

Compression method: [MOV] : ALL-I (For editing/I-only)

[MP4] : IPB (Standard), IPB (Light)

Bit rate: [MOV]

Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I

: Approx. 90 Mbps

[MP4]

Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard)

: Approx. 60 Mbps

Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)

: Approx. 30 Mbps

Full HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light) : Approx. 12 Mbps

HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard) : Approx. 26 Mbps

HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light) : Approx. 4 Mbps

HDR Movie Shooting : Approx. 30 Mbps

Focus method: Dual Pixel CMOS AF system

AF method: Face+Tracking, FlexiZone-Multi, FlexiZone-Single

Manual focus (approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)

Movie Servo AF: Provided

* Movie Servo AF customizable

Digital zoom: Approx. 3x - 10x

Focusing brightness

range:

EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Metering mode: Center-weighted average or Evaluative metering

503

Specifications

Metering brightness

range:

EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Exposure control: Autoexposure shooting (Program AE for movie shooting)

and manual exposure

Exposure

compensation:

±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

ISO speed

(Recommended

exposure index):

For autoexposure shooting: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set

automatically. In Creative Zone modes, the upper limit is

expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 25600).

For manual exposure shooting: ISO Auto (ISO 100 - ISO

12800 set automatically), ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set

manually (1/3- and whole-stop increments), expandable

to H (equivalent to ISO 25600)

ISO speed settings: Range for movie shooting settable

HDR Movie Shooting: Possible

Creative filters for

movies:

Memory, Dream, Old Movies, Dramatic B&W, Miniature

effect movie

Video snapshots: Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.

Sound recording: Built-in stereo microphones, external stereo microphone

terminal provided

Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,

attenuator provided

Headphones: Headphone terminal provided, sound volume adjustable

Grid display: Three types

Time-lapse movie: Shooting interval and number of shots settable

Required shooting time period, playback length, and

remaining card capacity viewable

Still photo shooting: Not possible during movie shooting

•LCD Monitor

Type: TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor

Monitor size and dots: Wide 7.7 cm (3.0 in) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots

Brightness adjustment: Manual (7 levels)

Electronic level: Provided

Interface languages: 25

Touch screen

technology:

Capacitive sensing

Feature guide / Help: Displayable

504

Specifications

•Playback

Image display format: Single-image display (without shooting information),

Single-image display (with basic information), Single-

image display (Shooting information displayed: Detailed

information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture

Style 1, Picture Style 2, Color space/noise reduction,

Lens aberration correction), Index display (4/9/36/100

images)

Highlight alert: Overexposed highlights blink

AF point display: Provided (may not be displayed depending on shooting

conditions)

Grid display: Three types

Zoom magnification: Approx. 1.5x - 10x

Image browsing

methods:

Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting

date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating

Image rotation: Possible

Image protection: Possible

Rating: Provided

Movie playback: Enabled (LCD monitor, HDMI), built-in speaker

Slide show: All images, by date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by

rating

Background music: Selectable for slide shows and movie playback

• Post-Processing of Images

In-camera RAW image

processing:

Brightness adjustment, White balance, Picture Style,

Auto Lighting Optimizer, High ISO speed noise reduction,

JPEG image-recording quality, Color space, Peripheral

illumination correction, Distortion correction, Chromatic

aberration correction

Resize: Provided

Creative filters: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,

Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect

• Print Ordering

DPOF: Version 1.1 compliant

• Customization Features

Custom Functions: 26

My Menu: Up to 5 screens can be registered

Custom shooting mode: Register under Mode Dial’s C1 or C2

505

Specifications

• Interface

DIGITAL terminal: Computer communication (Hi-Speed USB equivalent),

GPS Receiver GP-E2, Connect Station CS100

connection

HDMI mini OUT

terminal:

Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible

External microphone IN

terminal:

3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack

Remote control terminal:For Remote Switch RS-60E3

Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6

Eye-Fi card: Compatible

•Power

Battery: Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6, quantity 1

* AC power usable with household power outlet

accessories.

* With Battery Grip BG-E14 attached, AA/R6 batteries

can be used.

Battery information: Remaining capacity, Shutter count, Recharge

performance, and Battery registration possible

Number of possible

shots:

(Based on CIPA testing

standards, with 50%

flash use)

With viewfinder shooting:

Approx. 960 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),

approx. 860 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)

With Live View shooting:

Approx. 300 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),

approx. 270 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)

Movie shooting time: Total approx. 1 hr. 50 min. at room temperature (23°C/

73°F)

Total approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at low temperatures (0°C/

32°F)

* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.

• Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions (W x H x D):Approx. 139.0 x 105.2 x 78.5 mm / 5.47 x 4.14 x 3.09 in.

Weight: Approx. 730 g / 25.75 oz. (Based on CIPA Guidelines)

Approx. 650 g / 22.93 oz. (Body only)

• Operation Environment

Working temperature

range:

0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or less

506

Specifications

• Battery Pack LP-E6N

Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

Rated voltage: 7.2 V DC

Battery capacity: 1865 mAh

Working temperature

range:

0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or less

Dimensions (W x H x D):Approx. 38.4 x 21.0 x 56.8 mm / 1.5 x 0.8 x 2.2 in.

Weight: Approx. 80 g / 2.8 oz. (excluding protective cover)

• Battery Charger LC-E6

Compatible battery: Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6

Recharging time: Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.

Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

Rated output: 8.4 V DC / 1.2 A

Working temperature

range:

5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or less

Dimensions (W x H x D):Approx. 69.0 x 33.0 x 93.0 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7 in.

Weight: Approx. 115 g / 4.1 oz.

• Battery Charger LC-E6E

Compatible battery: Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6

Power cord length: Approx. 1 m / 3.3 ft.

Recharging time: Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.

Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

Rated output: 8.4 V DC/1.2 A

Working temperature

range:

5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or less

Dimensions (W x H x D):Approx. 69.0 x 33.0 x 93.0 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7 in.

Weight: Approx. 110 g / 3.9 oz. (excluding power cord)

All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &

Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.

Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except

weight for camera body only).

Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.

If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the

respective lens manufacturer.

507

Trademarks

Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or

registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

About MPEG-4 Licensing

“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard

and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or

decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a

personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider

licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.

No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4

standard.”

* Notice displayed in English as required.

508

Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended

This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with

genuine Canon accessories.

Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such

as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g.,

a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty

does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon

accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.

Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it

with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or

accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.

509

Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland

and Liechtenstein)

These symbols indicate that this product is not to be

disposed of with your household waste, according to the

WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive

(2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing

those Directives.

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above,

in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal

(Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or

accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the

Battery Directive.

This product should be handed over to a designated collection point,

e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product

or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic

equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this

type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human

health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated

with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will

contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.

For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact

your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household

waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee,

or www.canon-europe.com/battery.

510

CAUTION

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.

511

Software Start Guide /

Downloading Images to a Computer

This chapter explains the following:



Overview of the software for EOS cameras



How to download and install the software on a computer



How to download and view the Software Instruction

Manuals (PDF files)



How to download images from the camera to a computer

512

This section explains an overview of various software applications for

EOS cameras. Internet connection is required to download and install

the software. Download and installation are not possible in

environments with no Internet connection.

EOS Utility

With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to

transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.

You can also use this software to set various camera settings and shoot

remotely from the computer connected to the camera. Also, you can

copy background music tracks, such as EOS Sample Music*, to the

card.

* You can use the background music as the soundtrack for a video snapshot

album, movie, or slide show played back with your camera.

Digital Photo Professional

This software is recommended for users who shoot RAW images. You

can view, edit, and print RAW and JPEG images.

* Some functions differ between the version to be installed on a 64-bit computer

and that to be installed on a 32-bit computer.

Picture Style Editor

You can edit Picture Styles, and create and save original Picture Style

files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in

processing images.

Software Start Guide

Software Overview

513

Software Start Guide

Download the software.



Connect to the Internet from a computer and access the following

Canon website.

www.canon.com/icpd



Select your country or region of residence and download the

software.



Decompress it on the computer.

For Windows: Click the displayed installer file to start the

installer.

For Macintosh: A dmg file will be created and displayed. Follow

the steps below to start the installer.

(1) Double-click the dmg file.



A drive icon and installer file will appear on the desktop.

If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive

icon to display it.

(2) Double-click the installer file.



The installer starts.

Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen

instructions to install.



For Macintosh, click [

Install

Downloading and Installing the Software

Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the

software. Otherwise, the software will not be installed properly.

Even if a previous version of the software is installed on your computer,

follow the procedure below to install the latest version. (The previous

version will be overwritten.)

514

Internet connection is required to download the Software Instruction

Manuals (PDF files). Download is not possible in environments with no

Internet connection.

Download the Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files).



Connect to the Internet and access the following Canon website.

www.canon.com/icpd



Select your country or region of residence and download the

Instruction Manuals.

View the Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files).



Double-click a downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open

it.



To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat

Reader DC or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version

recommended) is required.



Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded free from the

Internet.



To learn how to use a PDF viewer, refer to its Help section.

Downloading and Viewing the Software

Instruction Manuals (PDF Files)

515

You can use EOS software to download the images in the camera to a

computer. There are two ways to do this.

Install the software

(p.513)

Use an interface cable to connect

the camera to the computer.



Connect the cable to the camera’s

digital terminal with the cable plug’s

> icon facing the front of the

camera.



Connect the plug to the computer’s

USB terminal.

Use EOS Utility to download the

images.



Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction

Manual.

Downloading Images to a Computer

Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer

During a wireless connection, the camera cannot be connected to a

computer via an interface cable.

Downloading Images to a Computer

516

You can use a card reader to download images to a computer.

Install the software

(p.513)

Insert the card into the card

reader.

Use Digital Photo Professional to

download the images.



Refer to the Digital Photo

Professional Instruction Manual.

Downloading Images with a Card Reader

When downloading images from the camera to a computer with a card

reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the

computer.

517

Index

Numerics

10- or 2-sec. self-timer ..................140

1280x720 (movie) .........................307

1920x1080 (movie) .......................307

45-point AF auto selection ............120

A (Scene Intelligent Auto)............78

Access lamp....................................38

Accessories.......................................3

Adobe RGB...................................181

AE lock..........................................203

AEB

(Auto Exposure Bracketing)

...201, 413

AF area selection

mode.........................120, 121, 124

AF-assist beam.................119, 419

AF groups .................................128

AF method ........................276, 327

AF Microadjustment..................427

AF-ON (AF start) button .............50

AF operation .....................116, 274

AF point ....................................120

AF point selection .............122, 436

AF points light up in red............119

AF sensor .................................127

Area AF frame ..................120, 125

Beep (Beeper) ............................66

Color tracking ...................126, 422

Cross-type focusing..................127

Difficult subjects for AF .....136, 284

Dual cross-type focusing ..........127

Manual focusing (MF).......137, 288

Out of focus ........................49, 284

Recomposing..............................81

AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)..............118

AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ........81, 118

Tracking sensitivity ...........416, 418

ALL-I (For editing/I-only) ...............308

Ambience-based shots .................108

Angle of view .................................. 48

Anti-flicker shooting ...................... 179

Aperture-priority AE...................... 194

Area AF frame ...................... 120, 125

Art bold effect ....................... 268, 401

Aspect ratio .................................. 146

Attenuator..................................... 312

Auto Lighting Optimizer ................ 169

Auto playback............................... 369

Auto power off .......................... 41, 66

Auto reset ..................................... 185

Auto rotate vertical images........... 387

Autofocus 9 AF

Automatic selection

(AF point).............................. 120, 125

Av (Aperture-priority AE) .............. 194

B (Bulb) ........................................ 204

Background blur ............................. 86

Background music........................ 372

Basic Zone modes.......................... 30

Battery ................................ 34, 36, 42

Battery Grip ............................ 42, 468

Beep (Beeper)................................ 66

Black-and-white

images.......................... 108, 155, 159

Bracketing ............................ 168, 201

Built-in flash.................................. 228

Bulb exposures............................. 204

w (Custom shooting modes) ...... 445

C (Creative Auto) ......................... 84

Cable .................................... 373, 468

Camera

Camera shake............................ 49

Camera vibration blur............... 219

Clearing the camera settings ..... 68

518

Index

Holding the camera ....................49

Settings display ........................450

Candlelight......................................91

Cards .............................. 5, 25, 37, 64

Card reminder ............................38

Formatting ..................................64

Low-level formatting ...................65

Troubleshooting....................39, 65

Write protection ..........................37

Center-weighted average

metering........................................199

Charger.....................................32, 34

Chromatic aberration correction ...176

Cleaning (image sensor)...............403

Clearing the camera settings ..........68

Clipped highlights .........................351

Close-ups........................................97

Color saturation ............................158

Color space...................................181

Color temperature.................162, 166

Color tone .........................89, 91, 158

Continuous file numbering ............184

Continuous shooting ..................... 138

Contrast ........................................158

Creative Auto ..................................84

Creative filters.......101, 266, 316, 399

Creative filters for movies .............316

Dramatic B&W..........................318

Dream.......................................317

Memory ....................................317

Miniature effect movie ..............318

Old Movies ...............................317

O (Creative Zone) icon....................8

Creative Zone modes .....................31

Cropping (images) ........................397

Cross-type focusing ......................127

Custom Controls .....................57, 433

Custom Functions.........................410

Custom shooting mode ................ 445

Custom white balance (WB)......... 166

Date/time ........................................ 43

Daylight saving time ....................... 44

DC Coupler .................................. 456

Default settings .............................. 68

Depth-of-field preview

... 195, 256, 261

Dials

Main Dial.................................... 51

Mode Dial................................... 51

Quick Control Dial ...................... 52

Digital terminal ....................... 26, 515

Dioptric adjustment ........................ 49

Direct selection of AF point .......... 436

DPOF

(Digital Print Order Format).......... 380

Dragging......................................... 62

Drive mode................................... 138

Dual cross-type focusing.............. 127

Dust Delete Data.......................... 405

Electronic level ............................... 72

Erasing images ............................ 378

Error codes................................... 496

Evaluative metering...................... 198

exFAT ............................................. 65

Exposure compensation............... 200

Exposure level increments ........... 413

Exposure level indicator ......... 29, 451

Exposure simulation..................... 271

External Speedlite 9 Flash

Eyecup ......................................... 220

Eye-Fi cards ................................. 457

Eyepiece cover............................... 33

519

Index

FE lock ..................................232, 233

Feature guide..................................75

FEB ...............................................242

File extension................................185

File name ......................................184

File size.........................143, 309, 349

Filter effects ..................................156

Final image simulation ..........261, 301

Fine (image-recording

quality) ..................................143, 144

Firmware .......................................476

First-curtain synchronization .........241

Fish-eye effect ..............104, 268, 401

Flash (Speedlite)

Built-in flash ..............................228

Custom Functions.....................243

Effective range..........................229

External flash............................233

FE lock..............................232, 233

Flash control .............................235

Flash exposure

compensation ...........230, 233, 242

Flash mode...............................240

Flash off..............................83, 107

Flash sync contacts ....................26

Flash sync speed......................234

Manual flash .....................240, 254

Red-eye reduction ....................230

Shutter synchronization

(1st/2nd curtain)........................241

Wireless....................................241

Focus indicator................................78

Focus lock.......................................81

Focus mode switch .........47, 137, 288

Focusing 9 AF

Focusing point (AF point)..............120

Folder creation/selection...............182

Food................................................89

Formatting ...................................... 64

Frame rate.................................... 307

Full High-Definition

(Full HD) ............................... 293, 307

Functions settable by

shooting mode.............................. 460

GPS.............................................. 474

Grainy B/W ................... 103, 268, 400

Grid display ............ 71, 270, 331, 347

Handheld Night Scene ................... 93

HD (movie) ................................... 307

HDMI ............................................ 363

HDMI CEC.................................... 374

HDR.............................................. 207

HDR art bold................................. 105

HDR art embossed....................... 105

HDR art standard ......................... 104

HDR art vivid ................................ 105

HDR Backlight Control ................... 94

Help ................................................ 76

High-Definition (HD) movies......... 307

High ISO speed noise reduction

... 170

Highlight alert ............................... 351

Highlight tone priority.................... 174

High-speed continuous shooting

... 138

Histogram (Brightness/RGB)........ 352

Hot shoe ................................. 26, 233

Household power ......................... 456

ICC profile .................................... 181

Illumination (LCD panel)................. 55

Image dust prevention.................. 403

Image review time .......................... 67

Image-recording quality........ 142, 306

520

Index

Images

AF point display........................352

Auto playback...........................369

Auto rotation .............................387

Erasing .....................................378

File numbering.......................... 184

Highlight alert ...........................351

Histogram .................................352

Index display ............................353

Jump display (image browsing)

...354

Magnification ............................355

Manual rotation.........................358

Playback ...................................345

Protecting .................................376

Rating ....................................... 359

Review time................................67

Shooting information ................348

Slide show ................................ 369

Viewing on a TV set .........363, 373

Index display.................................353

INFO.

button... 258, 262, 300, 346, 450

Initializing the card (formatting).......64

Interval timer .................................223

IPB (Light).....................................308

IPB (Standard) ..............................308

ISO speed.....................148, 296, 299

Automatic setting (Auto) ........... 150

Automatic setting range............152

ISO expansion .......................... 151

Manual setting range................151

Minimum shutter speed............153

Setting increments....................413

JPEG ............................................ 142

Jump display.................................354

Kids................................................. 90

Landscape...................................... 96

Language ....................................... 46

Large

(image-recording quality) ..... 143, 395

Large Zone AF ............................. 120

LCD monitor ............................. 24, 40

Brightness adjustment ............. 386

Electronic level........................... 72

Image playback........................ 345

Menu display...................... 58, 470

Shooting function settings

... 55, 451

Vari-Angle ............................ 40, 82

LCD panel ...................................... 28

Lens ......................................... 25, 47

Chromatic aberration

correction ................................. 176

Distortion correction................. 176

Lock release .............................. 48

Peripheral illumination

correction ................................. 175

Lighting/scene-based shots ......... 112

Live View shooting ................. 82, 255

AF operation .................... 116, 274

Aspect ratio .............................. 146

Creative filters.......................... 266

Exposure simulation ................ 271

Face+Tracking ......................... 277

FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 279

FlexiZone - Single.................... 281

Grid display .............................. 270

Information display................... 258

Manual focusing (MF).............. 288

Metering timer.......................... 273

Possible shots.......................... 257

Quick Control ........................... 265

Silent shooting ......................... 272

LOCK ............................................. 54

Long exposure noise reduction.... 172

Long exposures............................ 204

Low-speed continuous shooting... 138

521

Index

M (Manual exposure)............196, 298

Macro photography .........................97

Magnified view ......................288, 355

Main Dial .........................................51

Manual exposure ..................196, 298

Manual focusing (MF) ...........137, 288

Manual reset .................................185

Manual selection (AF point) ..........122

Maximum burst .....................143, 145

Medium

(image-recording quality) ......143, 395

Memory cards 9 Cards

Menu ...............................................58

My Menu...................................440

Setting procedure .......................59

Settings.....................................470

3 icon .........................................8

Metering mode..............................198

Metering timer ...............................273

MF (manual focusing) ...........137, 288

Microadjustment............................427

Microphone ...........................294, 313

Miniature effect .............104, 269, 401

Miniature effect movies .................318

Mirror lockup .................................219

Mode Dial..................................30, 51

Monochrome images ....108, 155, 159

MOV..............................................306

Movies...........................................293

AE lock .....................................295

AF method ........................304, 327

Attenuator .................................312

Autoexposure Shooting ............294

Compression method ...............308

Creative filters...........................316

Editing out first and last scenes

...367

Enjoying movies .......................363

External microphone.................313

File size.................................... 309

Frame rate ............................... 307

Grid display .............................. 331

HDR Movie Shooting ............... 314

Information display................... 300

Manual exposure shooting....... 298

Metering timer .......................... 331

Microphone ...................... 294, 313

Movie digital zoom ................... 311

Movie recording size ................ 306

Movie Servo AF ....................... 326

Playback .......................... 363, 365

Quick Control ........................... 305

Recording time......................... 309

Sound recording....................... 312

Time-lapse ............................... 319

Video snapshot album ............. 333

Video snapshots....................... 333

Viewing on a TV set ......... 363, 373

Wind filter ................................. 312

MP4 .............................................. 306

M-RAW (Medium RAW) ....... 143, 144

Multi function lock........................... 54

Multi Shot Noise Reduction.......... 170

Multi-controller................................ 53

Multiple exposures ....................... 212

My Menu....................................... 440

Night Portrait .................................. 92

Night scenes............................. 92, 93

Noise reduction

High ISO speed........................ 170

Long exposures ....................... 172

Nomenclature ................................. 26

Non-Canon flash units.................. 234

Normal

(image-recording quality)...... 143, 144

NTSC.................................... 307, 475

522

Index

ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF)...117, 274

Orientation linked AF point ...........421

P (Program AE) ............................ 190

PAL ....................................... 307, 475

Partial metering............................. 198

Peripheral illumination correction

...175

Personal white balance.................165

Photobook set-up..........................384

Picture Style..................154, 157, 160

Pixel count ....................................142

Playback ....................................... 345

Portrait ............................................95

Possible shots.................42, 143, 257

Power

Auto power off ............................ 66

Battery information ................... 452

Battery level........................42, 452

Household power .....................456

Possible shots ....................42, 257

Recharge....................................34

Recharge performance.............452

Pressing completely........................50

Pressing halfway............................. 50

Print order (DPOF)........................ 380

Program AE ..................................190

Program shift ................................191

Protecting images .........................376

(Quick Control)

...56, 106, 265, 305, 361

Quick Control Dial...........................52

Rating........................................... 359

Rating mark.................................. 359

RAW ............................. 142, 143, 144

RAW image processing................ 390

RAW+JPEG ................................. 142

Recharging..................................... 34

Red-eye reduction........................ 230

Reduced display........................... 353

Release shutter without card.......... 38

Remote control shooting .............. 221

Remote switch.............................. 221

Resizing ....................................... 395

Rotation (image)................... 358, 387

Safety precautions ......................... 20

Safety shift ................................... 415

Scene icons.......................... 260, 297

Scene Intelligent Auto .................... 78

SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards

Second-curtain synchronization ... 241

Self-timer.............................. 140, 222

Sensitivity 9 ISO speed

Sensor cleaning ........................... 403

Sepia (Monochrome)............ 108, 159

Servo AF ...................................... 275

Sharpness .................................... 158

Shooting function settings ...... 55, 451

Shooting information display ........ 348

Shooting modes ............................. 30

Av (Aperture-priority AE).......... 194

B (Bulb).................................... 204

w (Custom shooting).............. 445

M (Manual exposure)............... 196

P (Program AE) ....................... 190

Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ............ 192

523

Index

A (Scene Intelligent Auto) .......78

C (Creative Auto) .....................84

7 (Flash Off).............................83

8 (Special scene)

P (Food)..................................89

C (Kids) ..................................90

x (Candlelight) .......................91

6 (Night Portrait) ....................92

F (Handheld Night Scene) .....93

G (HDR Backlight Control).....94

2 (Portrait)..............................95

3 (Landscape) ......................96

4 (Close-up) ...........................97

5 (Sports)..............................98

v (Creative filters) ..................101

G (Grainy B/W).....................103

W (Soft focus) .......................103

X (Fish-eye effect)................104

H (Toy camera effect) ..........104

c (Miniature effect)...............104

Z (Water painting effect) ......104

A (HDR art standard) .........104

B (HDR art vivid) ................105

C (HDR art bold) ................105

D (HDR art embossed).......105

Shutter button .................................50

Shutter synchronization

(1st/2nd curtain) ............................241

Shutter-priority AE.........................192

Silent shooting

Silent continuous shooting........138

Silent LV shooting.....................272

Silent single shooting................138

Single-image display.....................346

Single-point AF .............................120

Slide show.....................................369

Small

(image-recording quality) ......143, 395

Soft focus ......................103, 268, 400

Software........................................512

Sound-recording level ...................312

Speaker ........................................ 365

Special scene mode (SCN) ............ 88

Speedlite 9 Flash

Sports ............................................. 98

Spot metering ............................... 198

S-RAW (Small RAW)............ 143, 144

sRGB............................................ 181

Stop down aperture ...... 195, 256, 261

Strap ............................................... 33

System map ................................. 468

Tapping........................................... 61

Temperature warning............ 290, 343

Time zone....................................... 43

Time-lapse movie ......................... 319

Tone priority.................................. 174

Toning effect (monochrome)......... 159

Touch beeping ................................ 62

Touch screen .......................... 61, 356

Touch shutter................................ 286

Toy camera effect ......... 104, 269, 401

Tripod socket .................................. 27

Troubleshooting............................ 481

Tv (Shutter-priority AE)................. 192

USB (digital) terminal ................... 515

Vari-Angle LCD monitor............ 40, 82

Video snapshot album.................. 333

Video snapshots........................... 333

Video system................ 307, 373, 475

Viewfinder....................................... 29

Dioptric adjustment .................... 49

Electronic level........................... 72

Flicker detection......................... 74

Grid display ................................ 71

524

Index

Viewing on a TV set..............363, 373

Volume (movie playback)..............366

Warning icon.................................425

Water painting effect .....104, 268, 401

White balance (WB)......................162

Ambience priority (Q) ............163

Bracketing ................................168

Color temperature setting.........166

Correction .................................167

Custom .....................................164

Personal ...................................165

White priority (Q) ...................163

Wi-Fi/NFC ..................................... 474

Wind filter......................................312

Wireless communication

settings ......................................... 474

Wireless flash shooting.................244

Zone AF ........................................120

The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of January 2016.

For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,

contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,

refer to the Canon website.

CANON INC.

30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

Europe, Africa & Middle East

CANON EUROPA N.V.

PO Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands

For your local Canon ofﬁce, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support

The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.

Canon EOS 80D Instruction Manual IM EN

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation